Digital PDFs

EK-CMIV5-RM-005

December 1988

506 pages

Original

10MB

Document:	Networks Communications Communications Options Minireference Manual Volume 5 Ethernet Devices (Part 2)
Order Number:	EK-CMIV5-RM
Revision:	005
Pages:	506
Original Filename:

OCR Text

EK-CMIV5-RM-005

Networks. Communications

Communications Options
Minireference Manual
Volume 5

Ethernet Devices (Part 1)

DIGITAL INTERNAL USE ONLY

Digital Equipment Corporation

1st Edition, December 1981
2nd Edition, August 1984
3rd Edition, August 1986
4th Edition, August 1987
5th Edition, August 1988

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.

Printed in U.S.A.

This document was set on a DIGITAL DECset Integrated Publishing
System.
•

Class A Computing Devices:

Notice: This equipment generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy.
The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A computing device pursuant to SubpartJ of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such radio frequency interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own
expense may be required to take measures to correct the interference.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

mamaD!DlM
DEC
DECmate
DECset
DECsystem-l0
DECSYSTEM-20

DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL
MASSBUS
PDP
PIOS
Professional
Rainbow

RSTS
RSX
Scholar
ULTRIX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

CONTENTS
Page

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 2

ETHERNET DEVICES

2.1

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 2-1
DEBNA/DEBNK ETHERNET VAXBI CONTROLLER .......... DEBNA/DEBNK-l
General Description .................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-l
Product Configuration ................................................................ DEBNA/DEBNK-l
Product Differences .................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-2
Reference Documentation .......................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-2
Hardware Components ............................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-2
Software Components ................................................................. DEBNA/DEBNK-4
Environmental Considerations .................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-4
Power Requirements ................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-4
Installation Flow Diagram .......................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-5
Cables ......................................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-9
Self-Test Diagnostics ................................................................ DEBNA/DEBNK-Il
Self-Tests .................................................................................. DEBNA/DEBNK-l1
Self-Test Results ...................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-l1
Self-Test Interpretation ............................................................ DEBNA/DEBNK-13
ROM-Based Diagnostics (RBDs) ............................................. DEBNA/DEBNK-14
DO - DEBNx Self-Test ....................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-14
DI - Network Interconnect Diagnostic ............................... DEBNA/DEBNK-16
D2 - Tape Drive Diagnostic ................................................ DEBNA/DEBNK-18
Software Diagnostics ................................................................ DEBNA/DEBNK-19
Error Types .............................................................................. DEBNA/DEBNK-20
Error Description ..................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-20
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ DEBNA/DEBNK-21
Running ROM Diagnostics from the Console .......................... DEBNA/DEBNK-29
ROM Diagnostic Console Commands ...................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-30
EXECUTE Commands (DO, DI, D2) .................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-30
Error Reports ........................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-32
Status Reporting ...................................................................... DEBNA/DEBNK-36
DECmux II STATISTICAL MULTIPLEXER ............................................... DMXII-l
General Description .................................................................................. DMXII-I
Product Configuration ............................................................................... DMXII-2
Configuration Number I .................................................................. DMXII-2
Configuration Number 2 .................................................................. DMXII-3
DECmux II Versions ................................................................................. DMXII-4
Reference Documentation ......................................................................... DMXII-4
Component List ......................................................................................... DMXII-4
Equipment Placement ............................................................................... DMXII-5
Environmental Requirements .................................................................... DMXII-5
Physical Description .................................................................................. DMXII-5
Power Requirements .................................................................................. DMXII-5
Installation Flow Diagram......................................................................... DMXII-6

iii

CONTENTS (Coot)
Page

Cabling .................................................................................................... DMXII-ll
Diagnostics .............................................................................................. DMXII-12
DECmux II Diagnostic Summary .......................................................... DMXII-13
Off-line Test 1................................................................................ DMXII-I3
Off-line Test 2 ................................................................................ DMXII-I3
Off-line Test 3 ................................................................................ DMXII-I3
Off-line Test 4 ................................................................................ DMXII-I4
Off-line Test 5 ................................................................................ DMXII-I4
Off-line Test 6/0ff-line Test 7 ...................................................... DMXII-I4
Off-line Test 8 ................................................................................ DMXII-I4
Identifying Problems with the DECmux II ............................................ DMXII-I5
Identifying Problems with the Composite Link ...................................... DMXII-I6
Resetting the DECmux II Unit to Factory Settings ............................... DMXII-I7
DECNA ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER ................ DECNA-I
General Description ................................................................................ DECNA-I
Features ................................................................................................... DECNA-I
Reference Documentation ....................................................................... DECNA-l
Hardware Components ............................................................................ DECNA-I
Software Component ............................................................................... DECNA-2
Installation Flow Diagram ....................................................................... DECNA-3
Cabling ............................................................................... ,.................... DECNA-8
Power-Up Self-Test ................................................................................. DECNA-9
Maintenance Services Program ............................................................. DECNA-I 0
Installing the DECNA Diagnostic ............................................... DECNA-II
Running the Maintenance Services Program ............................... DECNA-II
Testing the Network ............................................................................. DECNA-I2
Test Procedure .............................................................................. DECNA-14
DECOM BROADBAND ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER ........................... DECOM-I
General Description ................................................................................ DECOM-l
DECOM Versions ................................................................................... DECOM-l
Components ............................................................................................. DECOM-2
Country Kits ........................................................................................... DECOM-2
Reference Documentation ....................................................................... DECOM-3
Device Placement .................................................................................... DECOM-4
Power Requirements ................................................................................ DECOM-5
Preinstallation Steps ................................................................................ DECOM-5
Installation Flow Diagram ....................................................................... DECOM-6
Cable Length Restrictions ..................................................................... DECOM-18
Cable Connections ................................................................................. DECOM-19
Diagnostics ............................................................................................ DECOM-20
DECOM Troubleshooting Table ............................................................ DECOM-2I
Precheck ............................................................................................... DECOM-22
Ethernet Controller Self-Test ................................................................ DECOM-22
Network Troubleshooting Table ............................................................ DECOM-23
DECOM-AX Checkout Flow Diagram ................................................ DECOM-24
DECOM-BX Checkout Flow Diagram ................................................. DECOM-3I

CONTENTS (Coot)
Page
DECrouter 200 ASYNCHRONOUS ROUTER .............................................. DR200-1
General Description ................................................................................... DR200-1
DECrouter 200 Versions ............................................................................ DR200-1
Reference Documentation .......................................................................... DR200-2
Hardware Components ............................................................................... DR200-2
Software Components ................................................................................. DR200-2
Equipment Placement ................................................................................ DR200-2
Environmental Requirements ..................................................................... DR200-2
Physical Description ................................................................................... DR200-2
Power Requirements ................................................................................... DR200-3
Installation Flow Diagram .......................................................................... DR200-3
Cabling ....................................................................................................... DR200-6
Basic Configuration Rules .......................................................................... DR200-6
Connecting Port Devices to the DECrouter 200 ....................................... DR200-7
Diagnostics ................................................................................................. DR200-8
DECrouter 200 Fault Conditions ............................................................... DR200-9
Dl LED OFF .................................................................................... DR200-9
D2 LED OFF .................................................................................... DR200-9
D2 LED Blinking ............................................................................ DR200-1 0
D3 LED Blinking ............................................................................ DR200-12
DECSA COMMUNICATIONS SERVER ..................................................... DECSA-l
General Description ................................................................................. DECSA-l
Reference Documentation ........................................................................ DECSA-l
DECSA Communications Server Hardware Components ........................ DECSA-l
DECSA Communications Server Software Components ......................... DECSA-2
System Placement .................................................................................... DECSA-3
Power Requirements ................................................................................. DECSA-3
Installation Flow Diagram ........................................................................ DECSA-4
Initial Test Indications ............................................................................. DECSA-9
Ethernet Address Display ...................................................................... DECSA-IO
DECSA Cabling .................................................................................... DECSA-ll
DECSA Diagnostics .............................................................................. DECSA-13
Diagnostic Descriptions .......................................................................... DECSA-13
Running Initial Tests and Diagnostics ................................................... DECSA-14
Running DECSA Diagnostics from a Remote Host. ............................. DECSA-14
Diagnostic Results .................................................................................. DECSA-16
Successful Initial Test Indications .......................................................... DECSA-17
Successful LDI Indications ..................................................................... DECSA-18
Fault Indications .................................................................................... DECSA-19
Initial Test Fault Indications ......................................................... DECSA-19
LDI Fault Indications .................................................................... DECSA-20
Logic Module Slot Numbers ......................................................... DECSA-21
Required Equipment .............................................................................. DECSA-22
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... DECSA-23
Module Replacement and Upgrades ....................................................... DECSA-28
M7133 PDP-l 1/24 CPU Module Replacement ........................... DECSA-28

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

M7792 DEUNA Port Module Replacement.. ............................... DECSA-29
M7793 DEUNA Link Module Replacement.. .............................. DECSA-30
M8743-xA Memory Module Replacement .................................... DECSA-30
System Upgrade ..................................................................................... DECSA-30
Backplane Terminal Strip Wiring .......................................................... DECSA-36
Secondary Power Supply Cabling .......................................................... DECSA-37
DECSA Tech Tips/FCO Index ............................................................. DECSA-38
DECserver 100 TERMINAL SERVER ....................................................... DS100-1
General Description ................................................................................... DS100-1
Product Configurations ............................................................................. DS 100-2
DECserver 100 Versions ........................................................................... DS100-2
Hardware Components .............................................................................. DS 100-3
Software Components ................................................................................ DS100-3
DECserver 100 Software ..................................................................... DSI00-3
Host Software ...................................................................................... DSI00-3
Server Software Operation ................................................................... DS 100-3
Terminal Connector Pin Assignments ....................................................... DS100-4
Application Modes .................................................................................... DS100-5
Terminals .................................................................................................. DS100-5
Reference Documentation ......................................................................... DS100-6
Device Placement ...................................................................................... DS 100-6
Installation Flow Diagram ......................................................................... DS100-7
Power Cord Length ................................................................................. DS 100-16
Ethernet Transceiver Cable Length ........................................................ DS100-16
Diagnostic Maintenance Features ............................................................ DS 100-17
Diagnostic Description ............................................................................ DSI00-17
Executing Diagnostic ............................................................................... DS 100-17
Error Indications/Symptoms .. ................................................................. DS 100-18
Status and Error Message Types ............................................................ DS 100-19
Fatal Bugcheck Error Message ............................................................... DS 100-19
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram ............................................................... DS 100-21
DECserver 200 TERMINAL SERVER ....................................................... DS200-1
General Description ..... .............................................................................. DS200-1
DECserver 200 Versions ........................................................................... DS200-2
Product Configuration ............................................................................... DS200-2
Reference Documentation ......................................................................... DS200-4
Software Components .. .............................................................................. DS200-4
Preinstallation Checklist.. .......................................................................... DS200-5
Arranging for Software Installation .......................................................... DS200-5
Installation Flow Diagram ... ...................................................................... DS200-7
Verifying Operation ................................................................................... DS200-8
Maximum Cable Length ........................................................................... DS200-9
DECserver 200/MC ............................................................................... DS200-1 0
DECserver 200/DL ................................................................................ DS200-11
Diagnostics ................................................................. ;............................ DS200-13

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page
DECserver 200 Fault Conditions ............................................................... DS200-14
D 1 LED OFF ..... .................................................................................. DS200-14
D2 LED OFF ....................................................................................... DS200-15
D2 LED Blinking ................................................................................. DS200-15
D3 LED Blinking ................................................................................. DS200-17
900-999 Console Messages ................................................................... DS200-18
DECserver 200 Crash Code List.. ........................................................ DS200-20
DECserver 500 TERMINAL SERVER .......................................................... DS500-1
General Description ... ................................................................................... DS500-1
DECserver 500 Versions .............................................................................. DS500-1
Network Configuration ................................................................................ DS500-4
Modular Hardware Description .................................................................... DS500-5
Line-Card Vectors/Addresses ....................................................................... DS500-6
DECserver 500 Software Installation Requirements .................................... DS500-8
Reference Documentation ............................................................................ DS500-9
Installation Flow Diagram ...... .................................................................... DS500-1 0
Devices ....................................................................................................... DS500-11
Device Placement ....................................................................................... DS500-12
Ethernet Connections ................................................................................. DS500-13
Port Device Connections ............................................................................ DS500-13
Diagnostic Self-Test Program .................................................................... DS500-22
Switch-Selected Diagnostic Boot Modes .................................................... DS500-23
Boot Mode 0 ..... .................................................................................... DS500-24
Boot Mode 1..... .................................................................................... DS500-24
Boot Mode 2 ..... .................................................................................... DS500-24
Boot Mode 3 ......................................................................................... DS500-25
Boot Mode 7 ......................................................................................... DS500-29
Status and Error Codes LED Display ....................................................... DS500-29
Diagnostic Status and Error Codes ....................................................... DS500-29
Server Software Status and Error Codes .............................................. DS500-29
Module Self-Test LEDs ............................................................................. DS500-32
CPU Module .............................................................................................. DS500-32
Ethernet Controller Module ....................................................................... DS500-32
CXA16, CXB16, and CXY08 Line Cards ............................................... DS500-32
Server Local Console Ports ........................................................................ DS500-32
Local Console Terminal ............................................................................. DS500-33
Spares ......................................................................................................... DS500-33
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................................. DS500-34
Cover Removal and Replacement.. ............................................................. DS500-35
Front Cover ........................................................................................... DS500-35
Rear Cover ............................................................................................ DS500-37
Module Removal ........................................................................................ DS500-38
Power Supply Removal and Installation ..................................................... DS500-40
AC Switch Assembly Removal and Installation ........................................ DS500-42
AC Line Filter Removal and Installation ... ............................................... DS500-44
Fan Removal and Installation .................................................................... DS500-47

vii

CONTENTS (Coot)
Page

CPU Module Installation Procedure ............ ..... , '" ...... ,.............................. DSSOO-49
Module Installation ..................................... ,......................................... DSSOO-49
Testing ................................................................................................... DSSOO-SO
Ethernet Controller Module Installation Procedure .................................... DSSOO-Sl
Module Preparation ............................................................................... DSSOO-Sl
Module Installation ............................................................................... DSSOO-S4
Testing ................................................................................................... DSSOO-SS
Line-Card Installation Procedure ............................................................... DSSOO-S7
Module Preparation ............................................................................... DSSOO-S7
Module Installation .. ............................................................................. DSSOO-61
Testing ........................................... ........................................................ DSSOO-62
Connecting a Local Console Terminal ....................................................... DSSOO-63

viii

QUICK REFERENCE CHECK
Use this quick reference as a resource to identify the major sections in the 7 volumes ofthe Communications Options
Minire/erence Manual
VOLUME 1 COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
Float-Address Vectors
Cables
Test Connectors
Special Test Programs
Special Tools and Equipment
EINCCITT Data
Vendor Modem Products
Data Communication Troubleshooting
Communication Devices
DHII
DHB32
DHQll
DHUll
DHVII
DMB32
DMCll
DMF32
VOLUME 2

COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS (CONT)

DMPII
DMRII
DMVII
DMZ32
DPVll
DSB32
DSVII
DUPII
DUVII
DZII
DZ32
DZQll
DZVll
KMVIA/KMVIA-S
VOLUME 3

DIGITAL MODEMS (PART I)

EINCCITT Data
Vendor Modem Products
Modems
DF02/DF03
DF112
DF124
DF124+
DF126
DF127
DF129
DF212-CA
DF224
DF242-CA
DFAOI
Command Summary

VOLUME 4

DIGITAL MODEMS (PART 2)

Enclosures
DFMDevices
DFM Statistical Multiplexer
DFM X.25 PAD
Test Procedures
Modem Option Dictionary
Modem Theory
Autodialer Command/Response

VOLUME 5 ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 1)
Ethernet Devices
DEBNA/DEBNK
DECmux II
DECNA
DECOM
DECrouter 200
DECSA
DEC server 100
DEC server 200
DEC server 500

VOLUME 6 ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 2)
Ethernet Devices (Cont)
DEFTR
DELNI
DELUA
DEMPR
DEMWA
DEPCA
DEQNA
DE REP
DESNC
DESPR
DESTA

VOLUME 7 ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 3)
Ethernet Devices (Cont)
DEUNA
H4000
H400S
LAN Bridge 100
MUXserver 100
TPENET
Cables
Special Tools and Test Equipment
Network Troubleshooting
Ethernet Configuration

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

The Communications Options Minireference series of manuals provide Field Service personnel (trained in
Digital Equipment Corporation's communications options, DEC modem products, and Ethernet products)
with easy-to-use references that focus on essential installation and maintenance procedures.
This series of manuals is a replacement for and supersedes the Communications Options Minireference
Manual (EK-CMINI-RM). All of the information contained in the Communications Options Minireference Manual is included. Information concerning most of Digital Equipment Corporation's new communication options, modem products, and Ethernet products has also been included. These manuals will be
updated as new communications options, modem products, and Ethernet products are produced.
To effectively use these reference manuals and to quickly locate the desired information, it is important
that the user be aware of the organization and content of the various manuals.
•

Volume 1 contains generic communications information such as: cables, test connectors and
terminators, special test programs, and special tools and equipment Volume 1 also contains
information concerning installation and maintenance of some of the communications options.

•

Volume 2 contains only communications options. Communications options are presented in
alphanumerical order beginning in Volume 1 and continuing into Volume 2.

•

Volumes 3 and 4 contain information concerning Digital Equipment Corporation's modem
products.

•

Volumes 5,6, and 7 contain information concerning installation and maintenance of Ethernet
products. Chapters include EthernetDevices, Cables, Special Tools and Test Equipment, Network
Troubleshooting, and Ethernet Configuration. Provisions are made for adding information as it
becomes available.

Option-specific data is located alphanumerically by option designation.

1-1

CHAPTER 2
ETHERNET DEVICES

2.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains all information needed to configure, install, and test a variety of Digital Equipment
Corporation's Ethernet devices.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide Field Service personnel (trained in servicing Ethernet devices)
with a quick reference guide, highlighting important factors concerning installation and maintenance. The
information contained in these sections is, therefore, short and to the point. If more detailed information is
needed, reference should be made to microfiche, the technical manual, or other reference material
concerning that particular device.
Each specific section contained in this chapter is organized in alphanumeric order.

2-1

DEBNA/DEBNK INSTALLATION
DEBNA/DEBNK ETHERNET VAXBI CONTROLLER
General Description
The DEBNx model number describes a family of intelligent I/O controllers for the VAXBI bus.
•

DEBNA is an IEEE 802.3-compatible, standard Ethernet interface for VAX 8000-series
systems.

•

DEBNK is identical to DEBNA, but has an on-board TK50 streaming tape-drive
controller. DEBNK is an option for OEM applications.

DEBNA and DEBNK are both T1034 (41OF) modules and the modules can be distinguished by their
VAXBI device type (Bile bb + 0).
Specific TK50 information for DEBNK and operational support for DEBNA can be found in the VAX

Systems and Options Catalog.
Product Configuration
DEBNx enables the host system processor to communicate with other processors in an Ethernet LAN
(as shown in Figure 1).

Ethernet
TRANSCEIVER
H4000

Ethernet

DEBNx

HOST

VAXBI BUS
y
MKV88-12S4

Figure 1 DEBNx in a VAXBI System

DEBNA/DEBNK-l

DEBNA/DEBNK INSTALLATION

Product Differences
The only DEBNK-exc1usive feature is that it supports tape. Both DEBNA and DEBNK have the following
basic components.
•

VAXBI corner (interface): BIlC and BCI3 chips

•

Central processor and memory:
MicroVAX processor chip and associated logic
MicroVAX RAM, patch RAM, and ROM

•

Tape controller:
. 80186 processor chip and associated logic
80816 RAM, patch RAM, and ROM
MPSC (DIGITAL proprietary tape protocol) chip
AD16 bus for 80816 and 80816 memory

•

Ethernet/802.3 controller: LANCE and SIA (Ethernet) chips

•

1116 bus to provide access to the MicroVAX processor and MicroVAX memory for tape controller
and Ethernet controller

•

1132 bus to connect MicroVAX processor and VAXBI corner

•

IEEE 802.3 compatibility

•

MicroVAX buffer RAM of 128 Kbytes

Reference Documentation
The following related documentation is available to support servicing.
DEBNA/ DEBNK Installation Guide

EK-DEBNX-IN

DEBNA/ DEBNK Technical Manual

EK-DEBNX-TM

VAXBI Options Handbook

EB':27271-46

TK50D, TK50R Tape Drive Subsystem Owner's Manual

EK-LOP05-0M

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

Hardware Components
DEBNx is made up of the following component groups (see Figure 2).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

MicroVAX processor and associated control .logic
MicroVAX memory and patch hardware
MEM bus
1132 bus
VAXBI interface logic
Ethernet controller
Tape controller

DEBNA/DEBNK-2

-------1
"

I
TAPE
CONTROLLER

TRANSCEIVER/
MULTIPLEXER

1116/MEM
TRANSCEIVER/
MULTIPLEXER

MPSC

ADDRESS
LATCH

LANCE'

•

l:J

I
:

TK50 TAPE DRIVE

SIA'

tTl

ETHERNET CONTROLLER

MEM BUS

0:;

;l>

80186

I
I
--------,,-,
Eth,m,t
· TRA~:~~~VER
..

~
Ethernet

..........

tTl

0:;

II 32 BUS

VAXBI
INTERFACE
LOGIC

{~C13

L ______ _

MicroVAX
MEMORY
ADDRESS .-LATCH

MicroVAX

"'"

ROM
}
PATCH RAM
BUFFER RAM
_

1132
MEMORY

=
,>
Z

B11 C

----------------------------------------~

rJ'J.

VAXBI BUS
MKV88-1255

Figure 2

DEBNx Hardware Components

r
r

DEBNA/DEBNK INSTALLATION
Software Components
Where DEBNA has only a network interconnect (NI) port, DEBNK is a multi port adapter. The NI port is
the controller's interface to Ethernet. DEBNK has both an NI port and a tape/storage port.
The two ports are controlled by logically-distinct port drivers on the host. Port status will not affect one
another except in the following situations.
•

A hardware failure or several logical failures in DEBNx.

•

DEBNx receives a VAXBI command that forces both ports to the "Stopped" state.

•

A BVP (BIVAX Port) RESTART command forces both ports to the "Undefined" state.

•

A VAXBI node reset to the DEBNx forces both ports to the "Undefined" state.

For more information on DEBNx software compoments, refer to the DEBNA/ DEBNK Technical Manual.
Environmental Considerations
Table 1 describes the DEBNx operational and storage limitations.
Table 1 Operational and Storage Limitations
Specification

Operating

Storage

Temperature
Degrees

5°C to 50°C
(41°F to 122°F)

-40°C to 66°C
(-40°F to 151°F)

Humidity
Noncondensing

10% to 95%

Up to 95%

Maximum Altitude

2,400 m
(8,000 ft)

9,000 m
(30,000 ft)

Power
Consumption

33.6 Watts Average

Power Requirements
The power requirements for DEBNx are +5 Volts at 6.72 Amperes.

DEBNA/DEBNK-4

DEBNA/DEBNKINSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram
Figure 3 is the DEBNx installation flow diagram.

• TRANSCEIVER
CABLE LENGTH
LIMITS (45 M)
PREINSTALLATION
CONSIDERATIONS

•
•
•
•

MULTIPLE DEBNA
DEVICE PLACEMENT
NODE ID PLUG
POWER
REQUIREMENTS

DO NOT INSTALL
OPTION.

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED.

REFER TO DEBNA
RELEASE NOTES.
ADJUST SYSGEN
PARAMETERS. THESE
CHANGES WILL TAKE
ON NEXT REBOOT.

MKV88·1256

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DEBNA/DEBNK-5

DEBNA/DEBNKINSTALLATION

SHUT DOWN THE VMS
OPERATING SYSTEM.

POWER DOWN VAX
SYSTEM.

INSTALL THE NODE
ID PLUG AT THE
BACKPLANE ABOVE
THE BI TRANSITION
HEADER.

RUN THE INTERNAL
Ethernet CABLE FROM
THE BACKPLANE
SEGMENT E2 TO TH E
Ethernet I/O CONNECTOR PANEL.

ATTACH THE PIGTAIL
CONNECTOR FROM
THE INTERNAL
Ethernet CABLE TO A
+15 V TWO- PRONG
CONNECTOR FROM
THE POWER SUPPLY.

NOTE:
ONLY ONE DEBNA
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
CAN POWER AN
H4000. SUBSEQUENT DEBNA
TRANSCEIVERS MUST
CONNECT TO A DELNI
OR A SELF-POWERED
TRANSCEIVER.

MKV88-1257

Figure 3

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DEBNA/DEBNK-6

DEBNA/DEBNKINSTALLATION

(RECOMMENDED)
INSTALL BOOT
ENABLE JUMPER ON
BACKPLANE SEGMENT
E1 PINS E16 AND E46.

LOCATE THE CARD
CAGE SLOT OPPOSITE
THE DEBNx TRANSITION HEADER.

LIFT THE LOCKING
LEVER TO OPEN THE
BI SLOT.

SLIDE THE DEBNx
MODULE INTO THE
CARD CAGE UNTIL
IT STOPS.

CLOSE THE LOCKING
LEVER TO LOCK THE
DEBNx INTO PLACE.

MKV88-1258

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DEBN A/DEBNK-7

DEBNA/DEBNK INSTALLATION

POWER ON THE VAX
SYSTEM.

VERIFY SELF-TEST
COMPLETED
SUCCESSFULLY.

RUN MACRO LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS.

BOOT VMS AND
CH ECK DECnet
OPERATION:
• LOOP NODE
• FILE TRANSFER

CHECK LAT
TERMINAL SERVER
OPERATION:
• LATCP COUNT
• NCP LINE BNT-O
COUNT
• NCP CIRCUIT
BNT-O COUNT

MKV88-1259

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DEBNA/DEBNK-8

DEBNA/DEBNK CABLING
Cables
DEBNx cabling, connectors, and jumpers are described in Figures 4 and 5.

02
]

BOOT-ENABLE
JUMPER

[

]

• TO
TK50 I/O CONNECTOR PANEL
• TO ETHERNET I/O CONNECTOR PANEL
MKV88·1260

Figure 4

DEBNx Cabling at VAXBI Connector

NODE ID PLUGS

E1 CONNECTOR

46 16
C-o

o
o
o
o
o

0
0
0

0
0

60 30
MKV88-1261

Figure 5

Ethernet Boot-Enable Jumper

DEBNA/DEBNK-9

DEBNAjDEBNK CABLING
Table 2 lists the TK50 cable connector pinouts at the VAXBI cage.
Table 2 Tape Drive Cable Connector Pinouts
Pin

Signal

DOl
D3l
D02
D32
D03
D33
D04
D03
D05
D35
D06
D36
D07
D37
D08
D38
D09

DRIVE PRESENT
UNCONNECTED
DRIVE WRITE CLOCK H
DRIVE WRITE CLOCK L
DRIVE STATUS L
GROUND
GROUND
DRIVE STATUS H
DRIVE READ DATA L
DRIVE READ DATA H
DRIVE READ CLOCK H
GROUND
GROUND
DRIVE READ CLOCK L
DRIVE ERASE ENABLE L
DRIVE ERASE ENABLE H
DRIVE WRITE
GATE ENABLE L
GROUND
GROUND
DRIVE WRITE
GATE ENABLE H
DRIVE DR COMMAND H
DRIVE DR COMMAND L
DRIVE WRITE DATA L
GROUND
GROUND
DRIVE WRITE DATA H

D39
DlO
D40
Dll
D4l
D12
D42
D13
D43

Type

Description

I
I
I

Differential WRITE CLOCK signals.

I
I
I
I

Differential serial drive status data signal (low).
Differential serial drive status data signal (high).
Differential READ data signal.
Differential READ CLOCK signal (high).

I
0
0
0

Differential READ CLOCK signal (low).
Differential signals from the Erase Enable
Register.
Differential signal (low) from the Drive WRITE
Gate Enable Register.

Differential signal (high) from the Drive WRITE
Gate Enable Register.
Differential serial drive command signals.

0
0
0
0

Differential WRITE data signal (low).
Differential WRITE data signal (high).

DEBNAjDEBNK-lO

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS
Self-Test Diagnostics
Self-Tests
DEBNx power-up self-tests are standalone ROM-based diagnostic routines that run automatically,
•
•

When the host is powered up.
When the host system is reset.

Self-testing can also be run from a VAX 8200/8300-series console using the DO tests. Example, where
DEBNx is on Node 5:
<CTRL/P>
»> Z 5
T/R
RBD5> DO
(tests run and results are displayed)
RBD5> QUIT
<CTRL/P>
»>
BIle performs its own self-test on power-up. The BIIC:
•

Sets Broke, Initialization, and Self-Test status bits in its VAXBICSR.

•

Sets STS bit to indicate that BIIC passed its internal self-test.

•

Disables VAXBI bus drivers if self-test fails.

Self-Test Results
Pass/fail self-test results are reported in four ways:
•

Node status (as a whole) is reported on the VAXBI bus:
BI BAD asserted = failure

•

Status is reported on the module LEDs. Figure 6 shows the LED locations:
One yellow DEBNx OK indicator; ON = OK
One Tape OK indicator; green = tape present

•

Status is shown by registers during testing:
VAXBICSR
Port Status (PS) Register

•

Status is shown after testing:
Port Error (PE) Register contains an error message.
Port Data (PD) Register contains a copy of the Power-up Diagnostic Register (PUDR)
which provides additional information.

DEBNA/DEBNK-ll

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS

B
1
VAXBI
CORNER

w
C!l

a::::J 1

a:
0

CD 2

w
Z
Z

MKV88-'262

Figure 6

Self-Test LEOs

Table 3 shows how to use the VAXBICSR and PS Register to determine OEBNx status after self-testing.
This table indicates when to read the PE and PO Registers for more information.
Table 3 State of DEBNx During and After Self-Test
VAXBICSR
STS
Broke

PS Register
STD ACC

State of DEBNx

Additional
Information

The BIIC passed its selftest; self-test is still
in progress.

None

The DEBNx failed self-test
and is not minimally
functional.

PO Register contains the
PUDR. PE Register contains FFOO 0003.

The DEBNx is minimally
functional; self-test is
still in progress.

PD Register contains a
running count during selftest.

The DEBNx is minimally
functional. but a
noncritical component
failed self-test.

PD Register contains the
PUDR. PE Register contains FFOO 0004.

The DEBNx node is fully
functional; self-test
has passed.

PD and PE Registers contain zero.

OEBNA/OEBNK-12

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS
Self-test checks the following components.
DEBNx module components:
•

MicroVAX
ROM
RAM
Patch hardware

•
•
•

BIIC and BC 13 chips
LANCE chip
MicroVAX 80186 communications

DEBNx tape controller chips:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Multiprotocol serial controller
80186 microprocessor
80186 gap-detection hardware
80186 patch registers
80186 patch PAL
80186 buffer and patch RAM
80186 ROM
80186 tape-control registers

Self-Test Interpretation
After most self-test failures, system software can examine the VAXBICSR, PS, PE, and PD Registers to
determine which components are usable. Based on this information, the system can decide that the node is
still usable for certain tasks. If the BIIC chip fails its self-test, however, it disables its VAXBI drives. This
puts the entire node off-line making the BVP registers inaccessible.
If the PD Register indicates that all the components have failed, the problem is probably the BIIC,
MicroVAX, or MicroVAX ROM. If one of these components fails, the self-test routine stops, and the
MicroVAX enters a WAIT state.

DEBNA/DEBNK-13

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS
ROM-Based Diagnostics (RBDs)
The tests in each category are described in Tables 4 through 6. Individual tests, or test groups, can be
invoked with commands from the operator's console or, for the Dl or D2 tests, executed through the VAX
Diagnostic Supervisor (VDS).
DO - DEBNx Self-Test - The DEBNx self-test, which is functionally equivalent to the DEBNx power-up
self-test, performs a basic confidence check of the module. Table 4 describes the tests in the DEBNx self-test
diagnostic. The test execution parameters and method of fault reporting can be selected with the appropriate
run-time switches. With no test number, DO executes all tests by default.
When any DO test is selected, an internal self-check of the BIIC chip is executed. After a 250-millisecond
delay, the self-test status (STS) bit in the VAXBI Control and Status Register is checked. If the BIIC failed
the self-check, the STS bit is cleared and the VAXBI bus registers are disabled. This inhibits further
communication with the DEBNx module.
Table 4 DO DEBNx Self-Test
Diagnostic/
Test

Name

Description

DO/Tl

ROMCRC

Calculates a longword CRC for each ROM section. Compares calculated CRC to corresponding stored CRe.

DO/T2

RAM

First verifies byte mask logic, then the nonstack area of
RAM, then moves stack into verified RAM and verifies
untested stack area. (Also verifies data and address lines.)

DO/T3

Patch

Disables patch function and toggles each patch register bit.
Enables patch function and executes single patch
operation.

DO/T4

MicroVAX
Critical
Path

Checks critical timing and principal microinstructions.

DO/T5

IRQ Lines

Steps through all IPLs (interrupt priority levels) to verify
that no IRQ line is stuck asserted.

DO/T6

Interval
Timer

Verifies interval time operation.

DO/T7

BI Corner

Performs seven subtests to verify BIIC and BC13 chips.
Exits to next test if test fails.

DO/T8

NI LANCE
Chip

Verifies LANCE chip and CRC logic in the Ethernet
controller. (SIA chip not tested.)

DO/T9*

ROMCRC

Calculates a longword CRC for each ROM section. Compares calculated CRC to corresponding stored CRC.

DEBN A/DEBNK-14

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS

Table 4 DO DEBNx Self-Test (Cont)
Diagnostic/
Test

Name

Description

DO/T10*

RAM

First verifies byte mask logic, then the nons tack area of
RAM, then moves stack in to verified RAM and verifies
untested stack area. (Also verifies data and address lines.)

DO/TIl *

Patch

Disables patch function and toggles each patch register bit.
Enables patch function and executes single patch
operation.

DO/T12*

CPU/Timer

Verifies basic functionality of both the 80186 CPU and
the programmable timers.

DO/T13*

Miscellaneous
Registers

Enables and disables the WRITE Drive Gate, Driver
Erase, and Patch Enable Registers.

DO/T14*

Gap Detect

Verifies gap detection logic in tape controller.

DO/T15*

MPSC

Verifies multiprotocol serial controller (MPSC) chip.

DO/T16*

CPU
Communications

Verifies communication and interrupt operations between
the 80186 and MicroVAX CPUs.

DO/T17

Drive Present

Checks that drive present bit is set in Tape Status Register.

*DO tests 9 through 16 are 80186 tests.

DEBNA/DEBNK-15

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS
Dl - Network Interconnect Diagnostic - The network interconnect (NI) diagnostic consists of the two test
routines described in Table 5. These tests verify the operation of the Ethernet controller, cable, link, and
transceiver. Test 2 is the default. Tests 1 and 2 should not be run at the same time because their run-time
environments are different.
Typically, test 2 is run first to verify the entire Ethernet system. This test verifies that the Ethernet link
from the Ethernet controller (LANCE/SIA subsystem), through the transceiver cable, to the transceiver is
functioning properly., If test 2 passes, no further Ethernet testing is required.
Table 5 Dl Network Interconnect Tests
Diagnostic/Test

Name

Description

Dl/Tl

External Loopback
(with connector)

Transmits data through the SIA chip and verifes that the same data is received through the
loopback connector.

Dl/T2

External Loopback
(on live Ethernet)

Transmits data through the SIA chip and verifies that the same data is received from the
Ethernet bus.

NOTE
For test 2 to execute properly, the DEBNx module
must be connected to an operational Ethernet bus, a
DELNI in loopback mode, or an H4000 transceiver.
The test may fail if there is excessive traffic
on the bus.

Test 2 retries automatically after detecting any of these errors:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Loss of carrier
Retry error
CRC error
Framing error
Babble error
Missed packet error
Overflow error
Buffer error

Test 2 fails when any of the following conditions occur:

•
•
•
•
•
•

32 retries
Transmission error
Descriptor ring error
CRC error
Memory error
Underflow error

DEBNA/DEBNK-16

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS

If test 2 fails, run test 1 to isolate the faulty field replaceable unit (FRU). Follow these steps:
1.

Disconnect the external Ethernet transceiver cable (BNE3) at the transceiver end.

Install a loop back connector on the cable.

Run test 1 and observe one of the following:
a.

If test 1 passes, the transceiver is bad. Replace the transceiver, reconnect'the cable to the
new transceiver, and run test 2 to verify proper operation. No further action is required.

If test 1 fails, one of the following is bad: transceiver cable, internal Ethernet cable,
backplane, or DEBNx module. Go to the next step.

Disconnect the external transceiver cable at the I/O connector panel and install a loopback
connector in its place.

Rerun test 1 and observe one of the following:

If test 1 passes, the transceiver cable is bad. Replace the cable and run test 2 to verify proper
operation. No further action is required.

If test 1 fails, one of the following is bad: internal Ethernet cable, backplane, or DEBNx
module. Replace the internal Ethernet cable. Go to the next step.

Rerun test 1 and observe one of the following:
a.

If test 1 passes, the removed cable is bad. Run test 2 to verify proper operation. No further
action is required.

If test 1 fails, either the DEBNx module or the backplane is bad. If the module passes selftest, it is probably good, but replace it and go to the next step.

Rerun test 1 and observe one of the following:
a.

If test 1 passes, the removed DEBNx module is bad. Run test 2 to verify proper operation.
No further action is required.

If test 1 fails, the backplane is bad. Install the DEBNx module in a different slot. Run test 2
to verify proper operation. Consider replacing the card cage.

DEBNA/DEBNK-17

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS
D2 - Tape Drive Diagnostic - The tape drive diagnostic tests are described in Table 6. Tests 1 through 6
detect hard (nonintermittent) errors. Tests 7 through 9 detect hard and/or soft media errors.
Table 6 D2 Tape Drive Tests
Diagnostic/
Test

Name

Description

D2/Tl

Initialization

Verifies drive initialization by resetting the drive then
checking drive status, hardware, and software revision
levels.

D2/T2

On-line and
Calibration

Rewinds tape to BOT and verifies that drive
READ/WRITE heads can be calibrated.

D2/T3

Tape Motion

Verifies that drive can move tape rapidly forward and
backward.

D2/T4

WRITE
(destructive) *

Verifies that drive can WRITE tape by rewinding to BOT
and then WRITing a test pattern on track O. Test fails
with initialization error if tape cartridge is WRITE-protected or drive is powered down.

D2/T5

READ

(Requires Prewritten tape.) Verifies that drive can READ
tape by rewinding to BOT and then READing track O.
Test fails if READ error occurs or tape does not contain
fixed-length records.

D2/T6

WRITE/READ
(destructive)*

Verifies that drive can WRITE, reposition, and then
READ tape. READ data is compared byte-for-byte to
WRITE data.

D2/T7

Thrashing WRITE
(destructive) *

Verifies drive functionality by WRITing individual test
pattern records to tracks 0 and 1. After each record is
written, tape is stopped and repositioned before another
record is written. Requires about 15 minutes to complete.

D2/T8

Thrashing READ

Verifies drive functionality. Requires approximately 25
minutes to READ a prerecorded tape.

D2/T9

Thrashing
WRITE/READ
(destructive) *

Verifies drive functionality by WRITing and READing
individual test pattern records from tracks 0 and 1. With
no parameter given, testing requires approximately 40 minutes. To test the entire tape takes about 8 hours.

*The command for these tests requires the /C (confirm) switch.

DEBNA/DEBNK-18

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS

The tape drive diagnostic should be run when:
•
•
•

DEBNx tests fail to isolate a malfunction
Tape errors are intermittent
Media integrity is questionable

Since some of the tape tests destroy user data, a confirm (lC) run-time switch is required to execute these
tests. Use a scratch or blank tape for the destructive tests.
If no test numbers are specified, the diagnostic runs tests 1-6.
Software Diagnostics
Table 7 lists the diagnostics that support DEBNx modules. The EVDYC and EVMDD diagnostics can
interface with the DI and D2 ROM-based diagnostics using standard operating procedures under the VAX
diagnostic supervisor (VDS).

Table 7 Down-line Loaded Diagnostic Programs
Program

Level

Description

EVDYC

Provides user interface to D 1 RBDs

EVMDD

Provides user interface to D2 RBDs

EVDYD

Tests NI port functions

EVDWC

Tests installation of host Ethernet node and all local nodes supporting MOP protocol

EVMDA

Tests TK50 tape drive

Run the Level 3 diagnostics and DI/D2 tests as follows:
•
•

Boot VDS
When the prompt DS> appears, enter:
ATTACH DEBNK HUB ETA n (where n = node to test)
ATTACH LANCE ETA ETAO
SELECT ETAO
RUN EVDYC

Shut down all protocol before running the Level 2R diagnostics from VMS as follows:
•
•
•

Boot VMS
Run the VDS
Enter the commands, as shown above

DEBNA/DEBNK-19

DEBNA/DEBNK DIAGNOSTICS
Error Types
Three types of errors are possible:
Fatal

System error that stops diagnostic program.

Hard

Device error that prevents device from completing the current test.

Soft

Device error, usually intermittent, that probably will not repeat on the next pass.

Error Description
A sample error report is shown in Figure 7.

F
SE

4
NI

410F
00

69 ASASASAS OOASASAS

000000002
T02
000000000 00000010

1FF81020

LINE 1:

F= FAIL
4 = VAXBI NODE NUMBER
41 OF = DEBNA MODULE
00000002 = PASS 41= (IN HEXADECIMAL)

LINE 2:

SE = SOFT DEVICE ERROR
NI = NETWORK INTERCONNECT (ETHERNET LINK)
00 = UNIT NUMBER
T02 = TEST NUMBER

LINE 3:

69 = ERROR CODE NUMBER
A5A5A5A5 = EXPECTED DATA
00A5A5A5 = DATA RECEIVED
00000000 = SCB OFFSET (NOT APPLICABLE)
00000010= RAM LOCATION OF RECEIVED DATA, EXPRESSED AS HEX OFFSET
1 FF81 020 = ROM PC VALUE AT WHICH ERROR WAS DETECTED

MKV88-1263

Figure 7 Sample Error Report

Troubleshooting guidelines and additional diagnostic tests are included in the following Maintenance Aids
section.

DEBNA/DEBNK-20

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting
Use the Troubleshooting Flowchart (see Figure 8) to isolate hardware and software problems to the module
level. Run the recommended diagnostic tests where indicated.

SYSTEM CRASH

• UPGRADE DEBNA
HARDWARE
AND/OR
ETDRIVER. EXE
• VMS/SYSTEM
MEMORY
MANAGEMENT
AND/OR SYSGEN
PARAMETER
TUNING PROBLEM
• FOREIGN DEVICE
DRIVER bug.
(XMIT_CMD_
TIMEOUT)

MKV88-1264

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-21

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

CHECK NCP LINE
ERROR COUNTERS/
SYMPTOMS

CHECK SYSGEN AND
NCP TUNING. REFER
TO DEBNA RELEASE
NOTES.
SYSGEN: LRPSIZE,
LRPCOUNT,
SCSBUFFCNT
NCP: LINE RECEIVE
BUFFERS, LINE DEV
BUFFER SIZE
LOADNET.COM:
NETACP/BUFFER
LIMIT

• INVESTIGATE
APPLICATION
• PROTOCOLS USED
• APPLICATION
TUNING
• SYSTEM
RESOURCE
DEPENDENCIES
(SYSGEN, IRP,
SRP, NPAGEDYN,
ETC.)

MKV88-'265

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-22

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

• UPGRADE TO
DEBNA T1034
(CHAINED BUFFER
PROBLEM)
NO

• VMS V4.X
ETDRIVER BUG
ON ENCOUNTERING
INSFMEM FOR
PROMISCUOUS
USER START-UP.
FIXED IN VMS
V5.0 (OR)
• FIX INSFMEM (OR)
(PATCH ETDRIVER)
• DISABLE OTHER
PROTOCOLS (OR)
• DO NOT USE
PROMISCUOUS
MODE.

CONSULT
CSC-NETWORK
SUPPORT UNIT
OR CSSE

MKV8B-1266

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-23

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

YES

• VMS V4.6/4.7
ETDRIVER BUG .
• USE PATCHED
ETDRIVER.

• INVESTIGATE
APPLICATION
• PROTOCOLS USED
• APPLICATION
TUNING
• SYSTEM RESOURCE
DEPENDENCIES
(SYSGEN, IRP, SRP,
NPAGEDYN, ETC.)

• VMS 4.X
LIMITATION BUG
• DYNAMIC
RCV _ BUFFER
ALLOCATION
• FIXED IN VMS
V5.0
• CONSULT CSSE
• UNPATCHED
ETDRIVER
• MIS-INSTALLED
OR NOT REBOOTED
ETDRIVER
• UNKNOWN
ETDRIVER BUG
CONTACT CSSE!

MKV88·1267

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-24

DEBNAjDEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

RUN NCP
FUNCTIONAL TEST
• LOOP NODE TEST
• LOOP LINE TEST

• MONITOR NCP>
SHOW LINE BNT-O
COUNT (DATABLOCKS SENT/RCV
AT 5 SECOND
INTERVALS)

STOP ALL OTHER
PROTOCOLS. (TIP/IP,
RBMS, ETC.)

MKV88-1268

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 5 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-25

DEBNAjDEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

• REFER TO
EVDYD.EXE
DIAGNOSTIC
MICROCODE
LISTINGS
• T1034/DEBNA
HARDWARE
PROBLEM

FIX HARDWARE

CONTACT THE CSCNETWORK SUPPORT
UNIT OR CSSE

NOTE:
IF THERE ARE STILL PROBLEMS, THE NCP
ERROR COUNTER CHECK ON THE FOLLOWING
PAGES ISOLATES PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED
WITH MORE SUBTLE FAILURES.
MKV88·1269

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 6 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-26

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

NCP> SHOW LINE
BNT-O COUNT

• SIGNETICS CHIP
(74S240) E69.
REPLACE DEBNA.
• H4000/DELNI
• BULKHEAD CABLE
• I/O CONNECTOR
• NI TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

•
•
•
•

H4000/DELNI
BULKHEAD CABLE
I/O CONNECTOR
NI TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

•
•
•
•

H4000/DELNI
BULKHEAD CABLE
I/O CONNECTOR
NI TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
,. REMOTE NODE
FAILURE

MKV88-1270

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 7 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-27

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

• REMOTE NI NODE
TRANSMITTING
UN ENABLED
PROTOCOL
PACKETS
NO

• BABBLING REMOTE
NODE
• NI BRIDGE FAILURE
• OLD VMS V4.5
ETDRIVER
• VMS SYSTEM
TUNING (PAGEFILE,
FREE/MODI FI ED
PAGELlST)

• NCP/DECnet
TUNING (PIPELINE
QUOTA, LINE
RECEIVE BUFFER)
• NETACP BUFFER
LIMIT (BUFFER I/O
BYTE COUNT LIMIT)
EXHAUSTED.
DOUBLE THE
VALUE.

MKV88·1271

Figure 8 Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 8 of 8)

DEBNA/DEBNK-28

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS
Running ROM Diagnostics from the Console
The ROM-based diagnostics (RBDs) are standalone programs that can be controlled and executed from the
VAX 8200/8300-series console. The Dl and D2 tests, along with the other diagnostics listed in the
DIAGNOSTICS section of this option, can also be executed through the VAX diagnostic supervisor (VDS).
To run the RBDs from the operator's VAXBI console, perform the following:
1.

Enter Console mode by typing the following characters at the system prompt:
»>Zn
T/R
RBDn>
where n is the node ID (O-F hex) of the node under test.

Select the desired diagnostic testes) by entering the appropriate EXECUTE command along with
the applicable run-time switches.

Terminate the diagnostics by entering the QUIT command or one of the control characters
described in Table 8.

Table 8 Console Mode Control Characters
Character

When RBD is Executing

When Parser is Executing

CTRL/C

Aborts test routine,
rewinds to BOT, executes
cleanup code, and returns
to parser and reissues
the RBDn> prompt.

Echoes "C", reissues RBDn>
prompt.

CTRL/U

Ignored

Echoes "U", aborts current
command line, and reissues
RBDn> prompt.

CTRL/Y

Aborts test routine and
returns to the diagnostic
prompt. Does not execute
cleanup code.

Echoes "C", reissues RBDn>
prompt.

CTRL/Z

Aborts test routine,
executes cleanup code,
and returns to commandentry level.

Resets the DEBNx and executes
power-up self-test; same as
QUIT command.

CTRL/P

Terminates console mode
and returns to systemlevel prompt (> > > )

Terminates .console mode and
returns to system-level
prompt (»».
CTRL/Z or QUIT must be used
before CTRL/P to put adapter
in a known state.

DEBNA/DEBNK-29

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS
ROM Diagnostic Console Commands
The ROM diagnostic console commands are:
•
•
•
•

DO, D 1, D2 - the EXECUTE commands
DEPOSIT
EXAMINE
QUIT

An illegal or invalid command sounds the keyboard alarm, displays a question mark, then displays the
command-entry prompt.
EXECUTE Commands (DO, Dt, D2)
The EXECUTE commands invoke a designated test or group of tests within a specified diagnostic. The
command format is:
Dn[jSwl/Sw2/ ... Sw9 pc]
where:
Dn

Diagnostic number (n = 0, 1, or 2)

Switch (see Table 9)

Parameter code. PC 1 is the only parameter and it is supported only by test 9 of D2. PC 1 tests the
entire tape; no parameter tests two tracks of the tape.
NOTE
The IC (confirm) switch is required for all datadestructive tests. If IC is not included with the
data-destructive command, the last command line is
echoed on the screen. When this occurs, type I C to
execute the command or press RETURN to abort the
command.

DEBNA/DEBNK-30

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 9 Execute Command Switches
Switch

Name

Default

Description

/BE

Bell on Error

No bell

Sounds keyboard alarm each time an error is
detected.

Confirm

No data
destroyed

Confirms data-destructive test.

/DS

Disable Status

Status
reports

Disables status reports.

/HE

Halt on Error

Continue
on error

Diagnostic halts on test that detects first error and
returns to command-entry prompt.

/IE

Inhibit
Errors

Summary
reports

Disables summary reports.

/IS

Inhibit
Summary

Summary
reports

Disables summary reports.

/LE

Loop on
Error

Continue
on error

Diagnostic loops on test that detects first error,
even if error is intermittent. CTRL/C or
CTRL/Y terminates and returns to commandentry prompt (RBDn».

/P=n

Pass Count

One pass

Specifies number of diagnostic passes. (One pass
includes all selected tests.) Pass count 0 selects
infinite number of passes. CTRL/C or CTRL/Y
terminates and returns to command-entry prompt.

/QV

Quick Verify

Normal
test

Executes quick-verify version of specified test,
when applicable; otherwise, is ignored.

/T=n[:m]

Test
Number[s]

Unique
to each
diagnostic

Specifies test or group of tests to be executed.
Groups are executed in ascending numerical order.

/TR

Enable Trace

No trace

Enables trace reports.

DEBNA/DEBNK-31

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

Error Reports
Table 10 describes the format for error reporting.

Table 10 Error Report Fields
Line

Field 1

Field 2

Field 3

Field 4

Status

Node No.

Device Type

Passes

Error Type

ASCII L

Unit No.

Test

Error Code

Expected

Received

SCB

DEBNA/DEBNK-32

Field 5

Field 6

Address

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 11 defines line-error field reporting.
Table 11 Error Report Field Definitions

Mnemonic

Name

Description

Status

The report type. For error reports, P = passed,
F = failed.

Node Number

The node under test. The value may range from O-F
(hex).

Device Type

The type of module under test. 410F (hex) = DEBNx.

Pass Count

The execution pass at which the error was detected (hex).

Error Type

The error type:

LINE 1

NODE NO.

PASS
LINE 2
ERR TYPE

FE = system fatal error
HE = hard device error
SE = soft device error
ASCII L

ASCII Logic

An ASCII code that indicates the failing logic:
ROM = ROM
UVAX = MicroVAX
RAM = RAM
BCI = BCB
80186 = 80186 processor
NI = Ethernet interface
TKCTL = Tape controller
TK = TK50 tape drive

UNIT

Unit Number

Number of the unit under test (always 0).

TEST

Test Number

Test that detected the error. A zero value indicates the
initialization code for the test failed.

ERR CODE

Error Code

The nature of the error. See Table 12 for a list of error
codes.

EXPCT

Expected Data

The expected data for certain types of data comparison
errors.

RCVD

Received Data

The incorrect data that was received for a data comparison.

SCB

System Control
Block Offset

The system control block offset through which an interrupt was expected or received.

ADD

Address

The memory location or register address at which a data
comparison error or register operation error was detected.

Program
Counter

The PC (program counter) value in ROM at which the
error was detected.

LINE 3

DEBNA/DEBNK-33

DEBNA/DEBNKMAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 12 describes the D 1 and D2 error codes.
Table 12 Error Codes

Dl Test
Error Code

Description

No packet transmitted.

Incorrect destination or source address on transmitted packet.

No packet received.

Incorrect destination or source address on received packet.

No LANCE interrupt received after LANCE started.

The STOP bit was not set, or it was not the only bit set in LANCE CSRO when the
LANCE was stopped.

LANCE initialization unsuccessful.

The low byte of LANCE CSRO was not as expected after packet transmission.

The MISS bit set in LANCE CSRO; missed packet.

The BABL bit set in LANCE CSRO; transmitter timeout.

After 32 soft errors, another soft error occurs.

The UFLO bit set in LANCE transmit descriptor 3 indicating a truncated transmitted
packet.

After 32 retries, another retry condition occurs.

The MERR bit is set in LANCE CSRO; memory error.

The CERR bit is set in LANCE CSRO; loss of heartbeat.

After eight (8) retries due to LANCE bugs, another retry condition occurs.

D2 Test
Error Code

Description

Command aborted.

Controller error detected.

READ/WRITE data error detected.

DEBNA/DEBNK-34

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 12 Error Codes (Coot)
D2 Test
Error Code

Description

Invalid command detected.

Unit is off-line.

Position lost error.

Record data truncation error.

Serious exception detected.

Hardware WRITE-protect error.

Illegal interrupt from 80186.

Interrupt message from 80186 bad.

No cartridge detected in drive.

Tape not loaded into drive.

Unexpected interrupt exception.

, Controller initialization error.

MicroVAX 80186 communication error.

Controller timeout error.

Data overrun error detected.

LEOT encountered unexpectedly.

BOT encountered unexpectedly.

Unexpected tape encountered.

No command echo received within required time.

Motion error: drive unable to perform motion test.

Tape load error: drive does not load and unload tape.

Drive sent an illegal, unsolicited byte.

Test timed out waiting for a drive response.

80186 did not request a new buffer.

DEBNA/DEBNK-35

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS
Status Reporting
Figure 9 shows a typical line status report. Tables 13 and 14 describe status reporting format and define
status fields.
Table 13 Status Report Fields
Line

Field 1

Field 2

Field 3

Field 4

Status

Node No.

Device Type

Passes

Error Type

ASCII L

Unit No.

Test

Table 14 Status Report Field Definitions
Mnemonic

Name

Description

Status

The report type; S = status report.

Node Number

The node under test. The value may range from O-F (hex).

Device Type

The type of module under test. 410F (hex) = DEBNx.

Pass Count

The number of passes completed so far (hex).

Error Type

The error type:

LINE 1

NODE NQ

PASS
LINE 2
ERR TYPE

FE = system fatal error
HE = hard device error
SE = soft device error
ASCII L

ASCII Logic

An ASCII code that indicates the logic currently being
tested:
TK50 = TK50 tape drive

UNIT

Unit Number

Number of the unit under test (always 0).

TEST

Test Number

The currently executing test.

DEBNA/DEBNK-36

DEBNA/DEBNK MAINTENANCE AIDS

LINE 1:

S = STATUS REPORT
F = NODE F (HEX)
41 OF
DEBNK MODULE
00000200 = PASS 200

LINE 2:

XX UNDEFINED FIELD
TK50 TAPE DRIVE
00 = UNIT NUMBER
T09 TEST 9

MKV88-1272

Figure 9 Sample Status Report
For additional information on diagnostics and maintenance aids, consult related DIGITAL diagnostic and
programming publications listed in the INSTALLATION section of this option.

DEBNA/DEBNK-37

DEClancontroller 200 INSTALLATION
DEClancontroller 200 NETWORK ADAPTER
General Description
The DEClancontroller 200 is also called the DEBNI networ~ adapter. The DEClancontroller 200 network
adapter is an intelligent I/O controller that serves as an interface between an Ethernet Local Area Network
(LAN) and a VAXBI bus. The adapter is compatible with the Ethernet and IEEE 802 specifications and is
the standard Ethernet interface for VAX 6000-xxx systems.
The DEClancontroller 200 adapter supports one Ethernet/IEEE 802 port, which provides the physical link
layer and portions of the data link communication layer of the Ethernet and 802 protocols (as defined by the
Ethernet and IEEE 802 specifications).
The DEClancontroller 200 adapter has its own on-board MicroVAX processor that can control operations
independently of the host processor. As a result, Ethernet transactions are transparent to the host processor
(Figure 1).

Ethernet
Transceiver
H4000

Ethernet

DEBNI

Host

VAXBI Bus

MKV89·0452

Figure 1 DEClancontroller 200 in a VAXBI System
Reference Documentation
The following related documentation is available to support the DEClancontroller 200 adapter.
•

DEBNI VAXBI Network Adapter Installation Guide

EK-DEBNI-IN

•

DEClancontroller 200 Programmer's Guide

EK-DEBNI-PG

•

DEClancontroller 200 Technical Manual

EK-DEBNI-TM

•

DEBNA-to-DEBNI Upgrade Instructions

EK-DEBNI-UP

•

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

DLAN200-1

DEClancontroller 200 INSTALLATION
Hardware Components
The DEClancontroller 200 adapter is made up of the following components (see Figure 2).
•
•
•
•
•
•

MicroVAX processor and associated control logic
MicroVAX memory and patch hardware
MEM bus
1132 bus
VAXBI interface logic
Ethernet interface logic

r-------------------1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

1116 Bus

1116/AD16
Transceiver/
Multiplexer

LANCE

Ethernet
Transceiver
H4000

L ______

MEM Bus

Ethernet

1
1
1

1
1

I
I

BCI3
VAXBI
I Interface r----I
I
Logic
BIIC

MicroVAX
Memory

MicroVAX

Buffer
RAM

1132
Memory

1
1
1
1
1

1___ -

VAXBI Bus

MKV89·0451

Figure 2 DEClancontroller 200 Hardware Components

Software Components
The associated host software must be VMS Version 5.2 which contains the port driver to handle transactions
between the host system and the DEClancontroller 200 adapter.

DLAN200-2

DEClancontroiler 200 INSTALLATION
Enl'ironmental Considerations
Table 1 provides the environmental considerations for both operational and storage requirements.
Table 1 Enl'ironmental and Power Requirements
Parameter

Operating

Storage

Temperature

5°C to 50°C
(41°C to 122°F)

-40°C to 66°C
(-40°C to 151°F)

Humidity
(noncondensing)

10% to 95%
with maximum wet
bulb of 32°C
(89.6°F) and minimum
dewpoint of 2°C
(36°F)

Up to 95%

Maximum altitude

2,400 m (8,000 ft)

9.1 km (30,000 ft)

Power Requirements
The power consumption requirement for the DEClancontroller 200 adapter is 33.6 Watts Average (+5 Volts
at 6.72 Amperes).

DLAN200-3

DEClancontroller 200 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

_ _
{

• TRANSCEIVER CABLE
LENGTH LIMITS (45 M)
• MULTIPLE DEBNI
• DEVICE PLACEMENT
• NODE ID PLUG
• POWER REQUIREMENTS

DO NOT INSTALL
THE OPTION

TURN THE HOST
COMPUTER POWER
SWITCH TO OFF AND
SET THE SYSTEM
CIRCUIT BREAKER
TO OFF

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet I of 4)

DLAN200-4

DEClancoatroller 100 INSTALLATION

EN8URE THAT YOU ARE
WEARING THE ESD
WRI8T8TRAP THAT
IS CONNECTED TO
THE SYSTEM CHASSIS

OPEN THE CABINET
DOOR. SLIDE OUT THE
CARD CAGE. AND
ROTATE IT UNTIL
IT LOCKS INTO THE
VERTICAL POSITION

IF NECESSARY (FOR
SOME OLDER
SYSTEMS), INSTALL
A TRANSITION
HEADER ON THE
VAXBIBACKPLANE
OPPOSITE THE DEBNI
SLOT

ENSURE THAT THERE
IS A NODE 10 PLUG
IN PLACE. THE NUMBER
ON THE NODE 10 PLUG
IS NOW THE DEBNI
VAXBINODE 10

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DLAN200-5

DECIancontroUer 200 INSTALLATION

RUN THE INTERNAL
ETHERNET CABLE FROM
THE BACKPLANE
SEGMENT E2 TO THE
ETHERNET 110
CONNECTOR PANEL
(SEE FIGURE 4)

CONNECT A PIGTAIL
JUMPER FROM THE
INTERNAL ETHERNET
CABLE TO A +115 V
TWO-PRONG CONNECTOR FROM THE
POWER SUPPLY (8EE
NOTE)

NOTE:
IF ALL PIGTAIL CONNECTORS
FROM THE POWER SUPPLY ARE
USED, THE EXTERNAL ETHERNET
CABLE MUST CONNECT TO OHE
OF THE FOLLOWING:
DELHI, DEMPR, OR DEBET

INSTALL THE FIRMWARE

>-_Y_E_S-"~I ~~::~~'o~TJ~IJ~PLANE
SEGMENT E1,
PINS E 18 AND 148

LOCA TE THE CARD
CAGE SLOT
OPPOSITE THE DEBNI
CABLES AND JUMPERS

CLOSE THE LOCKING
LEVER TO LOCK THE
DEBNI MODULE
INTO PLACE

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DLAN200-6

DECJancontroller 200 INSTALLATION

TURN THE SYSTEM
POWER ON AND
08SERVE THE
DEBNILED.

GO TO
TROUBLE8HOOTING
SECTION

BOOT THE
OPERATING SYSTEM,
CONFIGURE THE
NETWORK DATABASE,
AND START DECna'

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION

Figure 3 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DLAN200-7

DEClancontroiler 200 CABLING
Cabling
Cabling of the DEClancontroller 200 adapter involves connecting the internal Ethernet cable, the pigtail
connection for power, the boot enable jumper, and the transceiver cable.
The internal Ethernet cable connects the VAXBI backplane (segment E2) to the I/O connector panel
(Figure 4). The transceiver cable is not part of the DEClancontroller 200 option but is included in the
cabinet kits for the DEClancontroller 200 (Table 2). The +15 V pigtail connector (Table 3) supplies power to
the H4000 transceiver.

E1
Firmware ConsoleEnable Jumper

E
-"'"
p

To Ethernet

00 Connector Panel
MKV89·0453

Figure 4 Cabling at the DEClancontroller 200 VAXBI Connector

DLAN200-8

DEClancontroller 200 CABLING
Table 2 Cabinet Kits for DEClancontroller 200 Options
System/Enclosure

Kit Number

Contents

VAX 6000-xxx system
cabinets

CK-DEBNA-LD

Ethernet I/O connector
panel (74-26407-41);
3 foot internal Ethernet
cable (17-01496-01);
Firmware console-enable
jumper (17-01149-01);
Ethernet loopback
connector (12-22196-02).

VAX 8800, 8810, 8550,
and 8530 system cabinets;
VAX 8840, 8830, and 8820
system and expansion
cabinets; VAX 6000-xxx
VAXBI expansion cabinets
(new VAXBI expansion
cabinet H9657)

CK-DEBNA-LJ

Ethernet I/O connector
panel (74-26407-41);
3 foot internal Ethernet
cable (17-01601-03);
Firmware console-enable
jumper (17-01149-01);
Ethernet loopback
connector (12-22196-02).

VAX 8350, 8250

CK-DEBNA-LM

Ethernet I/O connector
panel (70-18799-00);
8 foot internal Ethernet
cable (17-01601-02);
Firmware console-enable
jumper (17-01149-01);
Ethernet loopback
connector (12-22196-02).

VAX 8810, 8800, 8700,
8850, and 8530 expansion
cabinets (old VAXBI
expansion cabinet H9652)

CK-DEBNA-LN

Ethernet I/O connector
panel (70-18799-00);
8 foot internal Ethernet
cable (17-01601-04);
Firmware console-enable
jumper (17-01149-01);
Ethernet loopback
connector (12-22196-02).

DLAN200-9

DEClanoontroiler 200 CABLING
Table 3 Power Connection for Internal Ethernet Cable
VAXBI System

Power Coonectioo

VAX 6000-xxx

Any H7214 regulator plug (J2) in the rear of the
cabinet.

VAX 82xx, 83xx Configuration 1
(12-slot VAXBI card cage) and
VAXBI expansion box BA32-B

2-pin Mate-N-Lok™ pigtail connector located in
the bottom of the box.

VAX 82xx, 83xx Configuration 2
(24-slot VAXBI card cage)

2-pin Mate-N-Lok™ pigtail connector located in
the rear of the cabinet.

VAX 85xx, 87xx, and VAXBI
expansion cabinet H9657

2-pin Mate-N-Lok™ pigtail connector labeled P3
or P4 and located in the rear of the cabinet.

Mate-N-Lok is a trademark of AMp, Inc.
Table 4 lists internal Ethernet cable connector pinouts at the VAXBI backplane.
Table 4 Internal Ethernet Cable Pinouts (On VAXBI Backplane)
Pin

Signal

Description

EOl-E04

Not connected

E05-E09

Logic Ground

ElO
Ell

Ethernet Collision L
Ethernet Collision H

Differential collision detect signals from the Ethernet
bus.

E12
El3

Ethernet Receive L
Ethernet Receive H

Differential receive signals from the Ethernet bus.

E14
E15

Ethernet Transmit L
Ethernet Transmit H

Differential transmit signals to the Ethernet bus.

E16
E46

Firmware ConsoleEnable

Enables access to the DEClancontroller 200 console
moni tor program. The signal is asserted if there is a
jumper connected between pins E 16 and E46 in the
DEClancontroller 200 section of the VAXBI backplane. The signal is sent to the DEClancontroller 200
internal status register.

DLAN200-10

DEClancontroUer 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
The following diagnostic aids are available in this section:
•
•
•
•
•

Power-up self-test
ROM-based diagnostics
Level 3 diagnostics
Level 2R diagnostics
Console Monitor Program

Power-Up Self-Test
The power-up self-test consists of ROM-resident diagnostic routines that run automatically on powerup or
reset. These routines verify that the hardware at the node is operational and that the DEClancontroller 200
adapter can transmit and receive a loopback packet over the network.
There are three ways of running self-test for the DEClancontroller 200 adapter:
I.

On system powerup.

On processor reset. This occurs when the reset or restart button on the host system's front panel is
pressed. The host system runs a system self-test, which causes each VAXBI node to run its own
self-test.

From the console. The DEBNI DO tests can be started from the system console of a VAX 6000xxx, VAX 82xx, or VAX 83xx system.·

Self-Test Results - Test results (pass or fail) are indicated by LEDs on the module and by the DEClancontroller 200 Power-Up Diagnostic (XPUD) register.
Self- Test Results in LEDs
There are three status-indicator LEDs on the module (Figure 5). They consist of:

•
•

2 yellow DEBNI OK LEDs
1 green External Loopback LED

The two yellow DEBNI OK LEDs show the status of the module after the node self-test. The green External
Loopback LED indicates whether the DEClancontroller 200 adapter passed the LANCE externalloopback
self-test, which tests the adapter's ability to transmit and receive a loopback packet over the network.
At powerup or reset, all the LEDs are OFF. If the DEClancontroller 200 adapter passes all the executed
tests (excluding the LANCE externalloopback self-test), the two yellow DEBNI OK LEDs are turned ON;
otherwise, these LEDs remain OFF. If the LANCE externalloopback self-test passes, the green External
Loopback LED is turned ON.

DLAN200-11

DEClancontroiler 200 DIAGNOSTICS
DEBNI
OK LED

C
0

VAXBI
Corner
DEBNIOKLED a=J
External Loopback LED a=J

n
n
e
c
t
0

r
E
d

9
e

MKV89·0454

Figure 5

LED Locations

Self- Test Results in the Power-Up Diagnostic Register
The Power-Up Diagnostic (XPUD) register (Figure 6) indicates which tests in the self-test diagnostic passed,
and when the self-test is completed. By monitoring the Self-Test Complete (STC) bit, the port driver can
read the register after the test is complete and pass the information on to higher-level software. The higherlevel software can determine which DEClancontroller 200 components passed or failed self-test.
The XPUD register is treated as follows:
•

The DEClancontroller 200 adapter initializes the XPUD register to all zeros on powerup or reset.

•

When a subtest in the self-test routine passes, its corresponding bit in the XPUD register is set.

•

If a subtest fails, the corresponding bit remains cleared.

The XPUD register of a DEClancontroller 200 adapter that passes self-test contains a value of
FFFFXXXX(lo) where X = Don't Care.

DLAN200-12

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS

___
L

31 30 29 28 27 28 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

1 11S 1 1 I 1 I I I I II I 1s

18 15

2 1 0

I II

~ Complete
Firmware Initialization

External Loopback
NI Logic is Good
1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ No Stuck-at IRQ Lines

Interval Timer is Good
BIIC and BCI3 are Good
1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ MicroVAX is Good
1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ROM4 is Good
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ROM3 is Good
1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ROM2 is Good
'--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ROM1 is Good
1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

1...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Module RAM is Good
'--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Self-Test Complete

MKV89-0455

,.
Figure 6 Power-Up Diagnostic Register (XPUD)

DLAN200-13

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS
ROM-Based Diagnostics
There are two ROM-based diagnostics:
•
•

DO - DEBNI Self-Test Diagnostic
D I - Network Interconnect Diagnostic

The ROM-based diagnostics (RBD) are a standalone program that can be executed and controlled from the
operator's console of a VAX 6000-xxx system or a VAX 82xx/83xx system.
To run RBD from the console of a VAX 6000-xxx system, do the following:
I.

Enter the console mode by typing CTRL/P at the system prompt and then entering the following
characters.
»>Z/BI:n m <Return>
xxx connection successfully started.
T/R <Return>
RBDx>
where:
n is the hexadecimal VAXBI adapter number 0 - F
m is the hexadecimal XMI node ID of the XMI-to-VAXBI adapter number 0 - F

Select the desired EXECUTE command along with the applicable run-time switch.

Terminate the diagnostics by entering the QUIT command.

EXAMPLE
$ CTRL/P
»>Z/BI:6 D <Return>
T/R <Return>
RBD6> DO <Return>
RBD6> DI/T=2 <Return>

where:
DO
DI/T=2

Entered from the RBD6 prompt executes DO
Entered from the RBD6 prompt executes DI test 2

To run RBD from the console of a VAX 82xx/83xx system, do the following:
Enter the console mode by typing CTRL/P at the system prompt and then entering the following
characters
»>Z n <Return>
T/R <Return>
RBDx>
where:
n is the hexadecimal node ID (0 - F) of the node under test
DLAN200-14

DEClancootroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS

EXAMPLE
$ CTRL/P
»>Z 2 <Return>
T IR <Return>
RBD2>DO <Return>
DO DEBNI Self-Test Diagnostic - This self-test is functionally equivalent to the DEBNI power-up self-test.
Table 5 describes the tests. Unless otherwise specified in the table, the test execution parameters and method
of fault reporting can be selected with the appropriate run-time switches. If a test number is not specified
with the DO EXECUTE command, all tests are executed by default.
Table 5 DO DEBNI Self-Test
Test

Name

Description

DO/Tl

ROMCRC

Calculates a longword cyclic redundancy check
(CRC) character for each ROM section. Compares
the calculated CRC to the corresponding stored
CRC.

DO/T2

RAM

Verifies byte mask logic and then verifies nonstack area of RAM. Moves the stack into verified
RAM and verifies untested stack area. (Also verifies data and address lines as a result of RAM
tests.)

DO/T3

MicroVAX Critical Path

Checks critical
microinstructions.

DO/T4

IRQ Lines

Steps through all Interrupt Priority Levels (IPLs)
to verify that no Interrupt Request (IRQ) line is
stuck asserted.

DO/T5

Interval Timer

Verifies interval timer operation.

DO/T6

BI Corner

Performs seven subtests to verify BIIC and BC13
chips. Exits to next test if this test fails.

DO/T7

NI LANCE Chip

Verifies LANCE chip and CRC logic in the
Ethernet interface logic. (SIA chip is not tested.)

DO/T8

Lance External Loopback

Attempts to transmit and receive an Ethernet
externalloopback packet. If one packet is successfully transmitted and received, the firmware lights
the external loopback LED. This test is the only
test that can fail without causing the self-test as a
whole to fail.

DLAN200-15

timing

and

principal

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Dl Network Interconnect Diagnostic - The Network Interconnect (NI) diagnostic consists of the three test
routines described in Table 6. These tests verify that the Ethernet interface logic, cable, link, and transceiver
are operational. If a test number is not specified when D1 is selected, test 2 is executed by default. Test 1
should not be invoked at the same time as tests 2 and 3 because the run-time environments are different.
Typically, test 2 is run to verify that the Ethernet link is functioning properly. The Ethernet link consists of
the Ethernet interface logic (LANCEjSIA subsystem), the transceiver cable, and the transceiver interface
logic. If test 2 passes, further Ethernet testing is not required.
Table 6 Dl Network Interconnect Tests
Test

Name

Description

DI/Tl

External Loopback
(with connector)

Transmits data through the SIA chip and verifies that the
same data is received back through the loopback connector.

DI/T2

External Loopback
(on live Ethernet)

Transmits data through the SIA chip and verifies that the
same data is received back from the Ethernet bus.

Dl/T3

MOP Loopback (on
live Ethernet)

Transmits a Maintenance Operations Protocol (MOP) loopback message to another node, which should transmit back
the data contained in the message. For this test to execute
correctly, another functional node must be present on the
Ethernet.

NOTE:
For test 2 to execute properly, the DEClancontroller 200 module must be connected to an operational
Ethernet bus, a DELNI in loopback mode, or an H4000 transceiver. The test may fail if there is excessive
traffic on the bus.

Test 2 retries automatically if any of the following errors are detected:

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

Loss of carrie"r
Late collision
Retry error
CRC error
Framing error
Babble error
Missed packet error
Overflow error
Buffer error
Collision error

Test 2 fails if any of the following conditions occur:
•
•
•
•

32 soft errors
Initialization error
Memory error
Underflow error

DLAN200-16

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS

If test 2 fails, run test 1 as follows to isolate the faulty field replaceable unit (FRU).
1.

Disconnect the external Ethernet transceiver cable (BNE3) at the transceiver end.

Install a loopback connector on the cable.

Run test 1 and observe whether it passes or fails.
If test 1 passes, the transceiver is bad. Replace the transceiver, reconnect the cable to the new
transceiver, and run test 2 to verify proper operation. No further action is required.
If test 1 fails, one of the following is bad: transceiver cable, internal Ethernet cable, backplane, or
DEClancontroller 200 module. Go to the next step.

Disconnect the external transceiver cable at the I/O connector panel and install a loopback
connector in its place.

Rerun test 1 and observe whether it passes or fails.
If test 1 passes, the transceiver cable is bad. Replace the cable and run test 2 to verify proper
operation. No further action is required.
If test 1 fails, one of the following is bad: internal Ethernet cable, backplane, or DEClancontroller
200 module. Replace the internal Ethernet cable and install the loopback connector on the new
cable. Go to the next step.

Rerun test 1 and observe whether it passes or fails.
If test 1 passes, the removed cable is bad. Run test 2 to verify proper operation. No further action
is required.
If test 1 fails, either the DEClancontroller 200 module ( r the backplane is bad. Replace the
DEClancontroller 200 module and go to the next step.

Rerun test 1 and observe whether it passes or fails.
If test 1 passes, the removed DEClancontroller 200 module is bad. Run test 2 to verify proper
operation. No further action is required.
If test 1 fails, the backplane is bad. Install the DEClancontroller 200 module in a different slot.
Run test 2 to verify proper operation. Consider replacing the card cage.

DLAN200-17

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Software Diagnostics
Table 7 lists the diagnostics that support the DEClancontroller 200 module. On VAX 85xx, 87xx, and 88xx
systems, the EVDYF diagnostic must be used to interface with the DI ROM-based diagnostic, using
standard operating procedures under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VDS).

Table 7 Down-Line Loaded Diagnostic Programs
Program

Level

Description

EVDYF

Provides user interface to D I RBDs for VAX 85xx, VAX 87xx, and VAX
88xx systems.

EVDYD

Tests the functioning of the DEClancontroller 200 Ethernet/802 port.

EVDWC

Tests the installation of the host Ethernet node and all other nodes on the local
Ethernet that support MOP protocol.

Running the Level 3 Diagnostic - The level 3 diagnostic in Table 7, EVDYF (the DI test), is run as follows:
I.

Invoke the console prompt by typing CTRL P on the system console.

Boot the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor by entering the following characters at the system prompt:
»>B/R5:10 device

On VAX 85xx/87xx/88xx systems, enter the following commands at the DS> prompt:
DS> ATTACH NBIA HUB NBIAO 0
DS> ATTACH NBIB HUB NBIAO NBIBO 0 z
DS> ATTACH DEBNI NBIBO ETAO n
DS> SELECT ETAO
DS> LOAD EVDYF
DS> START /T=n:m
where:
z is the NBI node ID of the NBIB
n is the VAXBI node ID of the DEBNI
n:m is a range of test numbers. (If IT =n:m is not used, all tests are run.)

DLAN200-18

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Running the Level 2R Diagnostics - The level 2R diagnostics in Table 7, EVDYD and EVDWC, are run as
follows:
1.

Boot VMS

Run the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor by entering the following at the system prompt:
>RUN filename.EXE
where filename is the executable VAX/DS file as follows:

VAX System

VAX/DS File

6000-2xx/6000-3xx
6000-4xx
82xx/83xx
85xx/87xx/88xx

ELSAA
ERSAA
EBSAA
EZSAA

On VAX 6000-xxx systems, enter the following commands at the DS> prompt:
DS> ATTACH DWMBA HUB OWMBAO a z
DS> ATTACH DEBNI DWMBAO ETAO n
OS> SELECT ETAO
OS> WAD diagnostic
OS> START /T=n:m
where:
a is the XMI node 10 of the DWMBA
z is the VAXBI node of the OWMBA
n is the VAXBI node ID of the DEBNI
diagnostic is either EVDYD or EVDWC
n:m is a range of test numbers. (If /T=n:m is not used, all tests are run.)

On VAX 82xx/83xx systems, enter the following commands at the DS> prompt:
DS> ATTACH DEBIA HUB ETA n
DS> ATTACH LANCE ETA ETAO
OS> SELECT ETAO
DS> LOAD diagnostic
DS> START /T=n:m
where:
n is the VAXBI node ID of the DEBNI
diagnostic is either EVOYD or EVOWC
n:m is a range of test numbers. (If /T=n:m is not used, all tests are run.)

DLAN200-19

DEClancontroiler 200 DIAGNOSTICS

On VAX 85xx/87xx/88xx systems, enter the following commands at the DS> prompt:
DS> ATIACH NBIA HUB NBIAO 0
DS> ATIACH NBIB HUB NBIAO NBIBO 0 z
DS> ATIACH DEBNI NBIBO ETAO n
DS> SELECT ETAO
DS> LOAD diagnostic
DS> START /T=n:m

where:
z is the NBI node ID of the NBIB
n is the VAXBI node ID of the DEBNI
diagnostic is either EVDYD or EVDWC
n:m is a range of test numbers. (If /T=n:m is not used, all tests are run.)

DLAN200-20

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS

Console Monitor Program
The DEClancontroller 200 firmware includes a Console Monitor Program (CMP) that allows any user to
monitor the DEClancontroller 200 operation. The CMP .is accessible only if the DEClancontroller 200
firmware console monitor jumper is installed on the backplane (at segment E I, connect pins E 16 and E46).
Console Monitor Remote Node Connect $MCR NCP
NCP> SET NODE node-Ilame HARDWARE ADDRESS address
NCP> DEFINE NODE node-Ilame HARDWARE ADDRESS address
NCP> SET NODE node-Ilame SERVICE PASSWORD 424E4942F415244
NCP> DEFINE NODE node-Ilame SERVICE PASSWORD 424E4942F415244
NCP> SET NODE node-Ilame SERVICE CIRCUIT circuit--I1ame
NCP> DEFINE NODE node-Ilame SERVICE CIRCUIT circuit--I1ame
where:
node-Ilame is the name assigned to the DEClancontroller 200 Ethernet node.
address is the DEClancontroller 200 Ethernet default physical address.
circuit--I1ame is the Ethernet circuit for the system from which you are sending the commands.
Console Monitor Remote Node Connect Example $MCR NCP
NCP> SET NODE NODE_B HARDWARE ADDRESS 08-00-3C-4F-22-22
NCP> DEFINE NODE NODE_B HARDWARE ADDRESS 08-00-3C-4F-22-22
NCP> SET NODE NODE_B SERVICE PASSWORD 424E4942F415244
NCP> DEFINE NODE NODE_B SERVICE PASSWORD 424E4942F415244
NCP> SET NODE NODE_B SERVICE CIRCUIT BNA-O
NCP> DEFINE NODE NODE_B SERVICE CIRCUIT BNA-O
Console Monitor Local Node Connect - If the DEClancontrolier 200 to be connected is local, the user must
first create a node name and assign it a valid DECnet address. That DECnet node name and address must
be distinct from the other DECnet node names and addresses already defined to that system. Once a
DECnet node name and address has been established, use the remote node connect procedure described in
the above example. This is done because the NCP CONNECT command does not allow a node to connect to
itself.
Invoking the Console - After entering the DEClancontrolier 200 into the DECnet data base, (as a remote
node) it can be remotely connected using NCp, as follows:
$MCR NCP
NCP> CONNECT NODE node-Ilame
Console connected (press CTRL/D when finished)
BNI>
where:
node-Ilame is the logical name you asigned to the DEClancontroller 200 Ethernet node.
Exiting the Console Monitor - To exit the console monitor type CTRL D
DLAN200-21

DEClancontroller 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Table 8 Console Monitor Program Commands
Command

Parameter

Description

BLANK

Clears the screen and prints the console prompt (BNI».

HELP

Displays t.he help screen.

HELP

BLANK

Displays the help screen for the BLANK command.

HELP

SHOW

Displays the help screen for the SHOW command.

HELP

CONTROLCHAR

Displays the help screen that provides definitions of all the console
command language control characters.

SHOW

BIMAP

Displays the current configuration for the VAXBI bus.

SHOW

ERROR Hn

Displays the fatal error block n, where n is an integer from
through 5.

SHOW

ERROR Sn

Displays the nonfatal error block n, where n is an integer from 1
through 5.

SHOW

IMAGE

Displays the revision number and revision date of the DEClancontroller 200 firmware.

SHOW

STATUS

Displays continuous updated copies of the following:
- DEClancontroller 200 data-link (NI) counters.
- Statistics on the DEClancontroller 200 adapter's use of the
Ethernet.
- The percent of MicroVAX time used by each firmware
process.

SHOW

STATUS/ERROR

Displays continuous updated copies of the DEClancontroller 200
transmit, receive, and LANCE counters.

SHOW

STATUS/TOTAL

Displays the same information as the STATUS/ERROR command
with the addition of the statistical information for all NI traffic.

SHOW

PUB

Displays the contents of the DEClancontroller 200 power-up diagnostic (XPUD) register.

SHOW

USER

Displays information about the users currently defined to the
DEClancontroller 200 port.

DLAN200-22

DEClaneantroiler 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
ROM Diagnostic Console Com _ _
Console Mode Control Characters At the RDB prompt:
CTRLC

Echoes" "C'" and reissues the RBDn> prompt.

CTRLU

Echoes" " U"', aborts the current command line, and reissues the RBDn> prompt.

CTRLY

Same as CTRL C.

CTRLZ

Resets the DEClancontroller 200 and executes the power-up self-test (same as the
RBD QUIT command. Use CTRL P to return to the system-level prompt (»».

CTRLP

Terminates console mode and returns to the system-level prompt (»». CTRL Z
or the QUIT command must be used before CTRL P to put the adapter into a
known state.

When RDB is executing:
CTRLC

Aborts the test routine, executes cleanup code, returns to PARSER, and reissues
the RBDn> prompt. The enable message for the abort test are printed on the
console.

CTRL U

Ignored.

CTRLY

Aborts the test routine and returns to the diagnostic prompt.

CTRLZ

Same as CTRL C.

CTRLP

Terminates console mode and returns to the system-level prompt (»». If you reenter the RDB test monitor on the same node, the enabled test messages of the
aborted test are printed on the same console.

Execute Commands (DO, Dl) - These commands invoke a test or group of tests within a specified
diagnostic. The command format is:
Dn[!swl/sw2/... sw9 pel pe2]
where:
Dn

Diagnostic number either 0 or 1

Switch (See Table 9)

pel, pe2

Parameter codes. Test one and two of D2 both support the pI parameter. Test 3 of
Dl supports both pI and p2 optional parameters. Parameter pI is an 8-digit
decimal number that specifies the number of packets to be transmitted and
received on each pass of the test. Parameter p2 specifies the transmit packet size.
Parameter p2 must be a decimal number between the default of 64 and the largest
packet size of 1518 bytes.

DLAN200-23

DEClancontroUer 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 9 Execute Command Switches
Switch

Name

Default

Description

IBE

Bell on Error

No bell

Sounds the keyboard alarm each
time an error is detected.

IDS

Disable Status

Status reports

Disables status reports.

IHE

Halt on Error

Continue on
error

Diagnostic halts on the test that
detects the first error and returns
to the command-entry prompt.

lIE

Inhibit Error

Error reports

Disables error reporting.

lIS

Inhibit Summary

Summary report

Disables all reports including
summary.

ILE

Loop on Error

Continue on
error

Diagnostic loops on the test that
detects the first error, even if the
error is intermittent. Typing
CTRL C or CTRL Y will terminate and return to the commandentry prompt (RBDn».

IP=n

Pass Count

One pass

Specifies total number of diagnostic passes. One pass equals one
iteration of all the tests selected.
A pass count of 0 selects an infinite number of passes. Typing
CTRL C or CTRL Y will terminate and return to the commandentry prompt (RBDn».

IT=n[:m]

Test Number[s]

Unique to
each diagnostic

Specifies the test or tests to be
executed. If group is specified,
tests are executed in ascending
numerical order.

ITR

Enable Trace

No trace

Enables trace reports.

DLAN200-24

DEClaneontroUer 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
DO Self-Test Execute Command Examples

Executes one pass of all tests.

DO/P=0/T=4:6/BE
Executes tests 4 through 6 in the loop-forever mode with bell-on-error active and
trace reports disabled by default. Summary, status, and error reports are enabled by
default.
D1 Self-Test Execute Command Examples

Executes one pass of DI test 2 (which is the default test executed).

DI/T=I/P=O Executes test I for infinite passes. Enter CTRL C to stop.
Error Reports - Three types of errors are reported: system fatal, device hard, and device soft errors. A
system fatal error prevents the diagnostic from running to completion. A device hard error prevents the
device being tested from completing the device test. A device soft error is a recoverable error. After reporting
a device soft error, the diagnostic takes the action specified in the invoking command: halt on error, loop on
error, or the default continue on error.
Error reports for DI tests have three lines shown in the following example. Error reports for DO tests have
three lines plus the contents of the XPUD register.
EXAMPLE - SAMPLE ERROR REPORT
F

4
NI
ASASASAS

0118
00
00A5ASAS

000000002
T02
000000000

00000010

IFF81020

Line 1 has four fields, that indicate:
F
4
0118
000000002

A failure has occurred
The VAXBI node number
The device type is a DEBNI module
The pass count in hexadecimal

Line 2 has four fields, that indicate:
SE
NI
00
T02

A soft device error
The network interconnect (Ethernet link)
The unit number
The test number

Line 3 has six fields, that indicate:

69
A5A5A5A5
00A5ASAS
000000000
00000010
IFF81020

Error code (see Tables 10 and 11)
Data expected
Data received
SCB offset (not applicable)
RAM location (expressed as the hexadecimal offset) of the data received
ROM PC (program counter) value at which the error was detected
DLAN200-2S

DEClancontroller 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 10 DO Self-Test Error Codes
Code

Description

02
03
04
05
06
10
II
12
13
14
I5
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
30
31
32
33
34
36
38
40
43
44

Expected device interrupt did not occur
Expected interrupt occurred at wrong IPL
Expected interrupt did not occur within the expected time interval
CRC computed is not equal to the CRC stored in ROM
Memory data comparison error
BIIC on-chip self-test failed
User Interrupt Control Register not expected after INTR
Inter-processor interrupt source node ID not expected after IPINTR occurred
IPINTR/STOP FORCE bit was not cleared after IPINTR occurred
Error Interrupt Control Register not as expected after INTR
Datamove Data Register 0 contents corrupted during BI/I1 windowing operation
RAM data was corrupted by an operation using the node's BI address range
Datamove Data Register contents are invalid after data move
RAM Destination contents are invalid after data move
BCI3 CSR Register Datamove flags indicate error after data move
MBOX test failure
Data comparison error on exception stack
PSL condition codes validation failure
Result of GPR/CSR/IPR operation not expected
LANCE register compare error
LANCE RAP compare error
LANCE RDP compare error
ENET PROM error
LANCE Transmit Descriptor 0 (TMDO) compare error
LANCE Transmit Descriptor 2 (TMD2) compare error
LANCE Receive Descriptor 0 (RMDO) compare error
LANCE Receive Descriptor 2 (RMD2) compare error
LANCE CRC compare error
LANCE interrupt count error

DLAN200-26

DEClancontroller 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 11 Dl Self-Test Error Codes
Code

Description

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
Unexpected exception or machine check

Applicable for test 1
LANCE transmit descriptor 1 (TMD1) compare error

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
LANCE transmit descriptor 3 (TMD3) compare error

Applicable for test 1
LANCE receive descriptor 1 (RMDl) compare error

Applicable for test 1
LANCE receive descriptor 3 (RMD3) compare error

Applicable for test 1
Transmit/receive buffer compare error

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported RTRY (retry) errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported LCAR (loss-of-carrier) errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported LCOL (late collision) errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported OLFO (receiver overflow) errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported CRC errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported FRAM (framing) errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE-reported BUFF (receive buffer) errors

Applicable for tests 2 and 3
Too many consecutive LANCE silo-pointer misalignment bug errors

Applicable for test 2
Too many consecutive LANCE transmit hang bug errors

Applicable for test 3
No node responded to MOP packets (setup error)

DLAN200-27

DEClaocootroller 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 11 Dl Self-Test Error Codes (Coot)
Code

Description

Applicable for tests 1 and 3
No packets transmitted

Applicable for test 1
No packets received

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
LANCE failed initialization

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
The MISS bit was set in the LANCE CSRO indicating a missing packet

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
The BABL bit was set in the LANCE CSRO indicating a transmitter timeout

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
The UFLO bit was set in LANCE transmit descriptor 3, indicating a truncated transmitted
packet

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
The MERR ?it is set in LANCE CSRO, indicating a memory error

Applicable for tests 1, 2, and 3
The CERR bit is set in LANCE CSRO, indicating a loss of heartbeat

DLAN200-28

DECmux II INSTALLATION

DECmux II STATISTICAL MULTIPLEXER
General Description

The DECmux II provides remote terminals with the ability to communicate with the MUXserver 100
through a statistically multiplexed synchronous communications link provided by RS-232-C synchronous
modems and the public data network. (This link is referred to throughout this section as the COMPOSITE
LINK). The composite links may be either RS-232-C modem or RS-422 long-line drive connections.

4.5 in.
(11.43 em)

--.L
8.8 in .
-

. ( (22.5 oml

13.5 in.
(34.3 em)-

CS-5413

Figure 1 DECmux II Statistical Multiplexer

DMXII-1

DECmux II INSTALLATION

Product Configuration
There are two default configurations available on the MUXserver 100 and DECmux II. The MUXserver
100 determines the configuration selected based on the composite link connection.
Configuration Number 1 -

•

All composite links are factory preset to 9600 baud, RS-232-C, full-duplex modem.

•

All asynchronous lines are factory preset to 9600 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop
bit.

•

A partial configuration consisting of either DECmux II is also quite acceptable.

ETHERNET

H4000

MUXserver 1 00
SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux II

CONNECTS TO B PORT

CONNECTS TO A PORT

CS-5378

Figure 2

Default Multiplexer Configuration Number 1

DMXII-2

DECmux II INSTALLATION

Configuration Number 2 -

•

All composite links are factory preset to 9600 baud, RS-232-C, full-duplex modem.

•

All asynchronous lines are factory preset to 9600 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop
bit.

H4000

ETHERNET

MUXserver 100

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

CONNECTS TO B PORT
C5-5379

Figure 3 Default Multiplexer Configuration Number 2

DMXII-3

DECmux II INSTALLATION
DECmux II Versions
The DECmux II is available in two versions (DFMZA-BA and DFMZA-BB). Each version has different
power requirements.
Model

Input VoItage

DFMZA-BA
DFMZA-BB

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECmux II statistical multiplexer.

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (VMS/MicroVMSj

AA-JC20A-TE

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (RSX-11 M-PLUSj

AA-JC19A-TC

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (Micro/ RSXj

AA-JS34A-TY

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (ULTRIX-32/32mj

AA-JQ09A-TE

•
•
•

MUXserver 100 Network Reference Manual

EK-DSRZA-RM

MUXserver 100 Network Installation Manual

EK-DSRZA-IN

MUXserver 100 User's Pocket Guide

EK-DSRZA-PG

•

MUXserver 100 Network Identification Card

EK-DSRZA-ID

•

LAT Network Manager's Guide

AA-DJ18A-TK

Component List
The following parts are supplied with each DECmux II statistical multiplexer.
•
•
•
•
•
•

One DECmux II statistical multiplexer
Eight MUXserver 100 user's pocket guide
One MUXserver 100 network reference manual
One MUXserver 100 network installation manual
Power cord set (DFMZA-BA only)
One RS-422 test cable (P /N 70-20984-01)

DMXII-4

DECmux II INSTALLATION
Equipment Placement
The DECmux II can be located in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms, and
can be stacked in mUltiple installations. Always allow 15 em (6 in) of airspace around air vents, and place
the DECmux II at least 45 cm (18 in) above the floor surface.
Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Relative Humidity

5° to 50°C (41° to 122°F)
10% to 95% (nonconden~ing)

Physical Description
Length
Width
Height
Weight

34.3 em (13.5 in)
22.5 em (8.8 in)
11.43 cm (4.5 in)
2.95 kg (6.5 lbs)

Power Requirements
The operating power range of the DFMZA system is contained in the following table.

Table 1 DFMZA Power Requirements

Version

Nominal
Voltage
Required

Voltage
Range

Current

Frequency

-BA

120 Vac

100 - 120

0.5 A

47 to 63 Hz

-BB

240 Vac

220 - 240

0.3 A

47 to 63 Hz

DMXII-5

DECmux II INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED

CONNECT COMPOSITE LINK CABLES
TO MODEMS (SEE
FIGURE 5)

CONNECT TERMINAL CABLES (SEE
FIGURE 6)

SET TERMINAL
PARAMETERS EIGHT
BITS, NO PARITY,
9600 BITS/S

VERIFY VOLTAGE
SETTING (SEE
FIGURE 7)

CONNECT POWER
CORD AND SWITCH
ON

MKV87-1224

Figure 4 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
DMXII-6

DECmux II INSTALLATION

• MAKE SURE THE COMPOSITE LINK CONNECTIONS ARE PROPERLY INSTALLED.
• CHECKTHATTHECOMPOSITE LlNKCONNECTED TO THE 'B' PORT CONNECTS TO AN 'A'
PORT ON EITHER THE MUXserver 1 00 OR THE
DECmux II.
• CHECKTHATTHECOMPOSITE LlNKCONNECTED TO THE 'A' PORT CONNECTS TO A 'B'
PORT ON EITHER THE MUXserver 1 00 OR THE
SECOND DECmux II.
• MAKE SURE THE NULL MODEM CABLES
(BC22D) ARE USED TO CONNECT LOCAL TERMINALS TO THE ASYNCHRONOUS PORTS 0
THROUGH 7.
• ENSURE THAT ANY TERMINAL CONNECTED
TO THE ASYNCHRONOUS PORTS OF THE
DECmux II ARE PRESETTO 9600 BAUD, EIGHT
BITS, NO PARITY.

VERIFY DECmux II
OPERATION

• VERIFY THAT A CONSTANT GREEN LIGHT IS
VISIBLE ABOUT 10 SECONDS AFTER
POWER-UP.
• FOR EACH RS-232-C SYNCHRONOUS COMPOSITE LINK CONNECTION TO THE DECmux
II, CHECK THAT THE DATA SET READY (DSR)
LED IS ON.

MKV87-1225

Figure 4

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

DMXII-7

DECmux II INSTALLATION

TO 2ND
DECmux II

TO MUXserver 100

A PORT
RS-232-C
MODEM PORT

B PORT
RS-232-C
MODEM PORT
MKV87-1226

Figure 5 Connecting Composite Link Cable - Series Drop Configuration at Two Sites

TO PORT B
RS-232-C
CABLE
(BC17D)

B PORT
TO MODEM
RS-232-C
MODEM PORT

MKV87-1227

Figure 6 Connecting Composite Link Cable - Series Drop Configuration at One Site

DMXII-8

DECmux II INSTALLATION

NOTE
IFTHEVOLTAGESELECTSWITCH POSITION IS CHANGED,
THE FUSE AND FUSE CARRIER MUST ALSO BE
CHANGED.
MKV87·1228

Figure 7

Voltage Selection Switch and Fuse Carrier

DMXII-9

DECmux II INSTALLATION

Table 2 LED Indicators/Status
LED

State

Indication

POWER

This (green) LED indicates that the power supply is OK.

Blinking

Flashes briefly during power-up indicating that the start-up diagnostic is running. Goes OFF upon completion and turns ON
permanently indicating the DFMZA is operational.

OFF

When OFF, this may indicate that the power supply is not operational or malfunctioning.

Indicates successful connection to a modem on the respective
composite port.

OFF

Indicates that the modem is either in the process of connecting or
not connected.

DSR

DMXII-IO

DECmux II CABLING
Cabling
Figure 8 illustrates how the DECmux II is connected. There are three cable connections to consider:
•

Synchronous composite link cable(s) (BC22F-xx)

•

Data terminal cable(s) (BC22D-xx)

•

Power cord (the electrical outlet must be within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the DECmux II.)

DATA
TERMINAL
CABLES

B PORT
RS-232-C
MODEM PORT

CS-5414

Figure 8 DECmux II Cabling

DMXII-ll

DECmux II DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics

There are no loadable diagnostics designed specifically for the DECmux II. There are extensive internal
tests designed to check the operation of the DECmux II unit, the synchronous links, and the asynchronous
line terminals.
The phases of testing are:
•

Self-test of the DECmux II unit executed at power-up.

•

Local loop back testing using turnaround connectors.

•

Remote loopback testing using a DECmux II unit or MUXserver 100 (see Figure 9).
DECmux
LOOPBACK
TEST
(Use loopback
connector
H325)

DECmux II

f
MODEM CABLE
TEST

ANALOG
LOOPBACK
TEST
LOCAL
MODEM

REMOTE
DIGITAL
LOOPBACK
TEST

REMOTE
MODEM
MUXserver
LOOPBACK
TEST

MUXserver
1000R2ND
DECmux II

CS-5372

Figure 9

DECmux II Loopback Points
DMXII-12

DECmux II DIAGNOSTICS

DECmux II Diagnostic Summary
The DECmux II diagnostics are evoked through the supervisor terminal by first entering the command
processor and then typing TEST following the SYS> prompt.
NOTE
Evoking the Test mode in a DECmux II terminates
operation at the multiplexer.
Off-line Test 1 - Basic Option Test - The Basic Option test is a repeat of the DECmux II power-up selftest. When started from the Test Menu, it continuously loops through the test until the HALT (CTRL C)
command is given. Each test cycle prints a single line of characters, "012345678*" (refer to Table 3).

Table 3

Basic Option Subtest

Completion Code

Test Completed

Processor running
RAM pattern test
1st firmware ROM checksum
2nd firmware ROM checksum
Composite ROM checksum
Clock test
Silo test
Asynchronous internal loop back
Synchronous internal loop back
Nonvolatile memory checksum

1
2

3
4

5
6
7
8

Off-line Test 2 - Asynchronous Port External Test - It is necessary to fit a loopback connector (PIN
H325) to each of the asynchronous ports being tested.
When the Asynchronous Port External test is selected, the operator will be prompted for details of the
ports to be tested and their parameters. Enter each parameter followed by a RETURN. This test exercises
each port by sending out serial data, which is received immediately on the same port due to the presence of
the loopback connector.
The test loops continuously until the HALT (CTRL C) command is executed.
Off-line Test 3 - Asynchronous Internal Logic Test - The Asynchronous Internal Logic test runs
immediately after being selected. The number of successful passes of the test are displayed. The test loops
continuously until the HALT (CTRL C) command is executed.
The test transmits data over all eight asynchronous ports. The data is looped back internally to the port
input and read from the input SILO by the microprocessor. The test can take up to 30 seconds to
complete.

DMXII-13

DECmux II DIAGNOSTICS
Off-line Test 4 - Composite External Port Test - This test requests the operator to select the composite
port to be tested: A, B, or both. Before typing A, B, or RETURN (both), the loopback connector for the
system configuration currently in use must be installed.
Long-Line Drive (RS-422)
1.

Attach test cable (P/N 70-20984-01) between the Port A and Port B long-line drive 9-pin
connectors.

At a remote DECmux II unit, if the remote connection is to a B port, then insert the test cable
(70-20984-01) between the B port and the cable end. (Note that the second DECmux II unit
must have its B port set to the same speed). If the remote connection is to an A port, then
simply connect the test cable to the cable end. This difference is caused by the fact that B ports
are the clock source and A ports receive the clock transmitted by the other port.

Use autoloopback through the remote MUXserver 100 or DECmux II unit. The remote
multiplexer automatically detects that the loopback test is running and echoes all data being
sent to it. It also prevents spurious messages from being sent to the unit under test.

RS-232-C
I.

Insert loopback connector H325 directly into the RS-232-C composite port,
or

Insert loopback connector H325 into the modem cable at the modem end,
or

Switch modem to local loopback mode,
or

Switch modem to remote loopback mode,
or

The test runs continuously until the HALT (CTRL C) command is executed.
Off-line Test 5 - Composite Internal Logic Test - This test is the same as Off-line Test 4, except that both
channels are always tested and the loopback is internal.
Off-line Test 6 - Broadcast Test/Off-line Test 7 - Echo Test - These tests request the operator to enter
details of the ports to be tested and their parameters. After the first asynchronous port details have been
entered, RETURN is typed in response to the prompt for the port number. The test then starts immediately. The message is broadcast continuously until the HALT command (CTRL C) is executed.
Off-line Test 8 - Modem Control Test - This test exercises the modem control signals of the eight
asynchronous ports and the two composite ports.
Ensure that a loopback connector (PIN H325) is inserted in all eight asynchronous ports and the two
composite RS-232-C ports. The DSR A and B indicators should be ON. When selected, the test runs
immediately and the cumulative number of passes is displayed. The test continues until the HALT
command (CTRL C) is executed.
DMXII-14

DECmux II MAINTENANCE AIDS
Identifying Problems with the DECmux II
This section lists two possible hardware installation problems, probable causes, and what to do to correct
the problems. The problems are:
1.

No GREEN light.

DSR indicators not visible.

SYMPTOM: NO GREEN LIGHT
The GREEN LED start-up indicator located on the front bezel is a three-stage indicator. It indicates
power supply OK, start-up diagnostics running, and start-up diagnostics complete.
Following power-up, the LED flashes briefly, indicating that the power supply is OK. The indicator then
turns OFF for several seconds indicating that the start-up diagnostic is being run. On successful completion
of the start-up diagnostic, the indicator turns ON permanently, indicating the DFMZA is now operational.

If the start-up indicator follows any pattern other than the one described above, turn the DECmux II main
power OFF, wait 20 seconds, and reapply the main power. If the second attempt is not successful, the unit
is faulty and requires service.

Table 4

No GREEN Light

Probable Cause

What To Do

DECmux II power cable
is not connected securely

Check power cable at both ends.

No power in wall outlet

Check outlet with a working device (such as a lamp).

Incorrect voltage switch
setting

Check that the voltage select switch on the back of the
DECmux II is set at the correct voltage setting. Unplug
the power cord before changing it.

DECmux II fuse is defective

Unplug the power cord and replace fuse.

DMXII-15

DECmux II MAINTENANCE AIDS

SYMPTOM: NO DSR LIGHT

The two RED LED indicators on the rear connector indicate the status of the composite port Data Set
Ready (DSR) conductors. The ON state indicates successful connection to a modem on the respective
composite port. The OFF state indicates that the modem is either in the process of connecting or not
connected.

Table 5

No DSR Light

Probable Cause

What to Do

Modem cable not connected
properly

Check that the modem cable BC22F is connected
between the composite port (A or B) and the synchronous
modem.

Modem faulty

Check modem.

Identifying Problems with the Composite Link
For verification of a failure on the link, use the MAP command from the supervisor port of the
MUXserver 100 or DECmux II. If a DECmux II unit is not shown on the MAP, or the link to a particular
DECmux II is shown as DOWN, then the composite link communications has failed. Refer to Chapter 2,
Section 2.6 and Chapter 4, Section 4.3 of the MUXserver 100 Network Reference Manual.

On a normal composite link, the link speed is determined by the speed of the external modems. The link
speed for RS-232-C links must be set up to be compatible with that of the modems used, with a maximum
of 19.2K baud. For RS-422 links, a speed setting of 19.2K baud or 38.4K baud is recommended.
Changing composite link parameters requires access to the supervisor ports of the DECmux II units;
however, once set at installation time, will not require further changes.

Table 6

Composite Port Parameters

Parameter

Default

Options

Speed

9600 baud

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud

Modem Control

Enabled

Enable, Disable

Line Type

RS-232-C

RS-232-C, RS-422 Long-line drive

DMXII-16

DECmux II MAINTENANCE AIDS
Resetting the DECmux II Unit to Factory Settings
The software reset feature permits a change of data in the permanent database to DIGITAL factory
specifications. The DECmux II has a RESET switch which is inside the unit. To reset to factory settings
proceed as follows.
NOTE
It is recommended that reset factory settings on a
DECmux II unit only be performed by a qualified
service technician.
WARNING
This procedure requires power to be applied with the
protective cover removed. Damage to the hardware/user could result if not done correctly.
1.

Turn OFF the power and remove the power cord.

Remove the top cover from the DECmux II unit.

Locate the RED RESET switch beside the fan.

Press the RED RESET switch and, while holding it down, reconnect power to the unit; that is,
power up the unit with the RESET switch ON. Hold the RESET switch down until internal
diagnostics complete.

After the DECmux II unit has completed its diagnostic test (indicated by the GREEN indicator
on the front of the unit), remove power and replace the top cover.

The unit has been reset to factory default values.

DMXII-17

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION
DECmux 300 REMOTE TERMINAL MULTIPLEXER
General Description
The DECmux 300 provides connections between the MUXserver 300 and remote terminals or computer
ports. Each DECmux 300 can serve up to 32 remote terminals. The DECmux 300 serves terminals through
either EIA-232-D terminal ports (Figure I) or DEC423 terminal ports (Figure 2).
DECmux 300

)

Figure I

EIA-232-D Terminal Port Connections

DECmux 300

Figure 2

DEC423 Terminal Port Connections

DMX300-1

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION
Product Configurations
Many different configurations of MUXserver/DECmux 300 networks are possible with the following
constraints.
•

There can be only one MUXserver 300 in a MUXserver/DECmux 300 network.

•

The maximum number of DECmux 300 units in a MUXserver/ DECmux 300 network is six.

•

The DECmux 300 units must be connected to the MUXserver 300 by composite links either
directly or indirectly (by daisy-chaining the DECmux 300 units).

•

A maximum of three DECmux 300 units can be daisy-chained together.

•

The MUXserver /DECmux 300 network must be a linear network; that is, it must not contain
circular composite link paths. As a result, there can be only one composite link path between any
DECmux 300 and the MUXserver 300, and there can be only one composite link path between
any two DECmux 300 units.

Refer to the MUXserver/DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual for more details on network
configurations.
Two typical MUXserver/DECmux 300 configurations are shown in Figures 3 and 4.

H4000/4005

ETHERNET

MUXserver 300

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux 300

CONNECTS TO A PORT

CONNECTS TO B PORT
SN-OI86-88

Figure 3

MUXserver /DECmux 300 Network Configuration 1

DMX300-2

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

H4000/4005

ETHERNET

MUXserver 300

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux 300

)
SN-0187-88

Figure 4

MUXserver/DECmux 300 Network Configuration 2

)
DMX300-3

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

DECmux 300 Versions
Table 1 shows the available versions of the DECmux 300, and Table 2 shows upgrade kits that can be used to
expand the number of ports.

Table 1

DECmux 300 Versions

Model

Description

Voltage

DM308-AA
DM308-AB
DM316-AA
DM316-AB
DM316-BA
DM316-BB
DM332-BA
DM332-BB

8 EIA-232-D ports
8 EIA-232-D ports
16 EIA-232-D ports
16 EIA-232-D ports
16 DEC423, type III ports
16 DEC423, type III ports
32 DEC423, type III ports
32 DEC423, type III ports

100 to 120 Vac
220 to 240 Vac
100 to 120 Vac
220 to 240 Vac
100 to 120 Vac
220 to 240 Vac
100 to 120 Vac
220 to 240 Vac

Table 2

DECmux 300 Upgrade Kits

Part Number

Description

CK-DM308-A 7
CK-DM316-W7

8-line EIA-232-D upgrade kit
16-line DEC423 upgrade kit

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECmux 300 remote terminal multiplexer.

•

MUXserver / DECmux 300 Network Installation Manual

•

MUXserver 300 Software Installation Guides:

EK-DSRZC-IM

Software Installation Guide for VMS
Software Installation Guide for ULTRIX/ULTRIX-32m

AA-MJ87 A-TE
AA-MJ92A-TE

•

MUXserver / DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual

EK-DSRZC-RM

•

MUXserver / DECmux 300 Network Identification Card

EK-DSRZC-IC

•

MUXserver / DECmux 300 User's Guide

EK-DSRZC-UG

•

MUXserver 300 Technical Manual

EK-DSRZC-TM

•

DECmux 300 Technical Manual

EK-DSRZC-TD

DMX300-4

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION
Component List
The following items are required for each DECmux 300 installation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

1 DECmux 300 remote terminal multiplexer unit
1 synchronous port loopback connector (H3199)
1 EIA-232-D loopback connector (12-15336-08) or 1 DEC423 36-pin loopback connector (H31Ol)
1 rack mounting kit (H041-AC)
1 MUXserver/ DECmux 300 Network Installation Manual
1 MUXserver / DECmux 300 User's Guide
I country kit
1 adapter cable and extension cable for each synchronous port to be connected.
1 BC22x-xx device cable for each device to be connected to the EIA-232-D ports
I set of the following cables for each 36-pin connector on the DECmux 300
H3104-B DEC423 adapter kit and extension cable
BC 16E-xx DEC OFFICE cable with appropriate adapter connector (H8571-x), if necessary, for each port device to be connected.

Equipment Placement
The DECmux 300 can be located in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms. The
DECmux 300 can be rack or wall mounted or placed on a desk or shelf. The following environmental
conditions must be met.
Environmental Requirements
5° to 50°C (41 ° to 122°F)
10% to 90% (noncondensing)

Temperature
Relative Humidity

) Physical Description
49.4 cm (19.4 in)
16.2 cm (6.4 in)
31.3 cm (12.3 in)
6.0 kg (13.2 lb)

Length
Height
Depth
Weight (unpacked)

Power Requirements
The operating power range of the DECmux 300 is provided in Table 3.
Table 3

DECmux 300 Power Requirements

Version

Voltage Range

Current

Frequency

Power
(Maximum)

DM3xx-XA
DM3xx-XB

100 to 120 Vac
200 to 240 Vac

3.0 A
1.5 A

60 Hz
50 Hz

180 W
180 W

~
)

DMX300-5

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

C____

START-)

SECURE DECmux 300
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK,
SYSTEM, OR SERVER)

VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE
MANAGER THAT THE
DECmux 300 INSTALLATION SITE MEETS
SITE PREPARATION
REQUIREMENTS

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE DECmux 300 BOX

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE DECmux 300
ACCESSORIES BOX(ES)

SET THE VOLTAGE
SELECTION SWITCH
TO MATCH THE POWER
CORD VOLTAGE
(SEE FIGURE 7)

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DMX300-6

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 6)

FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THE
WALL-MOUNTING
HARDWARE KIT

)

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 6)

Figure 5 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DMX300-7

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

CONNECT THE
SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL TO
PORT 1

SET THE TERMINAL
PARAMETERS

{

CHECK THAT THE MUXserver 300
IS INSTALLED. DOWN-LINE LOADED.
AND HAS MODEM LINKS INSTALLED.

PLUG THE POWER CORD
INTO THE DECmux 300
AND INTO THE
WALL OUTLET

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DMX300-8

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

VERIFY DECmux 300
OPERATION
(SEE FIGURE 8)

• VERIFY THAT THE GREEN LED IS LIT ON
THE REAR OF THE DECmux 300.
• THE TERMINAL ON THE SUPERVISOR PORT
SHOULD DISPLAY A MESSAGE 20 SECONDS
AFTER POWER-UP.
• PRESS THE RETURN KEY SEVERAL TIMES.
THE "DM300_CONSOLE>" PROMPT SHOULD
APPEAR. •
• REFER TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
IF THE ABOVE MESSAGE WAS NOT DISPLAYED.

INSTALL THE
SYNCHRONOUS LINE
CABLES AND CHECK OUT
THE MUXserverl
DECmux 300 NETWORK
• IF THE DECmux 300 IS NOT ATTACHED TO A WORKING
SYNCHRONOUS PORT, OR THE MUXserver 300 IS DOWN,
THE DECmux 300 WILL DISPLAY THE DM300 CONSOLE>
PROMPT. IF THE NETWORK DOES COME Up, THE
LOCAL> PROMPT IS DISPLAYED.

)

C__

STOP_)

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

\,
)

DMX300-9

DECrnux 300 INSTALLATION

INSTALL
CAPTIVE NUTS

INSTALLED USING
EXISTING SCREWS

SN-0170-88

Figure 6

Rack Mounting the DECmux 300

DMX300-10

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

FOR 100/120V OPERATION:
IF "240V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,

SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "120V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

•
..

-------------- --------------FOR 220/240V OPERATION:
IF "120V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "240' IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

SN-Q 169-88

Figure 7

Selecting Operating Voltage

DMX300-11

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OECmux 300

@o
SN-0221-88

Figure 8

Proper LED Indication for Successful Installation

DMX300~12

DECmux 300 INSTALLATION

Configuring the DECmux 300 into the Network
In order for the DECmux 300 to form a part of the MUXserver/DECmux 300 network, it must have
station and composite link parameters set up.
NOTE
The DECmux 300 will operate with factory default
parameters. Configuring the DECmux 300 is
optional.
Configuring the Station Parameters - Each station must be set up so that it has a unique identity in the
MUXserver /DECmux 300 network. This requires a station name and may also include a station identification character string.
The station name will be assigned by the MUXserver 300 if none is specified before it is first connected into
the MUXserver/DECmux 300 network. This default name is in the form "Station_xy" where x is the
number of the MUXserver 300 port to which the station is attached, and y is the number of hops from the
MUXserver 300 to the station.
To define the station name to something other than the default value enter the following command.
DM300_Console> DEFINE STATION NAME "station_name"
Where station_name is the name chosen to identify the station.
To define the station identification string enter the following command.

)

DM300_Console> DEFINE STATION IDENTIFICATION "identification string"
Where identification string is the character string chosen as the station identification.
To enter these values into the operational data base, use the SET command or initialize the station. Verify
the station parameters by using the SHOW STATION CHARACTERISTICS command.
Configuring the Composite Link - The various link parameters, along with their possible values and default
values, are listed in the MUXserver / DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual. A working link can be
established by using the factory default values.

\
DMX300-13

DECmux 300 CABLING

Connecting Synchronous Composite Link Cables

Ensure that the synchronous modems have been set up with the appropriate operating parameters and
are powered ON. In particular, the modems must be set to supply both transmit and receive clocks to
the DECmux 300.

Locate the appropriate composite port adapter cable and the extension cable (if required) in one of the
accessories boxes.

SN-0211-88

Connect the 50-pin connector to either port A or port B and tighten the connector screws.

SN-0219-88

Connect the other end of the adapter cable to one end of the appropriate extension cable.

DMX300-14

DECmux 300 CABLING
5.

Connect the other end of the extension cable or the adapter cable to the synchronous modem.
The yellow Composite Link Ready LEDs for each composite port will illuminate if that port is
connected to a synchronous modem and the modem is powered ON and functioning correctly.

Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the other composite port if required.

NOTE
If using the RS-422-A null-modem cable (BC19Y-IO)
to connect the DECmux 300 with a local DECmux
300 or MUXserver 300, connect one end of the cable
to the composite port on the DECmux 300 and the
other end of the cable to the composite port on the
DECmux 300 or MUXserver 300.

For mterface specific guidelines refer to the MUXserver / DECmux 300 Network Installation Manual.

DMX300-15

DECmux 300 CABLING
Connecting EIA-232-D Device Cables

Disconnect the power cord from the DECmux 300.

Contact the Server Manager to determine if certain devices were allocated to specific DECmux 300
ports.

Determine which DECmux 300 port to use for each device.

Make two labels for each cable, marking each label with source and destination information.

Attach one label at each end of each device cable.

Connect one end of the cable to the appropriate device as marked on the label.

Connect the other end of the cable to the DECmux 300 connector marked on the cable.

Install all other device cables in the same way.

When all device cables are installed, go to the DECmux 300 DIAGNOSTICS section.

DMX300-16

DECmux 300 CABLING

Connecting DEC423 Device Cables
I.

Disconnect the power cord from the DECmux 300.

Contact the Server Manager to determine if certain devices were allocated to specific DECmux 300
ports.

Ensure that all required accessories are available.

Locate (if required) the H8571-x DEC423 to EIA-232-D passive adapter. They are:
H8571-A used with 25-pin D-type connectors
H8571-B used with 9-pin D-type connectors

Connect the H8571-x adapter (if required) to the communications port of the devices that use the
associated connector.

Determine which DECmux 300 36-way connector (11 or J2) on each panel to use for each device.
Ports 1 to 8 appear on J 1 of Panel A
Ports 9 to 16 appear on 12 of Panel A
Ports 17 to 24 appear on J 1 of Panel B
Ports 25 to 32 appear on J2 of Panel B

PORT 17 - PORT 24

PORT 1 - PORT 8

SN-0226-88

DMX300-17

LOcate th
e 1-0104-BDE
BC

C423 ad

apter kit. Th .
-Conductor Cable
e kIt includes:

16C-IO 36

1-13104 Cable C

onCCntra.tor

~~~
----

l&§J[§Eifjif!jJfjJfEjJl§j
fI3103 i'v[i'v[J

LooPback C
onnector

Dl\fX3 00_
18

DECmux 300 CABLING
8.

Install the H3104 cable concentrator in one of the following.
Satellite Equipment Room rack
A wall or faceplate
Desk or table
The decal on the cable concentrator represents the order of the ports on the concentrator. That is,
MM11 on the concentrator corresponds to port 1 for 11 of Panel A and corresponds to port 17 for 11
of Panel B and so forth.

momODmo"
Model: H3104
Made in U.S.A.
Fabrique aUl(
Etats-Unis

..,

Connect one end of the BC16C-IO 36-conductor cable to the appropriate connector on the
DECmux 300. The cable can have a straight or right-angle end connector.

:.t:;l~ 0' <€=:JlO · 04i<
io'=-"

~'IQ'"

DlC> • ~ ~

~~ O((;:-:=:iilO ~ ~
@

DEC"'.... lOO

SN-0230-88

DMX300-19

DECmux 300 CABLING

10.

Lock the cable plug to the connector using the spring latches provided on the DECmux 300 connector.

11.

Connect the other end of the BCI6C-I0 36-conductor cable to connector Jl on the H3104 cable
concentrator.

12.

Lock the cable plug to connector Jl with the spring latches provided on the Jl connector.

13.

Determine which DECmux 300 port to use for each device.

14.

Locate the BCI6E-xx 6-conductor cable (DEC OFFICE cable).

15.

Make two labels for each cable, marking each label with source and destination information.

16.

Attach one label to each end of each BCI6E-xx cable.

17.

Connect one end of the cable to the cable concentrator MMJ that corresponds to the DECmux 300
port marked on the label.

18.

Connect the other end of the cable to the H8571-x adapter, or to the appropriate device connector, as
marked on the label.

19.

Repeat steps 14 through 18 for each device to be connected to the same 36-way connector.

20.

Repeat steps 6 through 13 to connect cable concentrators to each 36-way connector on the
DECmux 300.

21.

When all device cables are installed, go to the DECmux 300 DIAGNOSTICS section.

DMX300-20

DECmux 300 DIAGNOSTICS
Self-Test Diagnostics
The DECmux 300 self-test can run in one of the following modes.
•
•
•

Normal mode
Manufacturing mode
Fatal Error mode

Normal Mode - This is the mode under which the self-test diagnostic typically runs. If no errors are detected
in Normal mode, the test runs for about 33 seconds, lights the Ready LED, and transfers control to the
DECmux 300 firmware. If a fatal error is detected, self-test enters the Fatal Error mode.
Manufacturing Mode - Self-test runs in this mode when the manufacturing mode jumper is connected. In
this mode, the self-test program loops continually through all the individual tests.

NOTE
The READY LED flashes at the completion of each
test. If a fatal error is detected, the READY LED is
ON permanently. When a complete cycle of tests is
completed, the yellow LEDs and the Ready LED
flash together.
Manufacturing mode tests dynamic memory more extensively and runs for about 55 seconds. All errors are
fatal and cause the Ready LED to light and halt the test.
To terminate the Manufacturing mode, remove the jumper and recycle power.
)

Fatal Error Mode - Self-test enters the Fatal Error mode when a fatal error is detected. All errors are fatal
in Manufacturing mode.
The error routine WRITEs the name of the test that failed to a byte in the EEPROM.
In Manufacturing mode, a test restart is disabled until the error code in EEPROM is cleared by the
power-up reset procedure.
Self-Test Program Tests
There are two groups of tests that are run during the self-test program; the asynchronous side tests and the
synchronous side tests. Refer to the DECmux 300 Technical Manual for details.

DMX300-21

DECmux 300 DIAGNOSTICS
Status Indicator LEDs
The status of the DECmux 300 is indicated by the Status Indicator LEDs on the control/indicator panel of
the DECmux 300. The six indicators and their descriptions are provided in Table 4.

Table 4
LED
Name
Power

Ready

Chn A
Ready

DECmux 300 Status Indicator LEDs
Symbol

Color

State

Symptom

Green

Internal dc supply voltages are correct

OFF

1. No power connected
2. Internal dc supply voltages are not correct

Self-test passed

OFF

1. Self-test in progress
2. Fatal error detected

Flash

Nonfatal error detected

Modem connected to Composite Link A is ready

OFF

Modem connected to Composite Link A is not ready

Communications via Composite Link A to the associated MUXserver 300 or DECmux 300 is established

OFF

Communications via Composite Link A to the associated MUXserver 300 or DECmux 300 is not
established

Modem connected to Composite Link B is ready

OFF

Modem connected to Composite Link B is not ready

Communications via Composite Link B to the associated MUXserver 300 or DECmux 300 is established

OFF

Communications via Composite Link B to the associated MUXserver 300 or DECmux 300 is not
established

Chn A
On-Line

Chn B
Ready
Chn B
On-Line

Green

Yellow

DMX300-22

DECrnux 300 DIAGNOSTICS
The meaning of the Ready LED is expanded as follows.
•

Normal mode
Ready LED ON - Self-test has completed without detecting any errors.
Ready LED blinking (250 ms ON/250 ms OFF) - Indicates a nonfatal hardware error and
an error message is displayed on the console terminal. Refer to the MUXserver /
DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual for a complete description of the diagnostic
error messages.

•

Manufacturing mode
Ready LED ON - A fatal hardware error was detected.
Ready LED ON (for 25 ms periodically) - Self test is executing successfully.
Ready LED blinking (250 ms ON/250 ms OFF) - The EEPROM error byte is not cleared.

)

DMX300-23

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting
What to do First I. Check the DECmux 300 Status LEDs.
a.

Table 5 will help in interpreting these LEDs.

2. Check the console error messages.
a.

Examples 1 through 2 list the console error messages.

Configure the console terminal for 9600 bits/s, no parity, and 8-bit characters.

Table 5

DECmux 300 LED Indications

Symptom

Problem

Correction

Power indicator LED
OFF

No dc voltage

Verify that ac power is applied to the
unit.
Ensure that the voltage select switch is
set to the correct country voltage.
Reset the circuit breaker.
Replace the power supply.

Ready LED remains
OFF for more than
60 seconds

Fatal hardware
error

Replace the logic module.

Ready LED blinking

Nonfatal hardware
error

See Example 1.

DMX300-24

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Example 1: Error Messages
Local -920- Parameter checksum error on port n
Local -921- Factory-set parameters applied to port n
Local -922- Port hardware error on port n
Local -923- Port n has been disabled
Local -930- Server parameters checksum error
Local -931- Factory-set server parameters applied
Local -932- Hardware revision level checksum error
Local -933- Station parameter checksum error
Local -934- Factory-set station parameters applied
Local -935- Service parameter checksum error
Local -936- Service has been disabled
Local -937- Link characteristics checksum error
Local -938- Factory-set link parameters applied
Local -950- Troubleshooting procedures should be followed
Example 2: Fatal Bugcheck

)

Local -913- Fatal Bugcheck PC=n, SP=on, SR=n, MEM=n, CODE=n
3.

Use the SHOW LINK COUNTERS command to view the link counters for both link A and link B.
The line statistics might indicate a problem area. Example 3 provides a sample of the link A counters
obtained by using the SHOW LINK A COUNTERS command. A definition of the counters is also
provided.
Example 3: SHOW LINK A COUNTERS
Link A: HDLC/LAPB Station: NSG_SYDNEY
Seconds Since Zeroed:
Bytes Received:
Bytes Sent:
Frames Received:
Frames Sent:
Invalid Frames Rcv'd:
FRMR Frames Rcv'd:
Recei ve Overrun:
Transmit Underrun:

1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890

Receive Failures:
Receive_CRC Errors:
Receive~ize Errors:
Receive~equence Errors:
Send Failures (REJ Rcv'd):
Polls Received:
Remote Reply Timeouts:
RNR Frames Received:
Local Buffer Errors:

)
I

DMX300-25

1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Counter Definitions:
Seconds Since Zeroed:

Seconds since counts last zeroed.

Bytes Received:

Total number of bytes received.

Bytes Sent:

Total number of bytes transmitted successfully.

Frames Received:

Total number of I frames received.

Frames Sent:

Total number of I frames transmitted successfully.

Invalid Frames Rcv'd:

Count of frames received with invalid address or control field.

FRMR Frames Rcv'd:

Count of FRMR frames received. A frame with a
nonrecoverable error has been received at the other
end. The link is reset on receiving an FRMR frame.

Receive Overrun:

Count of USART Rx overrun errors.

Transmit Underrun:

Count of Tx underrun errors during DMA.

Receive Failures:

Sum of Receive_CRC/Size/Sequence error counts.

Receive_CRC Errors:

Count of CRC errors in frames received.

Receive~ize Errors:

Count of frames that are too long or too short.

Receive~equence Errors:

Count of sequence errors in frames receiv:ed. Frames
have been corrupted and discarded.

Send Failures (REJ Rcv'd):

Count of REJ frames received. Frames transmitted
have been corrupted and discarded. The receiver is
requesting retransmission of frames.

Polls Received:

Count of frames received with the 'P' bit set. Start
link requests or idle messages are received when count
is incrementing.

Remote Reply Timeouts:

Count of number of Tl timeouts. Receiver has not
acknowledged the transmitted frames within
the period of the retransmit timeout.

RNR Frames Received:

Count of RNR frames received. The receiver is not
ready to receive because the number of frames for
forwarding increases above limit.

Local Buffer Errors:

This station has temporarily run out of buffer.

DMX300-26

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Problems with the Composite Link - Use the following procedure when troubleshooting the composite link
from either the MUXserver 300 or DECmux 300.
1.

Connect a console terminal to the local unit.

Press the <RETURN> key a few times and log into the Local mode. If the DECmux 300 has
not established communications with the MUXserver 300, the Standalone mode will be entered
instead of the Normal mode. Under the Standalone mode, only the following commands are
allowed.
SET/DEFINE/SHOW /LIST [LINK I PORT I STATION]
TEST [LINK I PORT]
SET/DEFINE PRIVILEGED PASSWORD
SET PRIVILEGED

Use the SET PRIVILEGED command, then continue with the next step.

Enable broadcast on the console port by using the SET PORT BROADCAST ENABLED
command. It may be necessary to reset the unit parameters to the factory defaults. If so, press
and hold the Reset button while removing and reinserting the ac power cord.

After verifying the power and interface connections to the MUXserver 300, DECmux 300, and modems,
proceed with Table 6.

\,
)

DMX300-27

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 6

Composite Link Problem Checklist

Item

Action

Communication line
incorrect

Verify that the leased line has been arranged with the common
carrier or Public Telephone & Telegraph (PIT) authorities.

Network incorrectly
configured

Verify that the network is correctly installed.

Link state OFF

Use the SHOW LINK command to verify that the link state is ON.
If the link state is OFF, use the SETjDEFlNE LINK command to
set the link state ON.

Link address incorrect

Use the SHOW LINK CHARACTERISTICS command to verify
the link address. Use the SETjDEFlNE LINK ADDRESS command to set the link address to DTE, DCE, or DYNAMIC. When
one end of the composite link is addressed DTE, then the other end
must be addressed DCE. Both ends of the link can be addressed
DYNAMIC.
NOTE: DYNAMIC is the recommended setting.

Synchronous modem
speeds and interface
standards incompatible

Check speeds and interface standards on both sides of the composite
link. The two ends of the composite link will normally use the same
standard, but not always. The speed will almost always be the same
at each end.

Interface type and
link speed incorrect

If the parameters stored in the dynamic link database are different
from those detected at link start-up time:
•

A warning message will be generated when the cable type
detected is different from the cable type stored.

•

A warning message will be generated when the modem clock
speed detected is different from the modem clock speed stored.
NOTE: This will not prevent proper operation of the MUXserver/DECmux 300 network.

Link status
disconnecting or
connecting

Use the SHOW LINK command to verify that the modem is providing the correct modem signals.

Station cannot
transmit frames

Ensure that the modem is providing transmit and receive clock
signals.
Use the SHOW LINK CHARACTERISTICS command and compare the actual values stored with the modem speed and interface
cable type.

DMX300-28

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 7

Composite Link Status LEDs

Ready

On-Line

Problem and Correction

OFF

Problem:
Modem not on-line
Correction:
Use the SHOW LINK command to display the link status.
If the link status is Running, and the On-Line LED is OFF, replace the
logic module or internal synchronous cable.
If the link status is other then Running, verify that the link state is ON
and the output signals are DTR and RTS. Use the SET LINK STATE
ON command if the link state is OFE
If the output signals are not DTR and RTS, wait a few seconds and then
try again.
If the input signals are not DSR, DCD, and CTS, go to the Fault
Isolation Procedure for Composite Link Problems section that immediately follows this table.
Problem:
Composite link not ready (on the other end of the link).
Correction:
Check the composite link ready at the other end of the link. Using this
table, perform the indicated corrective action on the other end of the
link.

)
OFF

N/A

Problem:
Modem is not activating the carrier detect circuit
Correction:
Check the modems on both ends of the link. Some modems like to see
data terminal ready (CCITT 108/2) ON before asserting data carrier
detect (DCD). Use the SHOW LINK command to check that the link
state is ON and that the DTR status is ON.
Problem:
Network terminating unit (NTU) is not activating the indicate (I)
circuit.
Correction:
Check the NTU at both ends of the link. Some NTUs like to see CTRL
C before asserting the indicate (I) signal. Use the SHOW LINK com~
mand to check that the link state is ON.

)
DMX300-29

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 7 Composite Link Status LEDs (Cont)
Ready

On-Line

Problem and Correction
Problem:
Receive clock is not detected when the RS-422-A/null-modem interconnect cable is used.
Correction:
Check the units at both ends of the link. Use the SHOW LINK
command to check that the link state is ON. Check that the composite
link cable is properly connected.

Fault Isolation Procedure for Composite Link Problems - The procedure below is used to test the composite
link.
1.

Use the SET LINK STATE SERVICE command to set the link into the Service state.

Use the SET LINK command to set the interface type and link speed.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK INTERNAL command to execute an internalloopback test.

When the test completes, if an error is found, the hardware is faulty. Replace the logic module or
internal synchronous cable.

Disconnect the adapter cable from the composite link and connect the H3199100pback connector
to the unit under test.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL command to execute an externalloopback
test. If an error occurs, replace the unit under test.

When the test completes, if an error is found, the hardware is faulty. Replace the unit under test.

If the RS-422-A/null-modem interconnect cable is not used, skip the next step.

Repeat all of the above steps for the unit at the other end of the RS-422-A/null-modem
interconnect cable. If the other unit is not faulty, replace the interconnect cable.

10.

Connect and secure the adapter cable to the composite port.

11.

Disconnect the extension cable (or modem) from the other end of the adapter cable.

12.

Connect a loopback connector to the extension cable. Refer to Appendix D of the MUXserver/ DECmux 300 Network Installation Manual for more information on loopback
connectors.

13.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL command to execute an externalloopback
test. If an error occurs, replace the cable under test.

DMX300-30

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
14.

Connect the extension cable back to the adapter at the local end.

15.

Disconnect the extension cable at the remote (far) end. Connect an appropriate loopback connector to the remote end.

16.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL command to execute an externalloopback
test. If an error occurs, replace the cable under test.

17.

Repeat the above steps to test other extension cable segments if more then one is used.

18.

Put the modem into the Local Loopback mode.

19.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL MODEM LOCAL command to execute an
external loopback test. If an error occurs, replace the modem under test.

21.

Put the local modem into the Normal Operation mode, and the remote modem into the Remote
Loopback mode.

22.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL MODEM REMOTE command to execute an
external loopback test. If an error occurs, repeat this procedure at the remote end of the
composite link. The remote site would then become the local site. Ask the PTT authorities or
common carrier to verify the telephone data link between modems.

23.

Return the modems to the normal modes after fault isolation.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 9 shows the field replaceable units (FRU) of the DECmux 300.

WARNING
The procedures indicated should be performed by
qualified service personnel only. DO NOT attempt to
remove any FRUs while the DECmux 300 is connected to a power source.

CAUTION
Static electricity can damage electrical components.
Use a grounded wrists trap (29-11762-00) and a
grounded work surface when accessing any internal
components ~f the DECmux 300.
The FRUs for the DECmux 300 unit are:
FRU

Part Number

Logic Board
Power Supply
Asynchronous Communications Cable
Synchronous Communications Cable
Power Supply Unit (PSU) Cable
Fan Assembly
DEC423 Distribution Panel
EIA-232-D Distribution Panel

54-18590-01
H7859-A
17-01944-01
17-02132-01
17-01843-01
70-25518-01
H3055
H3056

DMX300-31

DECmux 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Figure 9

FRU Removal and Replacement

DMX300-32

DECNA INSTALLATION

DECNA ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
General Description
The DECNA (DIGITAL Ethernet CTI Bus Network Adapter) module is the Ethernet communications
controller for the Professional 300 series computer. The DECNA controller allows the computer to:
•

Exchange data with other computers and workstations on a local area network that has
PRO/DECnet, and

•

Exchange data with other network software that use the Ethernet communications systems.

The DECNA controller module is installed in the card cage inside the Professional computer. The
computer is connected to the Ethernet network by the transceiver cable that comes with the DECNA
controller.
Features
•

Data transfer rate of 10M bits/so

•

Performs Direct Memory Access (DMA) transfers to and from CPU memory.

•

Contains a built-in test program that tests the controller when the Professional computer is first
turned on.

•

Performs internal and external loopback of data and can assist with the loopback of data from
other stations.

Reference Documentation

•

PRO/DECnet User's Guide

AA-V445A-TH

•

Introduction to Local Area Networks

EB-22714-18

•

DELNI Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DELNI-IN

•

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

•

The Professional 300 Series Communications Handbook

EB-26165-55

•

Professional 300 Series Owner's Manual

AZ-N597A-TH

•

Professional 300 Series Pocket Service Guide

EK-PC350-PS

Hardware Components (Figure I)
•

DECNA option module (P/N 54-15987-01)

•

PVC transceiver cable 5 m (16.4 ft) (PIN 17-00612-01)

•

Loopback connector (P /N 12-22196-01)

DECNA-I

DECNAINSTALLATION

LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
DECNA MODULE

PRO/DECNA MAINTENANCE
SERVICES DISKETTE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE

INSTALLATION/OWNER'S MANUAL
MKV85·1133

Figure I

Contents of DECNA Shipping Container

The DECNA option module is a standard size printed circuit board that installs into one option slot on a
Professional 300 series computer. The module has a single 90-pin ZIF connector (J I) and connects via the
bus and system module to connector (NETI) (mounted at the rear of the Professional 300 series
computer).
Software Component (Figure I)
PRO/DECNA Maintenance Services Diskette
The communications software can be installed from the above diskette or down-line loaded from the host
computer.

DECNA-2

DEeNA INSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram

UNPACK THE CARTON
AND CHECK THE
CONTENTS

-{SEE FIGURE 1

CONTACT THE SALES
REPRESENTATIVE AND
DELIVERY AGENT

SET THE SYSTEM
POWER SWITCH TO "0"
(OFF POSITION)

UNPLUG THE SYSTEM
POWER CORD FROM
THE WALL OUTLET
AND SYSTEM

SLIDE THE COVER
RELEASE TABS
FORWARD AND
OUTWARDS

MKV85-113i

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet I of 5)

DECNA-3

DEeNA INSTALLATION

_
{

WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE THE PROFESSIONAL
300 SERIES COMPUTER WITH THE
COVER REMOVED

LOOSEN THE
THUMBSCREWS AND
OPEN THE CARD CAGE
DOOR

CHECK THAT THE
SYSTEM HAS A
MEMORY MODULE
(0034)

{

NOTE
MEMORY MODULE (0034) MUST BE
INSTALLED IN ANY OPEN SLOT TO
THE LEFT (FORWARD) OF THE -DECNA MODULE
(0042)

PULL OUT THE HANDLE
AT THE BASE OF THE
MEMORY MODULE

MKV85-1138

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 5)

DECNA-4

DEeNA INSTALLATION

SLIDE THE MEMORY
MODULE (0034) OUT OF
SLOT NUMBER 6

SLIDE THE MEMORY
MODULE INTO SLOT
NUMBER 4

TURN THE HANDLE 90°
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
AND PUSH THE HANDLE
IN

MKV85-1139

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 5)

DECNA-5

DECNAINSTALLATION

SLIDE THE DECNA
MODULE (0042) INTO
ANY OPEN SLOT TO THE
RIGHT OF THE MEMORY
MODULE (0034)

CLOSE THE CARD CAGE
DOOR AND TIGHTEN
THE THUMBSCREWS

SLIDE THE RELEASE
TABS INWARD AND
BACKWARDS

MKV85·1140

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 5)

DECNA-6

DEeNA INSTALLATION

{

AUTION
BE SURE THAT POWER TO THE PROFESSIONAL
300 SERIES COMPUTER IS TURNED OFF
WHENEVER CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING
THE TRANSCEIVER CABLE TO ANOTHER DEVICE.

- - {SEE FIGURE 3

SET THE POWER
SWITCH TO '" ., (ON
POSITION)

WAIT 30 SECONDS. THE
DIGITAL LOGO SHOULD
APPEAR ON THE SCREEN

RUN THE PRO/DECNA
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
TEST

REFER TO TABLE 1 AND
REPLACE THE
APPROPRIATE DEVICE(S)

MKV85·1141

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 5 of 5)

DECNA-7

DEeNA CABLING

Cabling

CAN BE CONNECTED TO:

~ DELNI UNIT
. " ETHERJACK CONNECTOR
H4000 TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER CABLE

NOTE
GO TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR
THE DELNI UNIT OR H4000 TRANSCEIVER
FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON CONNECTING THE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE TO THESE DEVICES.

MKV85-1134

Figure 3 Connecting the Transceiver Cable

DECNA-8

DECNA DIAGNOSTICS

Power-Up Self-Test
•

Tests entire system each time the Professional system is turned ON.

•

Successful test is indicated by the DIGITAL logo appearing on the screen (refer to Figure 4).

(

~BmDDmD

MKV84-2353

Figure 4 Successful Power-Up Self-Test

•

If the logo does not appear on the screen:
Leave the system ON and wait at least two minutes.
Turn the system OFF and then ON.
If the system fails the Power-Up Self-Test again, replace the DECNA controller and
repeat the test.

•

If the Power-Up Self-Test detects a problem, a picture appears on the screen highlighting the
defective module (refer to Figure 5). When the screen shows this kind of picture, determine
which component to replace.
The DECNA controller
The transceiver cable
The DELNI unit
The transceiver

DECNA-9

DECNA DIAGNOSTICS

..
110110

SLOT NUMBER

ERROR NUMBER

.0110

PU""m
I 0 NUMBER

MKV85-1135

Figure 5
•

Error Indication on the Power-Up Self-Test

Type RESUME on the keyboard when an error is indicated. The computer will finish its
loading but cannot be used with the network. If the error number is:
110 or lower, replace the DECNA module only.
111 or greater, the error may be with the transceiver cable, the DECNA controller, or
some other part of the network. Continue testing the network.

Maintenance Services Program
The DEeNA controller comes with a diskette labeled PRO/DECNA Maintenance Services (DECNA
diagnostic). This diskette works only on the diskette-based operating system that is provided in the
Maintenance and Installation slipcase. This slipcase comes with the Professional 300 computer (refer to
the Professional 300 Series Owner's Manual and the PlOS System, Maintenance Application, and Test
diskettes in the Maintenance and Installation slipcase).
Update the System Unit test (part of the Maintenance Services Program) to include the DECNA
controller diagnostic program. This update is described as follows.

DECNA-lO

DEeNA DIAGNOSTICS

Installing the DECNA Diagnostic - This procedure installs the DEeNA diagnostic test on the Maintenance Application diskette for maintenance and testing. Perform this procedure after successfully installing the DEeNA controller.

Turn the computer OFF.

Insert the PlOS system diskette in drive 1 and dose the diskette drive door.

Once the PlOS system diskette has been successfully loaded, a message appears on the screen.
Now, remove the PlOS diskette and insert the Maintenance Application diskette in drive 1.
Press RESUME.

Select the Update Program. Press DO.

When prompted, insert the PROIDEeNA Maintenance Services diskette in drive 2. Press
RESUME.

When finished, remove both diskettes from the drives and return them to the Maintenance and
Installation slipcase.

Running the Maintenance Services Program - The Power-Up Self-Test runs each time the Professional
computer is turned ON. Run the Maintenance Services test along with the other system tests from the
Maintenance Services Menu when the system test is selected.
To run the test for the DEeNA controller, follow the instructions in the Professional 300 Series Owner's
Manual (Maintenance Application Test Programs section). These instructions are summarized as follows:

Place the PlOS diskette in drive 1 and close the diskette drive door.

Turn the system power OFF and then ON.

Follow the instructions that appear on the monitor.

Remove the PlOS diskette.

Place the Maintenance Application diskette in drive 1 and close the diskette drive door.

Place test diskette in drive 2 and close the diskette drive door.

Press RESUME on the keyboard.

Select the desired test.

The DEeNA diagnostic test runs as part of the System Unit test. If the test detects an error, the test
places a system unit test summary on the screen. Press the HELP key for information and corrective
action.
See the Professional 300 Series Pocket Service Guide for information on running the individual option
tests in the field service mode.

DEeNA-II

DECNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Testing the Network
The network can be tested by using the loopback connector that comes with the DECNA controller. This
loopback connector is placed at the end of cables and other devices to verify their operation. After the loopback connector has been installed, run the Power-Up Self-Test to check each piece of added equipment. If
the DIGITAL logo appears, the new piece of equipment is good. Continue testing other parts of the
network.
The loopback connector is attached to the Professional series computer at connector NET! (refer to
Figure 6). A green light at the rear of the connector indicates that the computer is supplying power to the
H 4000 transceiver. If the light does not turn ON, the system is not supplying power to the transceiver and
the system will not be able to communicate over the network. This condition indicates a problem with the
system module. Contact a service technician.
If the Professional computer is operated with a DELNI unit only, the lack of power will not affect the
DELNI unit's operation. If the DELNI unit is connected to an H4000 transceiver, however, check that the
DELNI unit is supplying power to the transceiver. Do this by connecting the loopback connector to
connector 9 on the DELNI panel. The green light on the loopback connector should turn ON. If the green
light does not turn ON, replace the DELNI unit.
Use the following procedure for the tests listed in Table 1. For each test listed, move the loopback
connector to the position indicated and run the Power-Up Self-Test. Table I indicates the maximum
lengths of cables.
NOTE
Be sure the transceiver cable lengths are within the
length restrictions listed in Table 1.

MKV85-1143

Figure 6 Connecting the Loopback Connector to NET I Connector

DECNA-12

DECNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table t

Testing Network Devices

Test
Description

Position of Loopback
Connector

DEeNA Test

Rear of Professional
(NET) connector)

Professional
computer with
DEeNA controller
good

Failure in
DEeNA
controller*

Transceiver
Cable Test

At end of 5 m (16.4
ft) transceiver cable
(cable lengths are
maximum)

Professional
computer with
transceiver
cable good

Failure in
transceiver
cable

A Second
Transceiver
Cable Test

At end of two
transceiver cables
connected together
(Do not test more
than 25 m (82 ft)
of cable at a time
(total). Exchange
different lengths
until all are tested

Professonal
computer, 5 m
(16.4 ft)
cable, other
cable good

Failure in
other cablet

DELNI Test

On connector 9 of
the DELNI unit

Professional
computer, 5 m
(16.4 ft) cable,
40m(l3\.2ft)
cable, DELNI
unit good

Failure in
DELNI unit

DELNI and
Transceiver
Cable Test

At end of cable
connected to
connector 9 on the
DELNI unit

Professional
computer, 5 m
()6.4 ft) cable,
40 m (l3\'2 ft)
cable, DELNI
unit, 20 m
(65.6 ft) cable
good

Failure in
next cable
connected to
connector 9
on DELNI
unit

Good Logo

Error
Indicator

If the Professional computer (or DELNI unit) is attached to an H4000 transceiver, be sure the green
light on the end of the loopback connector lights. If it does not light, power is not reaching the
transceiver and the transceiver will not operate.

If the error indication is still present, then the transceiver or some other part of the network is not
working correctly. Notify the system manager or service technician.

DEeNA-I 3

DECNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 1 Testing Network Devices (Cont)
Error
Indicator

Test
Description

Position of Loopback
Connector

Two-Tier
DELNI Test

Loopback connector
Not used

Professional
computer, 5 m
(16.4 ft) cable,
40 m (131.2 ft)
cable, 45 m
(147.6 ft)
cable, second
DELN I unit good

Failure in
second DELNI
connected

DELNI and
Transceiver
Cable Test

Loopback Connector
Not used

Professional
computer, 5 m
(16.4 ft) cable,
second cable,
DELNI unit,
third cable
goodt

Failure in
third cable
tested

Good Logo

Second and third cables must not exceed 35 m (I 14.8 ft) in length.

Test Procedure I.

Turn OFF the Professional computer.
CAUTION
Always turn the power OFF before connecting or
disconnecting any network cables, otherwise, the
system may be damaged.

Disconnect the network transceiver cable from the rear of the computer (NETI connector).

Connect the loopback connector to the network connector (N ET I) on the rear of the Professional computer (Figure 6).

Turn the computer ON. Wait for the DIGITAL logo or error indicator.
If the logo appears, then the DECNA controller is operating correctly.
If the error indicator appears, the DECNA controller is defective and needs to be replaced. If
the error continues after replacing the DECNA controller, then the system board must be
replaced.

DECNA-14

DECNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Turn the Professional computer OFF.

Disconnect the loopback connector from the computer and connect the transceiver cable to the
computer (NET]).

A ttach the loopback connector to the other end of the transceiver cable.

Turn the computer ON. Wait for the DIGITAL logo or error indicator to appear.
If the logo appears, the last device added is operating correctly.
If the error indicator appears, the last device added is defective and needs to be replaced.

Repeat Steps 5 through 8, adding the next components for the network one at a time.

DECNA-15

DECOM BROADBAND ETHERNET TRANSCEIVE'R
PLEASE READ THESE TWO PAGES BEFORE INSTALLING THE DECOM TRANSCEIVER. THESE PAGES CONTAIN IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR THE SUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT OF THE
DECOM TRANSCEIVER.

Certain Ethernet controller to DECOM broadband transceiver configurations may affect timing differences
that can occur between baseband and broadband operations. The timing differences place restrictions and/
or constraints on certain operating systems and some DECnet Network Control Protocol (NCP) functions.
The DECOM transceiver is currently targeted to support the same DIGITAL networking products that are
being used with the following baseband technology:
•

DECnet Phase IV for the VMS, MicroVMS, RSX, and P/OS operating systems.

•

UNIBUS (DEUNA), Q-bus (DEQNA), and Professional 350-bus (DECNA) Ethernet controllers.

•

Local Network Interconnect(DELNI) and Communications Servers (Routers, Terminal Servers, and
Gateways)

NOTE: The DEREP Ethernet repeater is not supported in configurations with the DECOM transceiver.
It is suggested that the following actions be taken before installing and checking out the DECOM
transceiver:
1.

Verify that the following or later versions of software are used:
VMS V4.2 .................................. DECnet VAX V4.0
RSX 11 S V4.1 ............................... DECnet 11 S V4.0 *
RSX 11 M V4.1 .............................. DECnet 11 M V4.0 *
RSX 11 M-Plus V4.1 .......................... DECnet 11 M Plus V2.0 *
P/OS V3.0 .................................. PRO/DECnet V2.0
*Install all patches for DECnet - 11 S, 11 M, or 11 M-Plus system through Update E.

If connecting the DECOM transceiver to a DEQNA controller on a MicroVMS system running DECnet
software, install a patch to the DEQNA driver (XQDRIVER.EXE) on MicroVMS systems before
V4.2.
The Software Services (SWS) group of the local field service branch can obtain the driver patch by
calling the Software Hot Line (NCSS) at DTN 223-5911 or 617-493-5911. Customers receiving
the DECOM product will be informed of the timing difference and need for the patch. THE CUSTOMER WILL BE INFORMED THAT THE PATCH CAN BE OBTAINED BY CALLING THEIR LOCAL
FIELD SERVICE BRANCH OFFICE. Requests for the driver patch that come directly from the customer will not be honored. The customer must go through the local contacts.
The above patch procedure will remain in effect until VMS V4.2 shipments have been made. Phone
requests to obtain the patch after V4.2 shipments have been made will not be accepted.

DECOM-i

If using the DECOM transceiver with a DEONA controller on an RSX-11 system running DECnet
software, issue the following NCP command or commands from a privileged terminal/account.
NCP> CLEAR LOGGING CONSOLE EVENT 5.14
NCP> CLEAR LOGGING FILE EVENT 5.14
NCP> CLEAR LOGGING MONITOR EVENT 5.14

Page DECOM-22 contains a reference to an "Ethernet Controller Self-Test" as "NI Exerciser". This reference
is not true in all cases. When the DECOM transceiver is to be tested in a network environment, use the "NI
Exerciser" when the flow diagram reads "Run Ethernet Controller Self-Test". This test is called for on pages
DECOM-24, -28, -29, -31, -35, and -36.
When the DECOM transceiver is to be tested in a standalone loopback configuration ("RF Loopback" with the
variable attenuator or "Digital Loopback" using the DECOM loopback switch), use the "Controller's
Functional Diagnostic" when the flow diagram reads "Run Ethernet Controller Self-Test". This occurs on
pages DECOM-25, -26, -27, -32, -33, and -37.
NOTE: In all cases of "Run Ethernet Controller Self- Test" using the H4000- T Ethernet transceiver tester, its
testing functions may be substituted for a station with an Ethernet controller utilizing NI Exerciser or
functional diagnostics.

DECOM-ii

DECOM INSTALLATION

DECOM BROADBAND ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
General Description
The DECOM broadband Ethernet transceiver models are used in conjunction with DIGITAL Ethernet
controllers like the DEUNA, DEQNA, and DECNA and with other DIGITAL Ethernet devices such as
DELNI and communications servers.
The transceivers connect the Ethernet controllers or devices to either a single- or dual-cable broadband
system.
DECOM Versions (Figure t)
•
•

Model DECOM-AX* is a dual-cable transceiver.
Model DECOM-8X* is a single-cable transceiver.

FRONT

DECOM-AX (REAR)
DUAL-CABLE TRANSCEIVER

DECOM-BX (REAR)
SINGLE-CABLE TRANSCEIVER
MKV85-1086

Figure I

Dual- and Single-Cable Transceivers

*The letter "A" or "8" will appear in place of the "X" in the model designation to signify the following transceiver input voltages:

Model

Input Voltage

Dual-cable DECOM-AA
Dual-cable DECOM-AB

230 Vac

Single-cable DECOM-BA
Single-cable DECOM-BB

230 Vac

115 Vac

DECOM-l

DECOM INSTALLATION

Components
The following parts are supplied with each DECOM transceiver.

Table 1 Transceiver Components
Model

Owner's
Manual

Power
Cord

DECOM-AA
DECOM-AB
DECOM-BA
DECOM-BB

X
X
X
X

Country
Kit
X*

X
X*

*Power cord for DECOM-AB and -BB units comes in accompanying country kit DEBBK-AX, where "X"
identifies the country.
Country Kits
Appropriate power cords are shipped in country kits that must be ordered separately with each DECOM
transceiver. The following table indicates the country kit for each particular country.
Table 2

Country Kits

Country Used In

Country Kit
Designation

Australia
Belgium
Canada - English
Canada - French
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland - French
Switzerland - German
United Kingdom

DEBBK-AZ
DEBBK-AB
DEBBK-AQ
DEBBK-AC
DEBBK-AD
DEBBK-AF
DEBBK-AN
DEBBK-AG
DEBBK-AH
DEBBK-AI
DEBBK-AN
DEBBK-AS
DEBBK-AM
DEBBK-AK
DEBBK-AL
DEBBK-AE

DECOM-2

DECOM INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation

Title

Document
Number

DECOM Broadband Ethernet Transceiver Owner's Manual

EK-OOBET-OM

DECOM Broadband Ethernet Transceiver
Technical Manual

EK-OOBET-TM

DEFTR Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator
Owner's Manual

EK-FRETR-OM

Broadband Ethernet Channel Specification and
Certification Guide

EK-OOBEC-SM

The Ethernet Specifications

AA-K759X*-TK

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

Ethernet Communications Server Site
Preparation and Planning Guide

EK-DECSA-SP

Ethernet Communications Server Installation Guide

EK-DECSA-IN

Ethernet Communications Server Operations and
Maintenance Guide

EK-DECSA-OP

DE UNA User's Guide

EK-DEUNA-UG

DEQNA User's Guide

EK-DEQNA-UG

DECNA Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DECNA-IN

DELNI Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DELNI-IN

*The letter "X" indicates the version of the document.

DECOM-3

DECOM INSTALLATION
Device Placement
•

Place the
power
cord.transceiver within 1.2 meters (4 feet) of the electrical power socket to accommodate the

•

Do not block the airflow for the cooling fan.

REAR

POWER
CONNECTOR

1.2 M (4 FT)

MKV85-0130

Figure 2 Transceiver Placement

DECOM-4

DECOM INSTALLATION

Power Requirements
AC input power is switch selectable.
liS Vac, 60 Hz, 0.8 A, 90 W
or
230 Vac, 50 Hz, 0.4 A, 90 W

Preinstallation Steps
I.

Check that the network in which the transceiver is being installed has been certified according to the
Broadband Ethernet Channel Specification and Certification Guide (EK-OOBEC-SM).

Check that all Ethernet controllers or devices are operating correctly. Refer to the manuals that come
with the devices for their checkout procedures.

Make sure that the other end of the transceiver cable is connected to the controller and that the RF
drop cable(s) is connected to the appropriate coaxial wall outlet(s) or tap(s).

For the dual-cable system, mark the receive and transmit RF drop cables and coaxial wall outlets or
taps RECEIVE and TRANSMIT, respectively. (If the cables are reversed during installation, no
damage will be caused to the equipment; however, the DECOM unit will not work.)

DECOM-5

DECOM INSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram

OBTAIN CUSTOMERSPECIFIED INFORMATION:

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED (REFER TO
TABLE 1)

PLACE DECOM TRANSCEIVER IN CHOSEN
LOCATION (SEE FIGURE
2)

VERIFY VOLTAGE
SWITCH SETTING (SEE
FIGURE 4)

•

DEVICE PLACEMENT
(SEE "DEVICE PLACEMENT')

•

POWER REQUIREMENTS (SEE "POWER
REQUIREMENTS")

•

PREINSTALLATION
CHECKS (SEE "PREINSTALLATION STEPS")

•

CONFIGURATION CONSTRAINTS (SEE "CABLE
LENGTH RESTRICTIONS")

SET NORMAL!LOOPBACK
SWITCH TO NORMAL
POSITION (SEE FIGURE 5)

PLUG IN BOTH ENDS OF
POWER CORD (SEE
FIGURE 5)

MKV85·1087

Figure 3

DECOM Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet I of 3)

DECOM-6

DECOM INSTALLATION

GO TO DECOM
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE 5

POWER CORRECTLY
CONNECTED. PROCEED
TO CONNECT CABLES
TO DECOM TRANSCEIVER.

PLUG TRANSCEIVER
CABLE INTO CONTROLLER CONNECTOR
ON DECOM TRANSCEIVER (SEE FIGURE 8)

LOCK TRANSCEIVER CABLE IN PLACE (SEE
FIGURE 9)

LOCK TRANSCEIVER
CABLE IN PLACE (SEE
FIGURE 9)

MKV85-1088

Figure 3

DECOM Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

DECOM-7

DECOM INSTALLATION

SCREW RECEIVE AND
TRANSMIT RF DROP
CABLES ONTO RECEIVE
AND TRANSMIT
THREADED CONNECTORS
ON DECOM TRANSCEIVER
(SEE FIGURE 10)

SCREW RF DROP CABLE
ONTO TX/RX OUTLET
THREADED CONNECTOR
ON DECOM TRANSCEIVER (SEE FIGURE 12)

SCREW OPPOSITE END
OF DROP CABLES ONTO
THREADED CONNECTORS
OF COAXIAL WALL OUTLET OR TRUNK CABLE
TAP (SEE FIGURE 13)

SCREW OPPOSITE END
OF RF DROP CABLE
ONTO THREADED CONNECTOR OF COAXIAL
WALL OUTLET OR
TRUNK CABLE TAP (SEE
FIGURE 14)

DUAL-CABLE UNIT IS
FULLY INSTALLED.
INITIATE VERIFICATION
OF UNIT OPERATION.

SINGLE-CABLE UNIT IS
FULLY INSTALLED.
INITIATE VERIFICATION
OF UNIT OPERATION.

GO TO FIGURE 16 TO
VERIFY UNIT OPERATION.

GO TO FIGURE 19 TO
VERIFY UNIT OPERATION.

I
I
I
I

GO TO DECOM TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE 5

GO TO DECOM TROUBLESHOOTING TAB'LE 5

MKV85-1089

Figure 3

DECOM Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

DECOM-8

DECOM INSTALLATION

CAUTION
INCORRECT VOLTAGE SETTING CAN DAMAGE THE
SYSTEM.

REAR

MKV85-1090

Figure 4

Diagram for Setting Voltage Switch

DECOM-9

DECOM INSTALLATION

NORMAL

LOOPBACK

","

~~".
@)"

MKV85·1110

Figure 5 Diagram for Setting NORMAL/LOOPBACK Switch and
Connecting Power Cord

DECOM-IO

DECOM INSTALLATION

AIR

=ON

• = OFF

LOOPBACK READY

TRANSMIT RECEIVE COLLISION IN RANGE

•

(AMBER)

(GREEN)

(AMBER)

•
(GREEN)

NOTE
FOR DEFINITIONS OF THE LIGHTS ON THE FRONT PANEL, SEE TABLE 3.
M KV85-1 091

Figure 6

Diagram Indicating Power Correctly Connected

DECOM-ll

DECOM INSTALLATION

Table 3

Description of Indicators (See Figure 7)

Light

Color

Condition

LOOPBACK

AMBER

NORMAL/LOOPBACK switch is
in LOOPBACK position

READY

GREEN

Power is ON and NORMAL/
LOOPBACK switch is in NORMAL
position.

TRANSMIT

GREEN

Transceiver is transmitting
data.

RECEIVE

GREEN

Transceiver is receiving
data.

COLLISION

AMBER

Collisions are detected.

IN RANGE

GREEN

Transceiver sends a data
packet that is received with
no errors within the specified
time. This indicates that the
transceiver is located within
the proper distance from the
headend.

LOOPBACK READY

TRANSMIT

RECEIVE COLLISION IN RANGE

0 (GREEN)
0 (GREEN)
0 (AMBER)
00
(AMBER) (GREEN)
(GREEN)
MKV85·0163

Figure 7

Front Panel Indicators

DECOM-12

Blinking

DECOM INSTALLATION

NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE TRANSCEIVER CA~LE HAVE A STRAIGHT
CONNECTOR INSTEAD OF A RIGHT-ANGLE CONNECTOR BECAUSE THE
RIGHT-ANGLE CONNECTOR IS MORE DIFFICULT TO CONNECT TO THE
TRANSCEIVER.

f"'~

I . .---CONTROLLER

J~~

CONNECTOR
ON TRANSCEIVER

....-- TRANSCEIVER CABLE TO ETHERNET
CONTROLLER OR DEVICE
MKV85-1173

Figure 8

Diagram for Connecting Transceiver Cable to Transceiver

DECOM-13

DECOM INSTALLATION

FIRST SLIDE LOCK

THEN SLIDE LOCK
FIRMLY TO LEFT
UNTIL IT LOCKS

TORIGHT\~.
__~/
GENTLY PULL CONNECTOR
FORWARD TO
MAKE SURE IT IS
SECURED

MKV85·1092

Figure 9

Diagram for Locking Transceiver Cable

DECOM-14

DECOM INSTALLATION

CAUTION
DO NO OVERTIGHTEN THE HEX-NUTS. FINGER TIGHTEN ONLY.
NOTE
THESE CABLES SHOULD BE MARKED TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE.

MKV85-1093

Figure 10

Diagram for Connecting RF Drop Cables to Dual-Cable
Transceiver

DECOM-15

DECOM INSTALLATION

NOTE
FOR DEFINITIONS OF THE LIGHTS ON THE FRONT PANEL, SEE TABLE 3.

0= ON

LOOPBACK READY

• = OFF

(AMBER)

•

(GREEN)

• • • •

TRANSMIT

(GREEN)

RECEIVE COLLISION IN RANGE

(GREEN)

(AMBER)

(GREEN)

= ON OR OFF OR BLINKING (INDICATING NETWORK TRAFFIC)
MKV85·1094

Figure II

Diagram Indicating Transceiver is Fully Installed

DECOM-16

DECOM INSTALLATION

CAUTION
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE HEX-NUT. FINGER TIGHTEN ONLY.

MKV85-1174

Figure 12

Diagram for Connecting RF Drop Cable to Single-Cable
Transceiver

DECOM-17

DECOM CABLING

Cable Length Restrictions
Make sure that the transceiver cable and RF drop cable(s) reach the transceiver using the guidelines in
Table 4.
Table 4

Cable Length Guidelines

From

Controller

Transceiver

Cable Length
NOT to Exceed
40 meters
(131 feet)

Cable Type
BNE3X-XX.
A vailable from Digital
Equipment Corporation.

Transceiver

Tap(s)

25 meters
(82 feet)

RG6 triple-shielded with
male F-type connector
and extended sleeves.

Transceiver

Tap(s) via
coaxial wall
outlet(s)

25 meters
(82 feet)

Can be ready-made by
DIGITAL Field Service.

DECOM-18

DECOM CABLING
Cable Connections
Figures 13 and 14 show the cable connections for the dual-cable and single-cable systems.

TRANSCEIVER (DECOM-AX)
TO HEADEND
TRANSMIT

,..:1,

r:J ~TA?S I

......_:I'ftIs'r~

l J,.'l

I..

I
I

1·1
',LJ

st.,

l... I I
~J

-IJ

~" ' / '~I

COAXIAL
WALL
I
OUTLETS

TRUNK
CABLE
MKV85-0131

Figure 13

Dual-Cable System

TO FREQUENCY

TRANSCEIVER (DECOM-BX)

TRANSLATOR
(DEFTR)

I
I
I

r:~~

"'-_IElI..~~ I I TAP
'~J

I
I

I
TRUNK
CABLE

MKV85-0132

Figure 14 Single-Cable System

DECOM-19

DECOM DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics
There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the DECOM transceiver. The NIE (Network Exerciser)
diagnostic, however, can be helpful in isolating faults to the transceiver as discussed in the Maintenance
Aids section.

DECOM-20

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS
DECOM Troubleshooting Table
Table 5 helps to identify problems in the transceiver and suggests simple procedures to fix them.

Table 5

DECOM Troubleshooting

Problem

Probable Cause

Remedy

READY light is ON
and fan is OFF.

Fan is bad

Call service for transceiver.

READY light is OFF
and fan is OFF.

Blown fuse

Check fuse. (See Figure 15).

No power at the
socket

If fuse is good, check main power circuit
breaker and make sure that there is power
at the socket.
If power is at the socket and through the
power cord to the transceiver, call service
for transceiver.

LOOPBACK light is
ON.

READY light turns
OFF when transceiver
cable is connected
to the transceiver.

LOOPBACK SWITCH
in LOOPBACK mode

Switch to NORMAL mode.

Transceiver
faulty

Call service for transceiver.

Controller
faulty

Disconnect and reconnect the
power cord.
If the READY light still does not turn
ON, disconnect the transceiver cable.

If the READY light turns ON, call
service for controller.
If the READY light still does not turn
ON, call service for transceiver.

Transceiver
faulty

DECOM-21

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

CHECK THE FUSE.
1.

UNPLUG THE TRANSCEIVER.

CHECK THE LINE FUSE AND REPLACE IT. IF BLOWN.

WARNING
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE. REPLACE
ONLY WITH FUSES OF THE SAME TYPE AND RATING.

LINE FUSE
1A/2S0 VAC SB

~::v GOOD FUSE

be> <t:D BAD FUSE

MKV85-1095

Figure 15, Diagram for Checking Fuse
Precheck
Before using Table 6 and the flow diagrams in Figures 16 and 19, test the transceiver cable and make sure
that it works properly, as described in the user documentation for the Ethernet controller.
Ethernet Controller Self-Test
Both flow diagrams in Figures 16 and 19 (for single-cable and dual-cable transceivers) assume that the
Ethernet controller has a loopback test capability (that is, NI Exerciser), which can be used to test the
transceiver. When the flow diagrams indicate "RUN ETHERNET CONTROLLER SELF-TEST," run
this test on the transceiver by using the Ethernet controller self-test or functional level testing software.
Refer to the user and software documentation for the particular Ethernet controller being used.

DECOM-22

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS
Network Troubleshooting Table
Use Table 6 for a simple method of isolating a network problem to a DECOM, DEFTR, or network cable
facility.

Table 6

Network Troubleshooting

Problem

Probable Cause

Remedy

All DECOM transceivers
are NOT working and
other applications*
are NOT working.

Network cable facility

Get service for network
cable facility.

All DECOM transceivers
are NOT working and
other applications*
are working.

Frequency translator
(DEFTR) - single-cable
only

Get service for DEFTR
frequency translator.

Some DECOM transceivers
are NOT working.

Network cable facility
section

Get service for network
cable facility.

One DECOM transceiver
is NOT working.

DECOM transceiver

Use DECOM checkout
flow diagrams for a more
thorough isolation procedure
or get service for DECOM
transceiver.

*"Other applications" means other data modems, video equipment, TI type modems, and so forth, that use
the network cable facility as their transmission medium.

DECOM-23

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

DECOM-AX Checkout Flow Diagram
Use the flow diagram in Figure 16 to check the operation of the dual-cable transceiver (DECOM-AX) or
for a more thorough fault isolation guide for the dual-cable unit.

SEE} -

FIGURE
17

CHECK THAT TRANSCEIVER IS PROPERLY
CONNECTED TO
NETWORK

NOTE 1
CHECK THAT THE IN RANGE LIGHT ON THE
TRANSCEIVER TURNS ON DURING THIS TEST.
IF IT IS OFF, THEN THE TAP TO WHICH THE
TRANSCEIVER IS CONNECTED MAY BE MORE
THAN 1900 METERS (6234 FEET) FROM THE
HEADEND, OR THE TRANSCEIVER MAY
REQUIRE SERVICE.
NOTE 2
TO VERIFY COMPLETE NETWORK PATH, RUN
NETWORK APPLICATIONS OR DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE WITH THIS TRANSCEIVER AND
OTHER OPERATIONAL TRANSCEIVERS.

SEE~

~OT)-

FAIL

SEE~

~OTj-

MKV85-1096

Figure 16

Checkout Flow Diagram for Dual-Cable Transceiver (Sheet 1 of 6)

DECOM-24

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

• DISCONNECT TRANSCEIVER FROM
NETWORK AT
TRANSCEIVER
• CONNECT LOOPBACK
PAD

SEE
FIGURE

{

MKV85-1097

Figure 16 Checkout Flow Diagram for Dual-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 2 of 6)

DECOM-25

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

{

SEE
FIGURE

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

{

SEE
FIGURE

MKV85-1098

Figure 16 Checkout Flow Diagram for Dual;.Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 3 of 6)

DECOM-26

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

)

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

MKV85·1099

Figure 16

Checkout Flow Diagram for Dual-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 4 of 6)
,

DECOM-27

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

MKV85-1100

Figure 16 Checkout Flow Diagram for DuaJ-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 5 of 6)

DECOM-28

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE TRANSCEIVER
BEING TESTED WITH
WORKING TRANSCEIVER

SWITCH NEWLY INSTALLED
TRANSCEIVER TO
"NORMAL" MODE

FAIL

SEE}
NOTE 1
-

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

PASS

REPLACE ORIGINAL

MKV85·1101

Figure 16

Checkout Flow Diagram for Dual-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 6 of 6)

DECOM-29

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

TO HEADEND

TX
TAP~

A
I

Y
I
I

I"'-k.

-......_ _.:$.)-'1

TO ETHERNET
CONTROLLER
OR DEVICE

I.lJ

I
r:-::;.~

~"----------------/~~~·t~
I

TAP

MKV85-0142

Figure 17

Network Connection Diagram for Dual-Cable Transceiver

RECEIVE
CONNECTOR

TRANSMIT
CONNECTOR

IN OUT

IN OUT
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

c:::JIII 1dB

CJIII1 dB

= OUT =

-=:J 2
-=:J 3

c:J1112

EJ3

CJl6
IC:::J 10
CJII 20

OUT =

= IN

C]20

= IN

CJ116
£::=J 10
IIII:::J 20
IL::J 20

= OUT =
.1Q
35dB
TOTAL

= OUT =
OUT =
3

20
53dB
TOTAL
MKV85-1102

Figure I 8

Loopback Pad Connection and Settings Diagram
DECOM-30

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS
, DECOM-8X Checkout Flow Diagram
Use the flow diagram in Figure 19 to check the operation of the single-cable transceiver (DECOM-BX) or
for a more thorough fault isolation guide for the single-cable unit. For the single-cable transceiver, it is
possible to isolate a problem to the transceiver or to the downconverter.

NOTE 1
CHECK THAT THE IN RANGE LIGHT ON THE
TRANSCEIVER TURNS ON DURING THIS TEST.

SEE} FIGURE
20

IF IT IS OFF, THEN THE TAP TO WHICH THE
TRANSCEIVER IS CONNECTED MAY BE MORE
THAN 1900 METERS (6234 FEET) FROM THE

CHECK THAT TRANSCEIVER IS PROPERLY
CONNECTED TO
NETWORK

FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR, OR THE TRANSCEIVER MAY REQUIRE SERVICE.
NOTE 2
TO VERIFY COMPLETE NETWORK PATH, RUN
NETWORK APPLICATIONS OR DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE WITH THIS TRANSCEIVER AND
OTHER OPERATIONAL TRANSCEIVERS.

SEE~

~OT)-

FAIL

SEE~
;OTj-

MKV85-1103

Figure 19

Checkout Flow Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver (Sheet 1 of 6)

DECOM-31

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

• CAREFULLY REMOVE
DOWNCONVERTER
• CONNECT LOOPBACK
PAD.

SEE
_

{

FIGURES 21
AND
18

{

SEE
FIGURE
18

MKV85-1104

Figure 19

Checkout Flow Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 2 of 6)

DECOM-32

DECOM MAINTENANCE, AIDS

{

SEE
FIGURE
18

MKV85-1105

Figure 19

Checkout Flow Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 3 of 6)

DECOM-33

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

REMOVE LOOPBACK PAD

MKV85-1106

Figure 19 Checkout Flow Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 4 of 6)

DECOM-34

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

SEE
FIGURE

{

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
TO TRANSCEIVER TEST
PORT ON DEFTR FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR

SEE
FIGURE

{

REPLACE DEFECTIVE

MKV85-1107

Figure 19

Checkout Flow Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 5 of 6)

DECOM-35

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

INSTALL WORKING
DOWN CONVERTER ON
TRANSCEIVER

SEE
FIGURE

{

FAIL

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

PASS

REPLACE ORIGINAL
DEFECTIVE TRANSCEIVER

MKV85-1108

Figure 19

Checkout Flow Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver
(Sheet 6 of 6)

DECOM-36

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

DOWN
CONVERTER

TX/RX
OUTLET

TO FREQU ENCY
TRANSLATOR (DEFTR)

I
I
I

TO ETHERNET
CONTROLLER
OR DEVICE

1"1"1
l... I I TAP

----'"

--.LJ

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

TX/RX
RF DROP
CABLE

I
I
I
MKV85-0144

Figure 20

Network Connection Diagram for Single-Cable Transceiver

CAUTION
WHEN REMOVING AND REPLACING THE DOWNCONVERTER, KEEP THE THREE CONNECTORS CAREFULLY
LINED UP SO THAT THE CONNECTOR PINS DO NOT
GET BENT_

MODEM
FREQUENCY
WINDOW

DOWNCONVERTER
MKV85-1109

Figure 21

Downconverter Removal/Replacement Diagram

DECOM-37

DECOM MAINTENANCE AIDS

DOWN
CONVERTER

TX/RX
OUTLET

TRANSCEIVER
TEST PORT

FREQUENCY
TRANSLATOR (DEFTR)*

@ @

Ii)]

)
* CONNECTED TO WORKING.
NETWORK CABLE
FACILITY

MKV85·1131

Figure 22

Transceiver to DEFTR Frequency Translator Connection Diagram

DECOM-38

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
DECrepeater 200 ETHERNET REPEATER
)

The DECrepeater 200 retimes, reshapes, and repeats all signals it receives from one segment of a Local Area
-Network (LAN) and passes these signals to the next segment. This has the effect of extending the network
beyond the limit of a single cable segment.
The DECrepeater 200 is designed to comply with the IEEE 802.3 specification and is compatible with the
Ethernet V2.0 specification.

DECrepeater 200 Versions
There are two versions of the DECrepeater 200. They are:
•

DEREN-A A/ AB, local repeater - Used to connect two standard Thickwire Ethernet, or two
IEEE 802.3 lObase5 coaxial cable LAN segments.

•

DEREN-RC/RD, remote repeater - Used to connect two remote Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 LAN
segments. This repeater connects to a coaxial cable on one side and a fiber optic cable on the other
side. The coaxial cable connects to a standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 LAN segment, and the
fiber optic cable can connect to another repeater or to a bridge. The fiber optic cable is an IEEE
802.3 fiber optic interrepeater link (FOIRL) cable.

The two versions of the repeater are shown in Figure 1.

)

)
DRPT200-1

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

LOCAL REPEATER

REMOTE REPEATER

1
~
o

1:7

CD
0

[]

MKV89-0039

Figure 1 DECrepeater 200 Local and Remote Repeaters

DRPT200-2

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
DECrepeater 200 Configuration Considerations
In a 1Obase5 to 1Obase5 configuration, the repeater has two Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) ports. The
AUI port is Ethernet compatible and is designed to comply with IEEE 802.3. DECrepeater 200 units can
connect 10base5 LAN segments with a maximum of 500 m (1640 ft) per segment.
In a 10base5 to FOIRL configuration, the repeater has two different interface ports. Port A is an AUI port
and port B is a fiber optic interface port. The fiber optic interface is compatible with the IEEE 802.3
FOIRL specification and offers multifiber support.
A maximum of four DECrepeater 200 units can be used to connect five segments of a LAN. Of the five
segments, a maximum of three can be 10baseS coaxial segments. This rule applies to both local and remote
repeaters.
Basic Configuration Rules
1.

If the repeater connects to an IEEE 802.3 transceiver, such as the H4005, the transceiver cable
must be an IEEE 802.3 compliant transceiver cable (BNE3H/K/L/M or BNE4C/D). If an
H4005 is used, it must have heartbeat disabled.

If the repeater connects to an Ethernet transceiver, such as the H4000, the transceiver cable can
be either Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 compliant.

IEEE 802.3 transceiver cables and Ethernet transceiver cables cannot be interconnected.

Maximum length for the transceiver cable cannot exceed 50 m (164 ft).

Remote (fiber optic) repeaters can be used in one of two ways:

'\I

)

Repeater-to-repeater application: Two remote repeaters are joined by a fiber optic link. Each
repeater is connected to a separate standard baseband Ethernet segment via a transceiver
and a transceiver cable.

Bridge-to-repeater application: One remote repeater is connected to a LAN Bridge by a fiber
optic link. The repeater and the bridge are connected to separate standard Ethernet segments via a transceiver and a transceiver cable. The maximum length of a single fiber optic
link between the bridge and repeater is 1.5 kilometers.

The attenuating spacer provided must be used on the transmitter ST connector when 100/140
micron cable is used if:

The measured loss of the 100/140 fiber optic cable is less than 4 dB, or

The 100/140 micron cable length of less than 1 kilometer is used.

)

DRPT200-3

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
Figure 2 shows a local DECrepeater 200 connecting two LANs that are separated by fewer than 100 m
(328 ft). This is the maximum combined length of the local repeater's transceiver cables.

TRANSCEIVER
~ TERMINATOR

\NODE

LKG-1943-88

Figure 2

Local Repeater Configuration

DRPT200-4

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
Figure 3 shows a remote DECrepeater 200 connecting two LANs by means of a transceiver cable and a
fiber optic cable. The fiber optic cable connects one remote repeater to another remote repeater.

LOCAL REPEATER

REMOTE REPEATER

LKG-1944-88

Figure 3

Remote Repeater Configuration

The DECrepeater 200 cannot be used in the following situations.
•

As a standby repeater in any repeater configuration

•

As a replacement for a remote DEREP unless both ends of the fiber optic cable connection use
DECrepeater 200 repeaters

•

With a remote LAN Bridge 100

)

DRPT200-5

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
DECrepeater 200 Components
DECrepeater 200 components are shown in Figure 4. Note that the power cord is only supplied for the U.S. I
and Canada. Power cords for other countries must be ordered separately. Table 1 is a list of order codes for
country-specific power cords.

DECrepeoter 200

POWER CORD
(u.s. ONLY)

LOCAL REPEATER
LOOPBACK CONNECTORS

INSTALLATION
GUIDE

~~
REMOTE REPEATER
LOOPIBACK CONNECTORS
AND ATTENUATING SPACER

MOUNTING
BRACKET
SCREWS

MOUNTING
BRACKETS
LKG-2632-89

Figure 4

DECrepeater 200 Components

DRPT200-6

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

Table 1

)

DEC repeater 200 Power Cord Order Codes

Option

Order Code

United States, Canada

BN20A-2E

Japan

BN20B-2E

Australia, New Zealand

BN20C-2E

Belgium, Finland, France, Norway, Spain
Sweden, West Germany, Holland

BN20D-2E

Ireland, United Kingdom

BN20E-2E

Switzerland

BN20F-2E

Denmark

BN20H-2E

Italy

BN20J-2E

India, South Africa

BN20K-2E

Israel

BN20L-2E

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following manuals for more information on the DECrepeater 200 Ethernet repeater.
Title

Document Number

DECrepeater 200 Problem Solving

EK-DEREN-PS

DECrepeater 200 Installation Guide

EK-DEREN-IN

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide

EK-DECSY-CG

DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-FC

Networks and Communications Publications Document

EK-NACPD-RE

DECrepeater 200 Technical Manual

EK-DEREN-TM

DECreperter 200 Maintenance Print Set

MP-02625-0 1

DRPT200-7

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
Device Placement
The DECrepeater 200 can be installed in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms,
as long as the environmental requirements are met. The unit can be placed on a desk, or a table, or it can be
mounted in a standard 19-inch Radio Electronics Television Manufacturers Association (RETMA) rack or
Satellite Equipment Room rack. For rack mounting see Figure 5. A wall/partition mounting kit is available
that allows the repeater to be suspended from a partitioned office wall. Installation instructions are provided
with the installation kit (P /N: H039).

LKG-2636-89

Figure 5

Rackmounting the DECrepeater 200

DRPT200-8

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

Power Requirements
Power requirements for each DECrepeater 200 model are shown in Table 2.
Table 2

Power Requirements

Model

Version

Power Requirements

DEREN-AA
DEREN-AB
DEREN-RC
DEREN-RD

Local Repeater
Local Repeater
Remote Repeater
Remote Repeater

120 Vac Nominal
240 Vac Nominal
120 Vac Nominal
240 Vac Nominal

Figure 6 shows how to verify the voltage select switch setting for the repeater being installed .

FOR 100/120V OPERATION:
SLIDE THE SWITCH TO THE LEFT
UNTIL "120V" IS VISIBLE

FOR 200/240V OPERATION:
SLIDE THE SWITCH TO THE RIGHT
UNTIL "240V" IS VISIBLE

•
•

LKG-2633-89

Figure 6

Verifying the Voltage Select Switch Setting.

DRPT200-9

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
Preinstallation Steps
Before installing the DECrepeater 200, use the following checklist to ensure that site preparation is
complete.
I.

Verify access to ac power.

Ensure that the appropriate baseband network interface is installed; that is, the H4005 and the
required transceiver cabling is in place, tested, and tagged.

Ensure that the fiber optic cables (if required) are installed, certified, and tagged.

Ensure that the wall/partition mounting bracket kit is installed (if required).

Ensure that the power outlet matches the power requirements of the repeater and is within
1. 8 m (6 ft) of the installation location.

Ensure that the environmental requirements are met.

Ensure that there is adequate space for ventilation and for maintenance access.

DRPT200-10

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagrams

ENTER

'\I

Figure 7

Local Repeater Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

DRPT200-11

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

OBSERVE 2 SECOND
LAMP TEST AND
COMPLETION OF
INTERNAL SELF-TEST

TURN THE REPEATER
OFF AND GO TO THE
TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION

PRESS THE TEST
SWITCH TO RUN THE
EXTERNAL SELF-TEST

TURN THE REPEATER
OFF AND GO TO THE
TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION

SEND USER DATA
ACROSS THE REPEATER
LINK

Figure 7

Local Repeater Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

DRPT200-12

DEC repeater 200 INSTALLATION

1
)

PRE INSTALLATION
CONSIDERATIONS

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
(FIGURE 4)

SET OPTICAL IDLE
SWITCHES (FIGURE 9)

VERIFY THE VOLTAGE
SETTING (FIGURE 6)

)
PLACE REPEATER IN THE
CHOSEN LOCATION

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
CABLES (FIGURE 10)

Figure 8

Remote Repeater Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

)

DRPT200-13

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

REMOVE THE FIBER
OPTIC PROTECTIVE
CAPS

CONNECT THE FIBER
OPTIC CABLES
(FIGURE 11)

VERIFY THE CABLE
CONNECTIONS

OBSERVE 2 SECOND
LAMP TEST AND
COMPLETION OF
INTERNAL SELF-TEST

Figure 8

Remote Repeater Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DRPT200-14

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

)
I

TURN THE REPEATER
OFF AND GO TO THE
TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION

REPEAT THE ABOVE
TO INSTALL THE
2ND REPEATER

)
FINISH INSTALLATION
OF THE FIRST
REPEATER

Figure 8

Remote Repeater Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

)
DRPT200~15

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION

Figure 8

TURN THE REPEATER
OFF AND GO TO THE
TROUBLESHOOTING
SECTION

Remote Repeater Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DRPT200-16

DECrepeater 200 INSTALLATION
Switch Settings
NOTE
Repeaters are shipped with both optical idle switches
set to OFF (UP).
A ballpoint pen can be used to move the switches up or down.
In a remote repeater configuration, set the optical idle switches on port B of a DEC repeater 200
(see Figure 9) as follows:
1.

In a DECrepeater 200-to-DECrepeater 200 configuration, set both switches OFF (up). The
LINK OK LED on both repeaters lights when power is applied to the unit.

In a DECrepeater 200-to-non-DEC 802.3 FOIRL (repeater or bridge) compatible configuration,
set switch 1 OFF (up) and switch 2 ON (down). The LINK OK LED on the DECrepeater 200
lights.
NOTE
Other switch settings are reserved for Digital use
only.

~ t UP - OFF
~ +DOWN - ON

o
m

o
Q.

").

()

MKV89-0040

Figure 9

Setting Optical Idle Switches

"', \

)

DRPT200-17

DECrepeater 200 CABLING
Cabling
This section deals with the cabling considerations for the DECrepeater 200.

PUSH SLIDE LATCH
FIRML Y TO LEFT
TO LOCK CABLES
IN PLACE

LKG-2S38-89

Figure 10

Connecting Transceiver Cables

DRPT200-18

DECrepeater 200 CABLING

)

NOTE
Install the attenuating spacer on the transmitter ST
connector when 100/140 micron cable is used if:
•

The measured fiber optic cable loss of the
100/140 micron cable is less than 4 dB.

•

The 100/140 micron cable is used for installations of less than 1 kilometer.

± .025 mm
(.310 ± .001 in)

___ 11 _ _ 7.87 mm

c::€ ~

)

LKG-2640-89

Figure 11

Connecting Fiber Optic Cables

DRPT200-19

DECrepeater 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
Testing the OECrepeater 200 consists of running the self-test. Self-test consists of two separate tests;
internal and external. The internal test is run automatically when power is applied to the repeater, but only
the internal test is run in this case. Both the internal and external tests are run when the TEST switch is
pressed. No special test equipment is required to verify repeater operations.
Internal Self-Test - Tests the internal logic including the port B interface logic. It does not test the cable
connections to both ports. Internal self-test does not require loopback connectors or connection to a working
media.
NOTE
Self-test has no effect on LEDs on port B.
External Self-Test - Includes loopback and encoded data on both ports A and B. The external self-test
includes the testing of cable connections to both ports. In a local repeater, the loopback is provided by a
loopback connector or by the transceiver connected to the port. In a remote repeater, loopback on port B is
provided by a fiber loopback connector or by the fiber optic cable connected to another remote repeater.
When the TEST switch is pressed and released, the following sequence should occur.
1.

All LEOs (except the LEOs on port B of a remote repeater) light for approximately 2 seconds.

Internal self-test for the logic module runs.

External self-test runs.

The LED in the TEST switch and the FLT LED (Figure 12) go out after approximately 5
seconds.

TEST SWITCH WITH LED
MKV89-0038

Figure 12

TEST Switch and FLT LED

ORPT200-20

DECrepeater 200 DIAGNOSTICS
If a fault is detected, the FLT LED lights, the TEST LED remains ON, and the repeater does not go on-

) line. If either of these LEOs remain ON, go to the Troubleshooting section.
NOTE
Remote repeaters do not pass external self-test unless
both repeaters are fully connected and operating. The
self-test must be performed individually on each unit.

)

DRPT200-21

DECrepeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the DECrepeater 200 is a matter of interpreting the status LED indications. This section
helps interpret the indications by describing the status LEDs and providing a troubleshooting table that
relates symptoms to their possible causes and corrective actions. Table 3 describes the status LEDs of Figure
13 and Tables 4 through 7 provide more detailed troubleshooting information.

LOCAL REPEA1ER

POWER
CONNECTOR

SEG
BOK

CPT

CNFG B

REMOTE REPEATER
LINK OK

MKV89·0041

Figure 13

Repeater Back Panel

DRPT200-22

DECrepeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

)

Table 3

Status LEDs

LED

Description

+5V

Indicates that +5 V is present.

+12V

Indicates that + 12 V is present.

-12V

Indicates that -12 V is present.

TEST

ON when self-test is running or has failed.

FLT

Shows status of self-test. ON if self-test failed.

CPT*

ON if SQE TEST is received.

CNFG B*

Indicates a configuration error on port B when ON.

CNFG A*

Indicates a configuration error on port A when ON.

CDA

Flashing when carrier received on port A is transmitted to port B.

SEGA

ON when repeater is segmented on port A. Blinks when a fault was detected on port A but
was corrected.

COB

Flashing when carrier received on port B is transmitted to port A.

SEG B

ON when repeater is segmented on port B. Blinks when a fault was detected on port B but
was corrected.

AOK/BOK

Ports A and B are operational.

EXT*

If self-test fails, EXT may be ON along with FLT indicating a subsystem failure.

DEVICE OK

OFF indicates port B module failure.

LINK OK

OFF indicates a broken fiber optic link or incompatible optical idle switch settings.

* These LEOs have more detailed diagnostic functions. See Table 4.

Table 4

Expansion of Failure Indicators

EXT

CPT

CNFGB

CNFGA

Possible Cause

OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
ON
ON
ON

ON
OFF
OFF
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Logic module (motherboard)
Logic module (motherboard)
Logic module (motherboard)
PCI module, Ext cable, or motherboard
PCI module

- Indicates that the state of this LED does not matter.

DRPT200-23

DECrepeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Tables 5 and 6 help to isolate the repeater from the link and indicate which side has what problem.

Table 5

Repeater Isolating for DEC Mode
DEREN 2
SEG
BOK

DEPCI-AC 2
LinkOK DevOK

Operation

DEREN 1
BOK
SEG

DEPCI-AC 1
LinkOK DevOK

Normal

Wrong *
Idle
Signal

OFF

1-->2

OFF

Yes

OFF

Yes

OFF

Both **
Links
Broken

OFF

Yes

OFF

Yes

OFF

DEPCI

OFF

Yes

OFF

Yes

OFF

Link
Broken

2-->1
Link
Broken

* Incompatible switch settings
** Most likely bad or disconnected fiber
Table 6

Repeater Isolating for IEEE 802.3 Mode

Operation

DEREN 1
BOK
SEG

DEPCI-AC 1
LinkOK DevOK

DEREN 2
BOK
SEG

DEPCI-AC 2
LinkOK DevOK

Normal

Wrong *
Idle
Signal

OFF

1-->2

OFF

Yes

OFF

Yes

OFF

Both **
Links
Broken

OFF

Yes

OFF

Yes

OFF

DEPCI

OFF

Yes

OFF

Yes

OFF

Link
Broken

2--»
Link
Broken

* Incompatible switch settings
** Most likely bad or disconnected fiber

DRPT200-24

DEC repeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 7

Troubleshooting

Indication

Suggested Corrective Action

All repeater lights are OFF

Check the power cord, power outlet, and circuit
breaker.

CD A LED OFF continuously.
This could indicate:
•

There is no traffic on port A

Check the +5V and +12V LEOs.

•

The transceiver on port A is
not functioning

Check transceiver power.

•

The CD A LED is
not functioning

Press the TEST switch. If the CD A LED fails to
light, it is defective.

•

Port A is short circuited or
not connected

Run self-test with the loopback connector
installed.
For local repeaters:
Swap the transceiver cable inputs to see if the
indication moves to port B. This could indicate
inactivity on that segment or a problem with the
transceiver and/or cable.
For remote repeaters:
Replace the transceiver or transceiver cable. If
this does not correct the problem, suspect inactivity on port B or a faulty logic module.

CD B LED OFF continuously.
This could indicate:

•

There is no traffic on port B

Check the +5V and +12V LEOs.

•

The transceiver on port B is
not functioning

Check transceiver power.

•

The CD B LED is
not functioning

Press the TEST switch. If the CD B LED fails to
light, it is defective;

DRPT200·25

DECrepeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 7

Troubleshooting (Cont)

Indication

Suggested Corrective Action

•

Port B is short circuited or
not connected

Run self-test with the loopback connector
installed.

Fiber optic data path is open

For local repeaters:
Swap the transceiver cable inputs to see if the
indication moves to port A. This could indicate
inactivity on that segment or a problem with the
transceiver and/or cable.

For remote repeaters:
Install the loopback connector on port B and press
the TEST switch. If the repeater passes self-test,
check the fiber optic cable or the other repeater
for failure.
The SEG A LED lights

Install the loopback connector on port A and press
the TEST switch. This will reset the LED and
verify that the repeater is operating.

For local repeaters:
Swap transceiver cable inputs to see if the indication moves to port B. If so, suspect a problem
outside the repeater such as a transceiver, transceiver cable, or coaxial segment.

For remote repeaters:
Check the setting of the optical idle switches.
The SEG B LED lights

Install the loopback connector on port B and press
the TEST switch. This will reset the LED and
verify that the repeater is operating.

For local repeaters:
Swap transceiver cable inputs to see if the indication moves to port A. If so, suspect a problem
outside the repeater such as a transceiver, transceiver cable, or coaxial segment.

For remote repeaters:
Check the setting of the optical idle switches.

DRPT200-26

DECrepeater200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 7

Troubleshooting (Cont)

)
/

Indication

Suggested Corrective Action

The + 12V LED is OFF

Verify that the power cord is connected.
Check the AOK LED. If AOK is OFF, suspect
the power supply. If AOK is ON, the +12V LED
may be faulty.

The -12V LED is OFF

Verify that the power cord is connected.

The TEST LED remains ON

Replace the repeater.

The FLT LED is ON

Replace the repeater.

The +5V LED is OFF

Check the + 12V and -12V LEOs. If they are
ON, suspect the +5V LED. If they are OFF,
suspect the power supply.
Verify that the power cord is connected.

)
;

The EXT, TEST, and FLT LEOs
remain ON

Install a loopback connector and press the TEST
switch. If the self-test fails, replace the repeater.

The AOK/BOK LEOs do not light

Replace the repeater.

The DEVICE OK LED on port B PCI
module remains OFF

Replace the port B module.

The LINK OK LED on port B PCI
module remains OFF

Check the fiber optic link between remote
repeaters.

"-I
/

DRPT200-27

DECrepeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 14 shows the FRUs for the DECrepeater 200. The FRUs and their part numbers are listed below.
FRU

Part Number

Logic Module
Power Supply
Fan Assembly
Port Connector Interface (PCI) Module (Local)
Port Connector Interface (PCI) Module (Remote)

54-18363-01
30-27484-01
70-23165-01
54-18359-01
54-1837.7-01

WARNING
The procedures described should be performed by
qualified service personnel only. DO NOT attempt to
remove any FRUs while the DECrepeater 200 is connected to a power source.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage electrical components.
Use a grounded wrists trap (29-11762-00) and a
grounded work surface when accessing any internal
components of the DECrepeater 200.

DRPT200-28

DEC repeater 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

\I
I

)

MKV89-0128

Figure 14

"
/

FRU Removal and Replacement

DRPT200-29

DEC router 200 INSTALLATION
DECrouter 200 ASYNCHRONOUS ROUTER
General Description
The DEC router 200 is a high-performance, low-cost asynchronous router (see Figure 1) for use on
Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 local area networks.

1 1 - . . - 1 - - - - NAMEPLATE

PANEL

4..~--- CONTROLI INDICATOR
PANEL

STATUS LEDs
(D1-D4)

SOFTWARE RESET
SWITCH (S1)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
POWER CORD
RECEPTACLE
LKG-0326

Figure 1 DECrouter 200 Asynchronous Router
DECrouter 200 Versions
The router is available in two versions (DSRVC-AA and DSRVC-AB). Each version has a different input
voltage.
Model

Input Voltage

DSRVC-AA
DSRVC-AB

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

DR200-1

DECrouter 200 INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation

Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECrouter 200 asynchronous router:

•

DECrouter 200 Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide

•

DECrouter 200 Technical Manual

•

DECrouter 200 Management Guide

•

DECrouter 200 Identification Card

•

DECrouter 200 Software Installation Guide (VMS/MicroVMSj

•

DECrouter 200 ULTRIX-32/32m Installation Guide

•

DECrouter 200 RSX-JJ M-Plus Installation Guide

Hardware Components

The DECrouter 200 package consists of:
•

DEC router 200 hardware unit - DSRVC-AA or DSR VC-AB

•

Country kit - Correct power cord and hardware installation/owner's guide

•

Software - DECrouter 200 software and software installation guide

Terminal cables for the DECrouter 200 are ordered separately.
Software Components

The basic software that is required for the installation and operation of the DECrouter 200 includes:
•

DECrouter 200 distribution software (installed on each DECrouter 200 load host)

•

DECnet Phase IV software (installed on each DECrouter 200 load host - not required for
ULTRIX systems)

Equipment Placement

The router can be placed in various locations, including offices and computer rooms, as long as the
environmental requirements are met.
Environmental Requirements

Temperature
Relative Humidity

5° to 50°C (41 ° to 122°F)
10% to 95% (noncondensing)

Physical Description

Length
Width
Height
Weight

31.2 cm (12.3 in)
49.3 cm (19.4 in)
11.7 cm (4.6 in)
5.9 kg (13.0 Ib)

DR200-2

DEC router 200 INSTALLATION

Power Requirements
The operating range of the DSRVC system is contained in the following table.

Table I

DSRVC Power Requirements

Version

Nominal
Voltage
Required

, Voltage
Range

Current

Frequency

-AA

120 Vac

100 - 200

1.0

47-63 Hz

-AB

240 Vac

220 - 240

0.5

47-63 Hz

Installation Flow Diagram

GO TO MAINTENANCE AIDS
SECTION TABLE 5

DETERMINE WHICH ROUTER CONNECTOR
TO USE FOR EACH DEVICE (Jl TO JB)
• MARK AND ATTACH TWO LABELS TO EACH
DEVICE CABLE. ONE ON EACH END
• ATTACH CABLES TO APPROPRIATE DEVICES
• INFORM THE ROUTER MANAGER THAT THE
INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE

Figure 2 DECrouter 200 Installation Flow Diagram

DR200-3

DECrouter 200 INSTALLATION

FOR 100/120VOPERATION:
IF "240V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT" 120V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

II)

/_b~
------------------------------FOR 220/240 V OPERATION:
IF "120V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "240V" IS

VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

mOl

LKG-0336

Figure 3 DECrouter 200 Voltage Selection

DR200-4

u...--I-___ NAMEPLATE
PANEL

....!!I!!ti--_ _ _ CONTROL / INDICATOR

PANEL

STATUS LEOs
(01-04)

)

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR

SOFTWARE RESET
SWITCH (Sl)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
POWERCORO
RECEPTACL/=

Figure 4 DECrouter 200 Front and Rear Panel

DR200_S

DECrouter 200 CABLING

Cabling

Ensure that the transceiver cables, the device cables, and the router power cable do not exceed the
maximum lengths as described in Table 2 and in the Basic Configuration Rules below.
Table 2

Maximum Cable Lengths

From

Maximum Length

Cable Type

Transceiver

Router

50 m (164 ft)
See Rules 2 and 3

BNE3x-xx
transceiver cable

Transceiver

Router

12.5 m (41 ft)
See Rules 2 and 3

BNE4x-xx office
transceiver cable

Device

Router

See Rule 4

Depends on
specific device

Wall Outlet

Router

1.8 m (6 ft)

Router power
cable (included
in DSRVC-xx
country kit)

Basic Configuration Rules

When an H4005 transceiver is used to provide the connection point for the transceiver cable, the
transceiver cable must be an IEEE 802.3 compliant transceiver cable (BNE3H/L/M or BNE4C/D).

Maximum length for the transceiver cable cannot exceed 50 m (164 ft). This maximum length may
be reduced due to the internal cabling equivalency of a device or due to the use of office transceiver
cable.
a.

Cabling equivalency is a measure of the internal timing delay of a device (expressed in meters of
transceiver cable.) This cabling equivalency must be subtracted from the 50 M (164 ft)
maximum.

Office transceiver cable (BNE4x-xx), due to its smaller diameter, has a signal loss that is four
times that of the (BNE3x-xx) transceiver cable. Therefore, if office transceiver cable is used,
the maximum transceiver cable distance must be divided by 4. This means the maximum office
transceiver cable length allowed is 12.5 m (41 ft).
If the configuration includes a device, and the device has an internal cabling equivalency, this
should be subtracted from the 50 m (164 ft) maximum before dividing by 4.

When connecting the router to a configuration that includes a DELNI, allow 5 m (16 ft) cabling
equivalency loss for the DELNI.

Maximum allowable lengths for device cables should not exceed guidelines set by RS-232-C
(EIA232) specifications.

. DR200-6

DEC router 200 CABLING

Connecting Port Devices to the DECrouter 200
Only one device cable for each port device needs to be connected to the router (see Figure 5).

DEC router 200

MKV87-1156

Figure 5

Table 3

Connecting Port Devices

Device Cables

Cable

Type Description

For Connecting

BC22D

Null modem cable

Nodes that are not using modem control signals
for operation.

BC22R*

Null modem cable

Nodes that are using modem control signals for
operation.

BC22E or
BC22F

Modem cable

Dial-in or dial-out modems.

*Recommended for devices that use full modem control.

DR200-7

DECrouter 200 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics
The OECrouter 200 provides the following maintenance features.

•

Hardware self-test

•

Loopback tests

•

Up-line crash dumps

The four status LEOs, located on the router's control/indicator panel, indicate the status of the router and
are also used for diagnosing router problems. Compare the state of the status LEOs on the router with
those shown in Table 5, then go to the section that follows.
NOTE
All four LEDs illuminate for 1 second when the
power is first applied to the router. After powering
up the router, allow up to 2 minutes to elapse before
determining the state of the status LEDs.

Table 4

Problem Analysis Tools

Tool

Problems

Components Tested

Hardware
self-test

Suspected problems in hardware.

All hardware components including
Ethernet connections.

Circuit-level
loopback test

The OECrouter and a node on the
same Ethernet are not communicating
properly.

Ethernet cable and components. Checks
physical links between components.

The OECrouter and an adjacent node
on one of the asynchronous circuits
are not communicating properly.

Asynchronous circuits. Checks physical
links between hardware components.

Node-level
loopback test

Higher-level problems and logical link
problems between two nonadjacent
nodes or between two adjacent nodes
on Ethernet.

Logical link capabiliti4s (network
software).

Up-line crash
dump

System crashes.

None

DR200-8

DECrouter 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 5

Status Indicator LEDs

LED
Name

LED
Definition

State

Indications

Power ON/OFF

The router's dc voltages are
correct.

OFF

The router's dc voltages are not
correct.

Self-test passed.

OFF

Fatal error or test-in-progress.

Blinking

Nonfatal error.

Software successfully loaded.

OFF

Down-line load in progress.

Blinking

Multiple load failure.

Indicates activity on
the network.

Diagnostic

Software

Network
activity

DEC router 200 Fault Conditions
Dl LED OFF - Power is not reaching the DECrouter 200.
•

Ensure that the voltage select switch is set to the correct voltage.

•

Secure the power cable at the router and at the wall outlet.

•

Check the wall outlet using another appliance or light, or plug the router power cord into
another outlet. If no power is available, check the wall outlet's circuit breaker.

•

Determine if the router circuit breaker has tripped. If it has, reset the circuit breaker. If the
circuit breaker trips more than once, replace the router.

•

Replace a defective power cord with a new cord.

D2 LED OFF - A hardware error has occurred that makes the DECrouter 200 nonoperational. There is
no corrective procedure for this problem.

DR200-9

DECrouter 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

D2 LED Blinking - If the D2 LED is blinking after power-up, it indicates that the router has a nonfatal
problem during self-test. To isolate the problem, connect a console terminal to port (J1) of the router. The
primary problem indicator in this case is the error message that appears on the console terminal.

To isolate and diagnose the problem, perform the following:
•

Connect a console terminal to Port 1 (11) of the router, then power up the terminal.

•

Configure the terminal to operate at a speed of 9600 bits/s with a character size of 8 bits with
no parity (refer to the specific terminal user's guide for help in setting up the terminal
parameters).

•

Unplug the router power cord at the wall outlet, then reinsert it.

•

Read the error message that appears on the terminal display (if no message appears on the
terminal display, refer to the No Message~ on Console Terminal section that follows).

The following sections list the error messages that occur in conjunction with the D2 LED blinking on your
display.

Error Messages 922 and 923
Local -922- port hardware error on port n
Local -923- port n has been disabled
These messages indicate a port hardware error. There is no corrective procedure for this problem.

Error Message 932
Local -932- hardware revision level checksum error
The router's nonvolatile memory is faulty. There is no corrective procedure for this problem.

Error Messages 941, 942, and 950
Local -941- transceiver loopback error
Local -942- image load not attempted
Local -950- troubleshooting procedures should be followed
There is a fault in the transceiver cabling between the router and the coaxial cable.
1.

Check the transceiver cable that runs from the router to the transceiver, to the DELNI, or to
the Etherjack. Be sure the connection is secure at both ends. Check the cable for any signs of
damage. If the cable appears damaged, replace it.

If the above action does not correct the problem:

Disconnect the transceiver cable from the router.

Plug the Ethernet turnaround connector into the Ethernet connector on the router.

Initialize the router by pressing <CTRL/P> on the console terminal, or by unplugging and
then reinserting the router's power cord.

DR200-10

DEC router 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
d.

Wait 20 seconds for the diagnostic test to complete, then observe the status of the D2
LED:
(1)

If the D2 LED continues to blink and the error messages reappear after the
self-test (within 10 or 15 seconds), the router is faulty and must be replaced.

(2)

If the D2 LED glows steadily, proceed to the next step to isolate and determine
, the faulty unit.

NOTE
When using the Ethernet loop back connector to
troubleshoot the DECrouter 200, note that if the
results cause the D2 LED to glow steadily, the router attempts to down-line load the router image.
Since the router is disconnected from the network,
the down-line load fails and the router responds by
causing the D3 LED to blink and issues messages
902 and 912 to the console terminal.
e.

Unplug the Ethernet turnaround connector from the Ethernet connector on the router.

Reconnect the transceiver cable to the Ethernet connector on the router.

Disconnect the other end of the transceiver cable from the DELNI, from the Etherjack, or
from the transceiver on the Ethernet coaxial cable.

Plug the Ethernet turnaround connector into the transceiver cable.

Initialize the router by pressing <CTRL/P> on the console terminal, or by unplugging and
then reinserting the router's power cord.
(1)

If the D2 LED continues to blink, the transceiver cable is faulty and must be
replaced.

(2)

If the D2 LED glows steadily, the faulty unit is the device the transceiver cable
was connected to (the DELNI, the Etherjack extension, or the transceiver).

No Messages on Console Terminal
•

The port to which the console terminal is physically connected is not defined as the console port.

•

The console terminal is faulty.

•

The internal characteristics for the console terminal are not set up correctly.

DR200-11

DECrouter 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
D3 LED Blinking - If the 03 LED is blinking after power-up, it indicates the router has a down-line
loading problem.
To isolate and diagnose the problem, perform the following:
•

Connect a console terminal to Port 1 (11) of the router, then power up the terminal.

•

Configure the terminal to operate at a speed of 9600 bits/s with a character size of 8 bits with
no parity (refer to the· specific terminal user's guide for help in setting up the terminal
parameters).

•

Press <CTRL/P> on the console terminal keyboard. (Pressing <CTRL/P> restarts the router
self-test and starts the down-line loading of the router image from a load host.)

•

Read the message that appears on the terminal display.
NOTE
If the down-line load succeeds, the terminal displays
a message indicating the load is complete, followed
by a series of coded alphabetic characters. This is
normal. The characters represent DDCMP protocol
messages from Port 1 of the DECrouter 200.

Down-Line Load Starts and Then Fails
The following messages appear on the console terminal at various intervals:
Local -902- waiting for image to load
Local -903- loading from host host-address
Local -912- load failure, timeout
The host system (address in error message) fails to complete the down-line load to the OECrouter 200.
Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal display and notify the router
manager.

Down-Line Load Does Not Start
The following messages appear on the console terminal at various intervals:
Local -902- waiting for image to load
Local -912- load failure, timeout
The load host system is not responding to the router's down-line load request within the allotted timeout
period.
Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal display and notify the router
manager.

OR200-12

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION
DECroutei' 250 SYNCHRONOUS/ASYNCHRONOUS ROUTER
General Description
The DECrouter 250 is an Ethernet communications routing server. It can connect any combination of up to
eight DECnet devices to each other, to the local area network (LAN), and to larger DECnet networks. The
DECrouter 250 has ten ports: one Ethernet port, one console port, two 50-pin device ports, and six 25-pin
(EIA-232-D) device ports. All eight device ports can be for either synchronous or asynchronous devices that
use DEC net Phase III, Phase IV, or Phase V protocols with Digital Data Communications Message Protocol
(DDCMP). The DECrouter 250 supports the following standards:
•
•
•
•
•

EIA-232-D/Y.24/Y.28
RS-449, RS-423-A/Y.1O
RS-449, RS-422-A/Y.I0
Y.35
Y.36

DECrouter 250 Versions
The DECrouter 250 is available in two versions with each having a different input voltage. The versions and
input voltages are listed below.
Model

Input Voltage

DSRVR-AA
DSRVR-AB
DSRVR-A3 (see NOTE)

100-120 Vac
220-240 Vac
220-240 Vac

NOTE
This is a field service spare that is shipped without a
country kit or manuals. It is set to 240 Vac but can
be reset to 120 Vac.
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documentation for more information on the DEC router 250 synchronous/asynchronous router.

•
•

DECrouter 250 Hardware Installation Manual

EK-A0460-IN

DECrouter 250 VMS Software Installation Guide

AA-PAX6A-TE

•

DECrouter 250 ULTRIX Software Installation Guide

AA-PAX8A-TE

•

DECrouter 250 MS-DOS Software Installation Guide

AA-PAX7 A-TE

•

DECrouter 250 Management Guide Volume I

AA-PAX4A-TE

•

DECrouter 250 ~Management Guide Volume II

AA-PAX5A-TE

•

DECrouter 250 Maintenance Card

AV-PAX9A-TE

DR250-1

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION

fo---------......,.
NAMEPLATE PANEL

50-PIN PORT
DEVICE
CONNECTORS
(1-2)

DUMP
SWITCH (S1)

24-PIN PORT
DEVICE
CONNECTORS

(3-8)

VOLTAGE
SELECT
SWITCH
STANDARD
LED
STANDARD
ETHERNET
CONNECTOR
ThlnWlre
ETHERNET
CONNECTOR
CONSOLE PORT
CONNECTOR
STANDARDfThinWire
SELECTOR SWITCH
POWER CORD
RECEPTACLE
LKG-3836-eOI

Figure 1 DECrouter 250 Synchronous/Asynchronous Router

DR250-2

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION
Hardware Components
The DECrouter 250 package consists of:
•
•
•

DECrouter 250 hardware unit - DSRVR-AA or DSRVR-AB
Country Kit - Powef cord 'and hardware installation manual
Software - DECrouter software and installation manual

Software Components
The following software is required for the DECserver 250 installation and operation.
•

DECrouter 250 distribution software (installed on each load host)

•

DECnet Phase IV software (i"~talled on each load host)

Equipment Placement
The DECrouter 250 can be placed in various locations, including offices and computer rooms, as long as the
environmental requirements are met.
Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Relative Humidity

S° to 50°C (41° to 122°F)
10% to 90% (noncondensing)

Physical Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight

49.3 em (19.4 in.)
16.1 em (6.3 in.)
31.2 em (12.3 in.)
8.1 kg (17.1 lbs)

Power Requirements
Model Version

Input Voltage

DSRVR-AA
DSRVR-AB

100-120 Vac
220-240 Vac

DR2S0-3

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

SECURE DeCrouter 250
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK,
SYSTEM, OR SERVER

VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE MANAGER
THAT THE OECrouter 250
INSTALLATION SITE
MEETS SITE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS

UNPACK, INSPECT. AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE DECrouter 250
BOX

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY TH E CONTENTS
OF THE DECrouter 250
ACCESSORIES BOX

Figure 2 DECrouter 250 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DR250-4

DECrouter 2S0 INSTALLATION

FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THE
WALL-MOUNTING
HARDWARE KIT

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 3)

REMOVE THE
PLASTIC ENCLOSURE

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 3)

FASTEN THE UNIT
TO THE RACK

Figure 2 DECrouter 250 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DR250-5

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION

SELECT ThlnWire
ETHERNET (FIGURE 4)

INSTALL CONNECTORS
AND BOTH
TERMINATORS
(FIGURE 5)

CONNECT A CONSOLE
TERMINAL
(FIGURES 20-22)

CONFIGURE THE
CONSOLE TERMINAL
FOR 9600 BAUD.
8 BITS. NO PARITY

SET VOLTAGE
SELECTION SWITCH
TO MATCH POWER
CORD VOLTAGE
(SEE FIGURE 6)

Figure 2

DECrouter 250 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DR250-6

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION

CONNECT THE POWER
COR D TO THE ROUTER

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING IN
THE MAINTENANCE
AIDS SECTION

BASIC HARDWARE
INSTALLATION
COMPLETE

Figure 2 DECrouter 250 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DR250-7

DECrooter 250 INSTALLATION

MKV89-0447

Figure 3 Rack Mounting the DEC router 250

DR250-8

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION

FOR ThlnWlre OPERATION:
~
PRESS n-tE SELECTOR SWTCH
(THE ThlnWlre ETHERNET LED--q;
WILL LIGHT)
,

Figure 4 Selecting ThinWire Ethernet

DR250-9

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION

INSERTING lhlnWlre
T-CONNECTOR

Cb
50-OHM
TERMINATORS

LOCKING lhlnWlre
T-CONNECTOR

Figure 5

Connecting the ThinWire T-Connector and Terminators

DR250-10

DECrouter 250 INSTALLATION

FOR 100/120V OPERATI~:

SUDE lHE SWITCH TO THE LEFT
UNllL -120'1' IS VISIBLE

FOR 200/240V OPERATION:
SUDE lHE SWITCH TO THE RIGHT
UNTIL -240'1' IS VISIBLE

~iiiiiiir=

•

LJ(Q- 312t-11A

Figure 6

DEC router 250 Voltage Selection

DR250-11

DECrouter 250 CABLING
Cabling
The DECrouter 250 can connect to either standard Ethernet or to ThinWire Ethernet. To select ThinWire
Ethernet, press the selector switch (Figure 7) and then apply power to the router. The ThinWire Ethernet
LED lights when the router is powered up.
To select standard Ethernet, release the selector switch and then apply power to the router. The standard
Ethernet LED lights.
CAUTION
Do not press the selector switch when the router is
running. Doing so will cause the router to drop links.

FOR ThlnWlre OPERAnON:
PRESS THE SELECTOR SWITCH.
(THE ThinWire ETHERNET LED
WILL LIGHT).

FOR STANDARD OPERATION:
RELEASE THE SELECTOR
SWITCH.
(THE STANDARD ETHERNET LED
WILL LIGHT).

Figure 7

00
• ~ 00 00 0b0Obo~.

Selecting Standard or Thin Wire Ethernet

DR250-12

DECrouter 150 CABLING
Coaaecting to Standard Ethernet - Proceed as follows:
1.

Power down the router.

Unlock the slide latch on the router's standard Ethernet connector by pushing it in the direction
shown in Figure 8.

ETHERNET
UNLOCK

MKV89-0446

Figure 8

Unlocking the Slide Latch

Connect the transceiver cable (Figure 9).

Figure 9

Connecting the Transceiver Cable

DR250-13

DECrouter 250 CABLING
4.

Lock the slide latch by pushing it in the direction shown in Figure 10.

LOCK

Figure 10

Locking the Slide Latch

Power up the router.

Verify that the standard/ThinWire Ethernet selector switch is in the OUT position and the
standard Ethernet LED is ON.

DR250-14

DECrouter 250 CABLING
Connecting to ThinWire Ethernet - Proceed as follows:
1.

Insert the T-connector into the BNC connector (Figure 11) at the rear of the router.

Tum the barrel of the connector clockwise to lock it.

Verify that the standard/ThinWire Ethernet selector switch is in the IN position and the
ThinWire Ethernet LED is ON.

INSERTING ThlnWlre
T-CONNECTOR

50-OHM
TERMINATOR

LOCKING ThlnWlre
T-CONNECTOR

Figure 11

Connecting to ThinWire Ethernet

DR250-15

DECrouter 250 CABLING
Coonecting to the Device Ports
There are two device ports that use 50-pin D-connectors (ports 1 and 2) and six device ports that use 25-pin
D-connectors (ports 3 through 8). This section describes how to connect devices to either the 25-pin or 50-pin
D-connector.
Coone~ting to a 25-Pin Device Port - Proceed as follows:

Connect the 25-pin female D-connector of the cable to the 25-pin male D-connector on the device
port (Figure 12).

Figure 12 Connecting to the 25-Pin D-Connector

DR250-16

DECrouter 250 CABLING
2.

Connect the 25-pin male connector of the cable to the 25-pin female connector on the device
(Figure 13).

1. ATTACH CABLE

~NSCREWS
Figure 13

Connecting the 25-Pin Connector to the Device

DR250-17

DECrouter 250 CABLING
CAUTION
The V24/RS-232-C adapter (12-27591-01) must be
fitted between the device cable and the router
(Figures 14 and 15) if the modem or modem eliminator has any of the following:
• A DCE-sourced signal on pin 18
• Signal quality implemented on pin 21
• Data Signal Rate Selector (DCE) on pin 23
Failure to comply with this requirement could result
in damage to the interface module and modem, or
modem eliminator. If you are not sure what signals
the modem or eliminator provides, install the adapter.

1. INSERT THE V24/RS-232-C ADAPTER

Figure 14

Connecting the V24/RS-232-C Adapter to the 25-Pin D-Connector

DR250-18

DECrouter 150 CABLING

Figure 15 Connecting the Cable to the V24/RS-232-C Adapter

DR250-19

DECrouter 250 CABLING
Connecting to a SO-Pin Device Port - Proceed as follows:
1.

Connect the 50-pin female D-connector of the adapter cable to a 50-pin male D-connector on the
router (Figure 16).

1. INSERT THE 50-PIN D-CONNECTOR

2. TIGHTEN 'THE SCREWS

Figure 16

Connecting to the 50-Pin D-Connector

DR250-20

DECrouter lSO CABLING
2.

Connect the adapter cable to an extension cable (Figure 17).

EXTENSION CABLE
LKG-31 . . . .A

Figure 17 Connecting an Adapter Cable to an Extension Cable

Connect the extension cable to the device (Figure 18).

Figure 18

Connecting the Extension Cable to the Device

DR250-21

DEC router 250 CABLING
CAUTION
The V24/RS-232-C adapter (12-27591-01) must be
fitted between the device cable and the router (Figure
19) if the modem or modem eliminator has any of the
following:
• A DCE-sourced signal on pin 18
• Signal quality implemented on pin 21
• Data Signal Rate Selector (DCE) on pin 23
Failure to comply with this requirement could result
in damage to the interface module and modem, or
modem eliminator. If you are not sure what signals
the modem or eliminator provides, install the adapter.

V24/RS-232-C ADAPlER
(12-27591-01)

EXTENSION CABLE
LKo-31eo-eII"

Figure 19 Connecting an Adapter Cable, V24/RS-232-C Adapter, and Extension Cable

DR250-22

DECrouter 250 CABLING
Connecting a Terminal to the Console Port Connector
Proceed as follows:
1.

Insert the modified modular plug (MMP) on the cable into the female modified modular jack
(MMJ) connector of the console port (Figure 20).

INSERTING MMP CONNECTOR

Figure 20 Connecting to the Console Port Connector

DR250-23

DECrouter 250 CABLING
2.

Insert the MMP on the cable into the female MMJ connector on the terminal (Figure 21). If the
terminal has a 25-pin male, D-connector, use an H8571-A adapter as shown in Figure 22.

INSERTING MMP CONNECTOR

Figure 21

Connecting to the Terminal

DR250-24

DECrouter 250 CABLING

1. INSERT THE H8571-A ADAPlER

3. INSERT THE MMP

~.A

Figure 22

Connecting to the Terminal with a 25-Pin D-Connector

DR250-25

DECrooter ZSO CABLING
Configurations
There are many possible LAN configurations for the DECrouter 250. Some of the possible configurations
are shown in Figures 23 through 27.
Table 1 lists the LAN configurations to which the DECrouter 250 can be connected. This table includes the
hardware components needed, the number of nodes that can be configured, and any restrictions on the
position of the nodes.

ETHERNET

45-M MAXIMUM

PC-2

VAX 8600

PC-1
PERSONAL COMPUTERS
AND LARGER PROCESSOR
LK~832-801

Figure 23

DECrouter 250 Connected to a Standard Ethernet Through a DELNI

DR250-26

DECrouter 250 CABLING

lhlnWire EniERNET

DESTA

PERSONAL.
COMPUTER

PERSONAL

COMPUTER

PC-3

PC-1
PC-2
\

PERSONAL
COMPUlERS

Figure 24 DECrouter 250 Connected to ThinWire Ethernet Through a DESTA

DR2S0-27

DECrouter 250 CABLING

BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE (SINGLE CABLE)
4 - - - DROP

CABLE

4 - - - TRANSCEIVER CABLE

4O-M MAXIMUM

PC-1

PC-2

VAX 8600

VAX 8800

PERSONAL COMPUTERS
AND LARGER PROCESSORS

Figure 25

DECrouter 250 Connected to a Broadband Ethernet

DR250-28

DECrouter 250 CABLING

ElliERNET

DECrouter 250

PERSONAL
COMPUTER
DlRECllY

CONNECTED

WITH
DIAL-UP
CONNEC110N

PERSONAL
COMPUTER
DIRECllY

CONNECTED
REMOTE
PERSONAL
COMPUTER

Figure 26

REMon:
PERSONAL
COMPUTER

DECrouter 250 with Modem Connections

DR250-29

DECrouter 250 CABLING

DECnet-

VAX

DECnet-

DECnetRSX

DOS

PC-1

DECnet-

DOS
LKG--3835-901

Figure 27

DECrouter 250 as a Standalone LAN Router

DR250-30

DECrouter 150 CABLING
Table 1 LAN Configurations Applicable to the DECrouter 250
Components

Size Limit

Distance Restriction

Direct
connect to
Ethernet

H4005 transceiver

N/A

Transceiver cable
connecting DEC router
to Ethernet must be
from 5 to 50 meters
in length

DELNI
standalone
(single-tier)

DELNI (directly
connected)

8 nodes

DECrouter connected
to DELNI must be
within 50 m (147.6 ft)
of the DELNI

DELNI
standalone
(two-tier)

DELNI (directly
connected)

64 nodes

DECrouter connected
to DELNI must be
within 50 m (147.6 ft)
of the DELNI

Connected
DELNI

DELNI plus H4005
transceiver for
connecting DELNI
to Ethernet

DECrouter
and seven
other nodes
directly
connected
to DELNI

DECrouter must be
within 40 m (131.2 ft)
of the Ethernet cable

DECOM, drop cable,
transceiver cable

N/A

Drop cable: 25 meter
maximum

Broadcast
BASEBAND

BROADBAND
Direct
connect to
Ethernet

Transceiver cable: 5 to 40
meters
Connected
DELNI

DELNI, DECOM, and
cables for DELNI
connection to
Ethernet

DEC router
and seven
other nodes
directly
connected
to DELNI

Maximum cable length
from DECrouter to
DECOM is 35 meters

DESTA

30 nodes
directly
connected
to ThinWire

50 m (147.6 ft)
between DECrouter
and DESTA

ThinWire
Work-area
configuration

DR250-31

DECrouter 150 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
The seven-segment display, located at the rear of the router, indicates the status of the router and helps
diagnose router problems (Figure 28). The Diagnostic Dot of the display also provides diagnostic information
and, if a terminal is connected to the console port connector, additional information can be obtained through
error messages.
Diagnosing Router Problems
Compare the state of the seven-segment display and the Diagnostic Dot with Table 2, and refer to the
troubleshooting table for corrective action.

DIAGNOSllC
DOT

Figure 28 The Seven-Segment Display

DR250-32

DECrouter 250 DIAGNOSTICS
Table 2

DECrouter 250 Seven-Segment Display Codes

Display

System Status

Bootstrap test 'executing

RAM subsystem test executing

Interrupt subsystem test executing

Timer test executing

ROM subsystem test executing

Ethernet subsystem test executing in the internal loopback mode

Ethernet subsystem externalloopback test executing

Asynchronous subsystem test executing in the internal loopback mode

Reserved

System exerciser test executing

Requesting load

Requesting load backoff

Loading
Requesting a dump

Dumping

Rotating
Figure 8
Pattern *

Server software is executing

•

Diagnostic Dot** (Status as follows)
ON
OFF
BLINKING

No fatal errors
Fatal errors or self-test in progress
Nonfatal error detected

* The rotating figure 8 pattern indicates normal operation.
** The Diagnostic Dot is part of the seven-segment display.

DR250-33

DEC router 250 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting

Table 3

DECrouter 250 Troubleshooting Table

Symptom

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

Seven-segment
display is OFF

No power to the
the DECrouter 250

Ensure that the voltage select switch is set to the
correct voltage for your country.
Secure the power cord at the router and at the
wall outlet.
Check the wall outlet for power.
Ensure that the router circuit breaker has not
tripped. If it has tripped, disconnect the power
and reset the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker trips again, replace the DECrouter 250 unit.
Check the power cord by substituting another
one. Replace the cord if it is found to be
defective.

The DECrouter 250
is defective

Replace the DECrouter 250 unit.

Diagnostic Dot
off/sevensegment display
flashing

Fatal error

Replace the DEC router 250 unit.

Diagnostic Dot
blinking

Nonfatal error

Record the error message on the console terminal
and refer to the Error Messages section for
instructions on correcting the problem.

Seven-segment
display has a "3"

Down-line loading
problem

Record the error message on the console terminal
and refer to the Error Messages section for
instructions on correcting the problem.

DR250-34

DEC router 250 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Error Messages
Error Message 1003, 1005, and 1007
Corrective Action - Replace the DECrouter 250 unit.
Error Message 1004
Corrective Action - Use the boot configuration program (BCP) to configure a suitable port (refer to
Appendix E of the DECrouter 250 Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide for information on using
BCP).
Error Message Sequences
Init -1101- Attempting to locate load host, [format]
Init -1100- Requesting load from host xx-xx-xx-xx-xx [format]
Init -1102- Load failure, timeout
Corrective Action - Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal and notify
the network manager.
Init -1101- Attempting to locate load host, [1S08802]
Init -1102- Attempting to locate load host, [ETHERNET]
Init -1103- Router will retry operation in x seconds
Corrective Action - Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal and notify
the network manager.

DR250-35

DECSA INSTALLATION

DECSA COMMUNICATIONS SERVER
General Description
The DECSA communications server is an Ethernet-based communication subsystem for local area networks. The four basic versions of the communications server are:
•

DECSA-CA

Terminal server - supports up to 16 lines for VT100-like asynchronous
terminals (see note).

•

DECSA-DA

Terminal server - supports up to 32 lines for VT100-like asynchronous
terminals (see note).

•

DECSA-EA

DECnet router/X.25 gateway - supports up to 8 lines for interconnection
between DECnet and X.25 networks.

•

DECSA-FA

DECnet/SNA gateway - supports up to 2 lines for interconnection between
DECnet networks as well as between DECnet and SNA networks.

NOTE
The terminal server configurations provide the following features.
Asynchronous terminal support
Modem control
Auto baud detection
Split-speed terminal operation (up to 19.2K
bits/s full-duplex)
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECSA communications server.

•

Ethernet Communications Server Operations
and Maintenance Guide

EK-DECSA-OP

•

Ethernet Communications Server Site
Preparation and Planning Guide

EK-DECSA-SP

•

Ethernet Communications Server
Installation Guide

EK-DECSA-IN

•

Ethernet Communications Server
Technical Description

EK-DECSA-TD

•

DECSA Print Set

MP01385

•

DECSA Microfiche

EP-DECSA-OP

DECSA Communications Server Hardware Components
The following hardware components make up the DECSA communications server.
•
•
•

PDP-ll/24 processor
Memory module (512K bytes or 1M byte)
DEUNA Ethernet to UNIBUS adaptor
DECSA-l

DECSAINSTALLATION
•
•
•
•

Console/bootstrap/terminator (CBT)
Protocol assist modules (PAM) set
Line cards (see the following table)
H7200 and H7211 power supply modules

The following table describes the line cards and data types supported by the different versions of the
DECSA communications server.
Table 1 Line-Card Description
DECSA
Version

Line Card
Supported

Module
Number

Recommended
Cable

Module
Description

DECSA-CA
DECSA-DA

DCSAX-LC

M3102

BC22D
BC22E

Two line asynchronous up to
19.2K bits/s each full-duplex,
RS-232-C/CCITT V.24.

DECSA-EA
DECSA-FA

DCSAX-LA

M3100

BC17C
BC17D

One line synchronous up to
19.2K bits/s full- or half-duplex,
RS-232-C/CCITT V.24.

DECSA-EA
DECSA-FA

DCSAX-LB

M3101

BC17E

One line synchronous up to
SOaK bits/s full- or half-duplex,
CCITT V.3S.

NOTE
The following cables are recommended for use with
RS-232-C/V.24 configurations.
•
•
•
•

BC22D - Asynchronous null modem cable
BC22E - Asynchronous modem extension
cable
BC17D - Synchronous null modem cable
BC17C - Synchronous modem extension cable

The BC17E synchronous modem cable is recommended for use with V.35 configurations.

DECSA Communications Server Software Components
The following software components are included with any DECSA configuration.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

RSX-llS operating system
NS: QIO$ interface (logical link facility)
NX: QIO$ interface (direct line access facility)
System level interface
Initialization task
PAM device driver
DEUNA device driver
Network management
Down-line load/up-line dump across the Ethernet

DECSA-2

DECSA INSTALLATION

•
•

Remote console support (console carrier only)
Loadable diagnostic image (LDI)

The following table indicates which additional software is required for DECSA-EA and DECSA-FA
DECnet routers and/or gateways.
Table 2

Additional Software Requirements for DEC net Routers
Configura tion
DECSA-FA
DECSA-EA

Software Package
Looper / mirror
Line watcher
RSX extension package (XEP)
VAX X.25/X.29 extension package (XEP)
DECnet/SNA gateway software

X
X

System Placement
The DECSA system should be placed on a table that' supports at least 57.0 kg (125.7 lbs).
CAUTION
The DECSA system weighs approximately 50 kg
(110.25 lbs). Three people are required to lift or
move the system.
Power Requirements
The operating range of the DECSA system is contained in the following table.
Table 3
Nominal
Voltage
Required

DECSA Power Requirements
Voltage
Range

Current *

Frequency

120 Vac

90-128
(rms)

7.0

47-63 Hz

240 Vac

180-256
(rms)

3.5

47-63 Hz

*When operating at nominal voltage specified.

DECSA-3

DECSA INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram
The following flow diagram illustrates. the procedures for installing and testing the DECSA communications server.

-{:

PREINSTALLATION
CONSI DERATI ONS

SYSTEM
PLACEMENT
POWER
REQUIREMENTS
VENTILATION AND
ACCESS SPACE

UNPACKANDVERIFYALL
COMPONENTS RECEIVED

PLACE THE
COMMUNICATIONS
SERVER ON A WELL
SUPPORTED TABLE

REMOVE SLOT COVERS
FROM THOSE SLOTS THAT
ARE TO RECEIVE LINE
CARDS

INSTALL EACH LINE CARD
IN ITS DESIGNATED LlNECARD SLOT

MKV84-1328

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 5)

DECSA-4

DECSA INSTALLATION

CONNECT CABLES TO THE
LINE CARDS (ROUTE
CABLES THROUGH CABLE
CHANNELS ON THE
SIDE(S) OF THE DECSA
CABINET)

SET THE VOLTAGE
SWITCH TO MATCH THE
VOLTAGE SOURCE

INSERT THE KEY AND
TURN THE KEY SWITCH
TO THE "OFF" POSITION

SET THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER TO THE DOWN
(OFF) POSITION

CONNECT BOTH ENDS OF
THE POWER CORD

MKV84-1329

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 5)

DECSA-5

, DECSA INSTALLATION

SET THE CIRCUIT
BREAKERTOTHE UP(ON)
POSITION

TURN THE KEY
SWITCH TO THE
"ON" POSITION

OBSERVE FRONT
PANEL INDICATORS
DURING THE INITIAL
TEST (REFER TO
FIGURE 2)

OBSERVE FRONT
PANEL INDICATORS
AFTER INITIAL TEST
(REFER TO FIGURE 2)

PRESS THE START
BUTTON TO REPEAT
TH E INITIAL TEST

OBSERVE
INDICATORS
DURING TEST

OBSERVE
INDICATORS AFTER
TEST IS COM PLETED

PERFORM THE INITIAL
TEST (THIS TEST TAKES
APPROXIMATELY 12
SECONDS TO EXECUTE)

CHECK SEATING OF
MODULES

REPLACE MODULE
INDICATED AS BEING
DEFECTIVE

MKV84-1330

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 5)

DECSA-6

DECSA INSTALLATION

1. PRESS THE "TEST"BUTTON
SO THAT IT CATCHES INTHE
IN POSITION
2. PRESS AND RELEASE THE
START BUnON
3. OBSERVE FRONT PANEL
INDICATORS DURING THE
TEST (REFER TO FIGURE 2)

OBTAIN THE ETHERNET
ADDRESS (THE ADDRESS
IS DISPLAYED AFTER
APPROXIMATELY FOUR
MINUTES OF TESTING)

4. RECORD THE ETHERNET
ADDRESS (THE 12-DIGIT
HEX ADDRESS IS DISPLAYED
IN THREE CONSECUTIVE
PRESENTATIONS OF THE
FRONT PANEL DIGITAL
READOUT) REFER TO
FIGURE 3.

1.
2.

VERIFY THE ETHERNET
ADDRESS

{

PRESS AND RELEASE THE
START BUnON
COMPARE THE ADDRESS
(DISPLAYED IN THE DIGITAL
READOUT) TO THE
RECORDED ADDRESS

TURN THE KEY SWITCH
TO THE "OFF" POSITION

GIVE THE HOST SYSTEM
MANAGER THE ETHERNET
ADDRESS. ASK THE
MANAGER TO INSTALL
THE SERVER SOFTWARE
AND THE LD1.

MKV84-1331

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 5)

DECSA-7

DECSA INSTALLATION

CONNECT THE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE TO
THE D-CONNECTOR ON
THE REAR OF THE DECSA
CABINET

1. TURN THE KEY
PERFORM FINAL
ACCEPTANCE CHECK
(THIS TEST TAKES FROM
20 TO 40 MINUTES TO
EXECUTE)

SWITCH TO THE
"ON" POSITION
2. COMPARE THE
FRONT
INDICATIONS TO
THOSE IN TABLE 7.

CHECK
• BOARD SEATING
• TRANSCEIVER
CABLE CONNECTION
• REPLACE ANY MODULES
INDICATED AS
BEING DEFECTIVE

INITIATE CUSTOMER
ACCEPTANCE

MKV84-1332

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 5 of 5)

DECSA-8

DECSA INSTALLATION

Initial Test Indications
The following figure describes the expected initial test indications that are displayed by the front panel
indicators.

FlUlt
Line c..d Logic

•••

Coble

BLINKING

•

(3)
(1)

(2)

Indicator

Color

While Test
Is Running*

(4)

BLINKING

After Test
Completion

Off

Line Card Fault

Red

Blinks

Logic Fault

Red

Blinks

Ont
Off

Red

Blinks

Red

Blinking

,-,
o.

- Underscore On

Segment Display 2

Red

Blinking :::.

_ Underscore On

Segment Display 3

Red

Blinking

Segment Display 4

Red

:3.
Blinking :3.

Test

Red

Blinks

Off

Cable Fault
Segment Display

I:'

Start

Red

Power

Green

Run

Green

Off

Line Card Light(s)·

Red

Blinking rates: 3 per second for short version of Initial Test; 1 per second
for long version of Initial Test.
A

Located on the individual line cards.
Expected indication: Communications Server NOT connected to
Ethernet yet.
MKV84-1600

Figure 2 Expected Initial Test Front Panel Indications

DECSA-9

DECSAINSTALLATION

Ethernet Address Display
The following figure provides an example of an Ethernet address display.
1.

The first display (lasting ten seconds) provides the first four characters of the address.

The second display (lasting five seconds) provides the second four characters of the address.

The first display (lasting five seconds) provides the last four characters of the address.

D4
PARTIAL ADDRESS

1ST DISPLAY
INDICATED BY
ONE (1) P O I N T - - - - - - - '

BlANK

'-A
---A---"O
011
o

-11----I

~~c·1

I~EC.

PARTIAL ADDRESS

2ND DISPLAY

SEC.

INDICATED BY
TWO (2) POINTS------L.--

BLANK

1----1 Bo 1----1

1
SEC.

PARTIAL ADDRESS

3RD DISPLAY

;EC
INDICATED BY
THREE (3) POINTS----L-'---'

1----II II o
IAAoolBB
o
D E 5 6

EXAMPLE OF COMPLETE ADDRESS

FIRST
DISPLAY
RESULTS

SECOND
0DISPLAY
RESULTS

THIRD

(3) DISPLAY

RESULTS

NOTE:
THE CHARACTERS SHOWN HERE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY.
MKV84-1601

Figure 3 Example of an Ethernet Address Display

DECSA-IO

DECSA CABLING

DECSA Cabling
This section provides information for connecting cables to the communications server.
The following figure illustrates connecting a cable to a line card.

NOTE:
USE CABLES LISTED IN TABLE 1. OTHER CABLES (THOSE WITH TWOPIECE CONNECTOR HOUSINGS) USE MORE SPACE AND MAY REQUIRE
A BCl 7L ADAPTOR CABLE.
MKV84-1602

Figure 4

Connecting Cables to Line Cards

DECSA-ll

DECSA CABLING

The following figure illustrates connecting and locking a transceiver cable to the Ethernet connector on the
rear of the server.

ETHERNET CONNECTOR

UP POSITION
(LOCKED)

DOWN POSITION
(UNLOCKED)

(SEE NOTE)
LARGE
CUTOUT
(SEE NOTE)

NOTE:
ON SOME SLIDE-LATCH ASSEMBLIES THE DOWN POSITION MAY LOCK
THE CABLE IN PLACE. IN EITHER CASE. THE LOCK ENGAGES WHEN THE
SLIDE LATCH IS PUSHED IN THE DIRECTION OFTHE LARGE CUTOUT IN
THE LATCH.
MKV84-1603

Figure 5

Connecting a Transceiver Cable to the Server

DECSA-12

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS

DECSA Diagnostics
This section contains the following tables.
•
Self-Test and Diagnostics Descriptions
•
Locally Initiating Diagnostics
•
Remote Execution of Diagnostics
•
Successful Initial Test (Short and Long Versions) Indications
•
Successful Loadable Diagnostic Image (LDI) Indications
•
Initial Test (Short and Long Versions) Fault Indications
•
LDI Fault Indications
•
Logic Module Slot Numbers
Diagnostic Descriptions
The following table briefly describes the diagnostics for the DECSA communications server. The diagnostics are:
•
Initial test (short version)
•
Initial test (long version)
•
Loadable diagnostic image (LDI)
Table 4 Self-Test and Diagnostics Descriptions

Hardware or
Function Tested

Initial Test
Short Version
(12 seconds)

Initial
Long Version
(4 or 8
minutes) *

Lamps and displays

LDI (Loadable
Diagnostic Image)
(20 or 40
minutes) *

PDP-I 1/24 processor

Memory

Console/bootstrap/
terminator (CBT)

Xt
xt

Protocol assist
modules (PAMs)
DEUNA port module

DEUNA link module

Display Ethernet
address

xt
xt

Line cards

External loopback:t:

* The longer time is for testing the DECSA-FA (with 1M byte memory). The shorter time is for testing
other DECSA versions that have SI2K bytes of memory.

t The LDI runs a more extensive test than the initial test.
:t: Loopback is via line-card test connectors.
DECSA-13

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS

Running Initial Tests and Diagnostics
Initial tests and diagnostics may be initiated:
1.

Locally by using the front panel controls as shown in the following table.

Remotely (from a DEC net host on the same Ethernet network):
a.
b.

Table 5

By sending an INIT signal over the Ethernet, or
By starting a down-line load of software.
Locally Initiating Diagnostics
What the Server Does

Front Panel Controls

Load and
Run
Server
Software

"TEST"
Button

"START"
Button

Initial
Test
Short
Version

Tum
ON t

OUT

Restart/
Rerun
Initial
Test*

OUT

Run Full
Diagnostics

Tum
ON t

IN tt

Restart/
Rerun
Full
Diagnostics

IN t t

Desired
Operation

Key

Run
Initial
Test*

Press
and
Release t
Press
and
Release t

Initial
Test
Long
Version

Load and
Execute
LDI

* These procedures are also used to "start" the DECSA server.
t Set the other controls if necessary, then perform this action.
t t Return "TEST" button to OUT position after test completes.
MKV84-1632

Running DECSA Diagnostics from a Remote Host
The DECSA LDI may be run from a remote host. The following steps represent a typical sequence from
an RSX host.
NOTE
The <CR> symbol used in the following examples
denotes typing a carriage return.
1.

Load the "target" DECSA system with the LDI.
The image is found in the NETUIC on the system volume (LB:) and is named as follows:
a.
b.

Terminal server/router/SNA configurations - CSVLDI.SYS
X.25 configurations - CSVDIAG.SYS
DECSA-14

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS
The following is an example of the commands needed to load a DECSA node "xxx" with a
service password of "yyy".
>SET /NETUIC [100,54]<CR> ; netuic for this system is [100,54]
>NCP LOAD NODE xxx FROM LB:[100,54]CSVLDI.SYS SERVICE PASS yyy<CR>
NOTE
After approximately one minute the > prompt
should be displayed indicating that the LDI is loaded. Otherwise a timeout error message is displayed.
2.

Connect the remote console (CONSOLE CARRIER) with the following command.
>CCR NODE xxx<CR>
The system should respond with:
[REMOTE CONSOLE RESERVED·· .]
NOTE
If the [REMOTE CONSOLE RESERVED· •• J

prompt does not appear, a possible problem exists in
making the connection. The connection attempt
eventually aborts (after several minutes) and control
of the terminal is returned to the host system.
3.

Type <CR> in response to the [REMOTE CONSOLE RESERVED· .. ] prompt. The system
should respond with "PLU>" (Plumon prompt).

Enter any of the commands from the following table.
Table 6 Remote Execution of Diagnostics
Command

Diagnostic

RUN CIDSAA
RUN CIDSBA
RUN CIDSCA
RUN CIDSDA
RUN CIDSEA
RUN SYSEXE
AUTO
HELP

Runs PAM Repair Diagnostic 1
Runs PAM Repair Diagnostic 2
Runs LINE CARD Repair Diagnostic 1
Runs LINE CARD Repair Diagnostic 2
Runs the CBT Repair Diagnostic
Runs the'DECSA systems exerciser
Starts/restarts the default script
Lists the valid commands

Any DRS (diagnostic runtime services) commands may be entered in response to the DR> prompt with
the following exceptions.
•
•
•

A Z (Control Z)
A C (Control C)

DECSA-15

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS
The following commands control the console carrier.
•

1\ D (Control D) - disconnects the link.

•

AB (Control B) - halts the DECSA PDP-ll/24 CPU and enters MICRO ODT.
NOTE
If a DRS start command (STA to the DR> prompt)
is given after repair-level diagnostics finish executing, the remote console may UN-LOAD. The following sequence may be used to reconnect the remote
console.
1.

Enter 1\ D (Control D) which disconnects the
console carrier.

Enter the "CCR NODE· •• " command to
reconnect the console (the CCR command previously described in Step 2 of this procedure).

Diagnostic Results
The results of all DECSA diagnostics are indicated by the front panel display and lights of the CBT
(console/bootstrap/terminator).

Fault

•••

line Card logic

Cable

BLINKING

. . BLINKING
MKV84-1604

Figure 6 CBT Display During Test

DECSA-16

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS

Successful Initial Test Indications
The following table describes the front panel LED and digital readout indications during and after both
versions of the initial test.
Table 7 Successful Initial Test (Short and Long Versions) Indications
DECSA
State

Line
Card

Logic

Cable

Dl D2 D3 D4 Test

Start

Power

Run

During
Initial
Test

8* ON

After
Initial
Testt

OFF

:j:

OFF

* Blinking rates = 3 per second for short version of initial test; 1 per second for long version of initial test.
t

In the long (4 - 8 minute) version of the initial test, this display occurs after the Ethernet address is
displayed.

:j: After either version of the initial test these displays are blank. An "L" is displayed when the LDI
and/or server software load process begins.

DECSA-17

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS
Successful LDI Indications
The following table describes the front panel digital readout indications during loading and running of the
LDI and server software.
Note that line-card lights (located on each line card) should always be ON prior to initialization by the
server software.
Table 8

Successful LDI Indications

Event

Approximate
Duration

Loading LDI

2 minutes

Indication

IL . '-' ,'I *
I I

Running LDI

20 to 40
minutes

A series of changing numbers
is displayed. t

Loading Server
Software

2 minutes

Running Server
Software

Until server
is turned OFF

, , , 1*

• '-' I

A regular repeating light
pattern in the digital
readout.
Alternating with
I"
-, • '_I
I

*
t
tt

node address t t

The 3rd and 4th digits of the digital readout change as the LDI is loaded.
The number of the test being run is displayed. More information on the test being run may be
obtained by connecting a 1200 baud I RS-232-C terminal to the maintenance panel connector of
the DECSA communications server.
A node address is not displayed by the LAT terminal server. Otherwise, the node address is
indicated by three consecutive displays. An example of a displayed node address (40125) is:
1. 1st display (5 seconds)
4.01
2. 2nd display (3 seconds) 4.012
3. 3rd display (2 seconds) 0125
Individual node addresses vary.
MKV84-1616

DECSA-18

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS

Fault Indications
If the DECSA communications server fails any diagnostic (including the short or long version of the initial
test), the fault indications are displayed until:
•
•

The DECSA server is restarted, or
The power is turned OFF.

Initial Test Fault Indications - The following table shows front panel indications for faults found during
either version of the initial test.
Table 9
Line
Card

Initial Test (Short and Long Versions) Fault Indications
Logic

Cable

ON
ON
ON

Indication

* (01 to 16)

Line-card slot
number

* (01 to 10)

Logic module
slot number

(001 to 999)

Cable faultt

*Underscores (_ _) in the digital readout indicate that the displayed results are from the initial test.
tA cable fault was detected. Normal troubleshooting equipment such as a TDR (time domain reflectometer) should be used to locate the fault. The numbers displayed in the digital readout reflect internal logic
and should be disregarded.

DECSA-19

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS
LDI Fault Indications - The following table shows front panel indications for faults found during
execution of the LDI.
NOTE
When a failure is detected by the LDI, the slot
number of the defective module is displayed. Three
module choices are given because the DECSA architecture does not allow the LDI to isolate the failure
to a single module. The "1st choice" module should
be swapped first, the "2nd choice" module swapped
second, and so on.
Table 10 LDI Fault Indications
Line
Card

Logic

Cable

Indication

(01 to 16)

Line-card
slot number*
1st choice

(01 to 16)

Line-card
slot number*
2nd choice

(01 to 16)

Line-card
slot number*
3rd choice

(01 to 10)

Logic module
slot numbert
1st choice

(01 to 10)

Logic module
slot numbert
2nd choice

(01 to 10)

Logic module
slot numbert
3rd choice

(001 to 999)

Cable fault:j:

*Line-card slot numbers are located on the front panel of the DECSA system. The (red) LED on a
defective line card should be ON.
tLogic module slot numbers are listed in Table 11.
:j:A cable fault was detected. Normal troubleshooting equipment such as a TDR (time domain reflectometer) should be used to locate the fault. The numbers displayed in the digital readout reflect internal logic
and should be disregarded.

DECSA-20

DECSA DIAGNOSTICS
Logic Module Slot Numbers - The following table shows logic module slot numbers referred to by the
initial test and the LDI.
Table 11
Slot
Number
1
2
3
4

5
6
7

8*
9*
10

Logic Module Slot Numbers
Module
M3112 CBT
M7793 Ethernet-to-UNIBUS adaptor (LINK module)
M7792 Ethernet-to-UNIBUS adaptor (PORT module)
07273 grant card
M8743-AA or M8743-BA memory
M3110 PAM 1 module 1
M3111 PAM 1 module 2
M311 0 PAM 2 module 1 (optional)
M3111 PAM 2 module 2 or 07273 grant card
M7133 PDP-ll/24 CPU

*For a 32-line terminal server, slots 8 and 9 contain M3110 and M3111 PAM modules respectively. For a
16-line terminal server, a DECnet router server, a DECnet router/X.25 gateway, and a DECnet/SNA
gateway, slot 8 is unused and slot 9 contains a 07273 grant card.

DECSA-21

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Required Equipment
The following extender modules may be required to perform some maintenance procedures described in
this manual.
•
•
•

W900 - Dual-height extender module
W987 - Quad-height extender module
W904 - Hex-height extender module

The DECSA controlled distribution (CD) repair kit contains only those modules that are unique to the
DECSA server. Those modules include:
•
•
•
•

Line cards
PAM modules
CBT modules
SI2K byte memory modules

The following modules are not included in the DECSA CD repair kit. However, these modules should be
available at the DIGITAL Field Service Office.
•
•
•
•

•

DEUNA modules
CPU module
1M byte memory module
+5 V regulator
±15 V regulator

DECSA-22

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting
The following flow diagram provides a typical troubleshooting sequence.

HOT SWAP DEFECTIVE
LINE CARD

TURN THE KEY SWITCH
TO OFF

VISUALLY CHECK AND
REPAIR IF NECESSARY

RUN INITIAL TEST (LAMP
TEST)

MKV84-1605

Figure 7

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 5)

DECSA-23

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

TURN THE KEY SWITCH
TO OFF

REPLACE FRU (C8T
MODULE)

REPLACE DEFECTIVE FRU

RUN LDI *

* LDI INDICATES FULL DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
MKV84-1606

Figure 7 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 5)

DECSA-24

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE DEFECTIVE FRU

RECONNECT HARDWARE

MKV84-1607

Figure 7 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 5)

DECSA-25

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

CHECK POWER TO L1NE-

PLACE LINE CARD 1 (TOP LEFT)
IN AN EXTENDER CARD.

CHECK THE FOLLOWING PINS
FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE:

CARD 1

• AA1
+5 V
• AU1 = -15 V
• AV2 = +15 V

1
CHECK POWER TO CBT
MODULE

TURN KEY SWITCH TO OFF.

PLACE CBT MODULE IN AN
EXTENDER CARD.

TURN KEY SWITCH TO ON.

CHECK THE FOLLOWING
PINS FOR CORRECT VOLTAGE:
• AA2 = +5V
• CU1
-15 V
• FV2 = -15 V

VERIFY AC INPUT
VOLTAGE

REFER PROBLEM TO
NETWORK SUPPORT

MKV84-1608

Figure 7 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 5)

DECSA-26

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

ORDER APPROPRIATE
REPAIRS

1. MAIN POWER SUPPLY (LOWER)
•
•

+5 V TO ALL HEX MODULES
±15VTO M7133ANDM3112

• LTC
• ACLO
2. SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
(UPPER)*

REPLACE DEFECTIVE FRU

•
•

+5 V TO ALL LINE CARDS
±15 V TO ALL LINE CARDS

• ACLO

* SOME DECSA SERVERS MAY ONLY
CONTAIN THE MAIN POWER
SUPPLY. JUMPERS PROVIDE
POWER TO ALL MODULES.

REFER PROBLEM TO
NETWORK SUPPORT

MKV84-1609

Figure 7 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 5 of 5)

DECSA-27

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Module Replacement and Upgrades
The following modules may require setting DIP switches, checking/setting jumper configurations, or
changing a PROM.
•
•
•
•
•

M7133 - PDP-ll/24 CPU
M7792 - DEUNA (port module)
M7793 - DEUNA (link module)
M8743-AA - 512K byte memory
M8743-BA - 1M byte memory

M7133 PDP-ll/24 CPU Module Replacement - The switch and jumper configurations are outlined in
the following table and figure.
Table 12 M7133 (PDP-ll/24) CPU Switch and Jumper Configurations
Switchpack
or
Jumper

OFF

Jumper IN

Jumper OUT

E135

1,5

All others

E124

1,3,5,7,8

2,4,6

Jumpers
WI - W14

Wl,W2,W3,
WlO,WI2·

W4,W5,W6,W7,W8
W9,Wll,WI3,WI4

PDP 11/24 CPU
M7133

I SPARE
ICIS OR SPARE: I

W12W11~

W100-----0
W90

ICIS OR SPARE

W8~W3~

I CIS OR SPARE

W 7 - W2--Q-o---ooW14
W1a----o
W6_
W50-------0
W 1 L -W4 0-----0

I
I

IFPP OR SPARE!

I
I

DAT/CTL
MMU

MKV85·1228

Figure 8 M7133 (PDP-ll/24) CPU Switch and Jumper Locations

DECSA-28

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

M7792 DEUNA Port Module Replacement - The switch settings for Revision Etch B and Revision Etch
C of the port module are shown in the following figure and table.
SELF-TEST CABLE
STATUS
VERIFY
LEDs
LED

MODULE
I NTE RCONNECT
CABLE JACKS

E40

100001011001

SWITCHPACK E40
SWITCH OFF (OPEN) = LOGICAL 1

SWITCH PACK E62
SWITCH OFF (OPEN) = LOGICAL 1
V2-------------------- VB

A3-----------------------A12

ETCH
REV C

V3--------------VB

DEVICE ADDRESS
SELECTION
ETCH
REV B

MKV84-0562

Figure 9 M7792 Port Module Switch Settings
Table 13

M7792 Switch Settings

Switchpack

OFF

E40

1,4,6,9,10

2,3,5,7,8

E62 (REV B)

2,4,8

1,3,5,6,7,9,10

E62 (REV C)

3,5,9

1,2,4,6,7,8,10

DECSA-29

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS
M7793 DEUNA Link Module Replacement - The PROM in the M7793 link module contains the
Ethernet address. When replacing a DEUNA link module adhere to the following conditions:
1.

If possible, move the PROM from the defective module to the new module being installed.

If the PROM must be changed, report the new Ethernet address to the system or network
manager.

M8743-xA Memory Module Replacement - All address switches on a replacement M8743 module must
be set to ON.
Verify the following jumper configuration.
IN:

OUT:

Wl,W2,W3,W4

System Upgrade
When it is necessary to upgrade a terminal server from 16 to 32 lines, an additional (secondary) power
supply and PAM set is required.

DECSA-30

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS
The following flow diagram provides the steps for adding a secondary power supply and PAM set.

TURN KEY SWITCH TO
OFF

REMOVE CHANNEL COVER
AND DRESS PANEL FROM
THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE
SERVER (WHEN FACING
THE SERVER FROM THE
FRONT)

DISCONNECT
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FROM THE BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR ON THE
REAR OF THE SERVER

REMOVE PANEL FROM
THE REAR OFTHE SERVER

MKV84-1610

Figure 10 Upgrade: Adding a Second PAM Set and Power Supply
(Sheet 1 of 5)

DECSA-31

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REMOVE THE FAN POWER
CABLE AND REMOVE THE
FAN TRAY

REMOVE THE COVER
FROM THE NEW POWER
SUPPLY

PLUG THE RIBBON CABLE
INTO THE H7200 MODULE

PLUG P1 INTO THE H7211
MODULE

ROUTE CABLES THROUGH
THE SLOT IN THE SIDE OF
TH E POWER SU PPLY BOX

REPLACE THE COVER ON
THE POWER SUPPLY

MKV84-1611

Figure 10 Upgrade: Adding a Second PAM Set and Power Supply
(Sheet 2 of 5)

DECSA-32

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

INSTALL THE POWER
SUPPLY IN THE DECSA
CABINET

REMOVE TH E PLASTIC
SHIELD FROM THE
BACKPLANE TERMINAL
STRIP

CONNECT THE BLACK
WIRES FROM THE
SECONDARY POWER
SUPPLY TO THE
TERMINALS THAT HAVE
HEAVY BLACK WIRES

REMOVE THE JUMPER
BETWEEN THE PRIMARY
AND SECONDARY +5
VOLT TERMINALS ON THE
BACKPLANE TERMINAL
STRIP

MKV84-1612

Figure 10 Upgrade: Adding a Second PAM Set and Power Supply
(Sheet 3 of 5)

DECSA-33

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REMOVE JUMPERS W2
AND W3 FROM THE
BACKPLANE TERMINAL
STRIP

CONNECT THE +15 VOLT
POWER HARNESS TO J6
ON THE BACKPLANE
TERMINAL STRIP

REPLACE TH E FAN TRAY
AND REPLACE THE FAN
POWER CABLE

REPLACE THE DRESS
PANEL AND CHANNEL
COVER ON THE RIGHT
SIDE

CONNECT THE
SECONDARY POWER
HARNESS TO THE
SECONDARY POWER

MKV84-1613

Figure 10 Upgrade: Adding a Second PAM Set and Power Supply
(Sheet 4 of 5)

DECSA-34

DEC SA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE THE REAR
SHIELD WHILE
RECONNECTING THE
BULKHEAD CABLE TO
THE SHIELD

REPLACE THE REAR
DRESS PANEL AND
SECURE IN PLACE

INSTALL PAM MODULES
AND LINE CARDS

TURN SYSTEM ON AND
RUN FULL DIAGNOSTICS

MKV84-1614

Figure 10 Upgrade: Adding a Second PAM Set and Power Supply
(Sheet 5 of 5)

DECSA-35

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Backplane Terminal Strip Wiring
The following figure shows the location and wiring of the backplane terminal strip. Also shown are the
jumpers that must be removed when adding a second PAM set and power supply.
SHIELD

DECSA COMMUNICATIONS SERVER

RED
(FROM
PRIMARY
SUPPLY)

-..
)

RED

.~=~-.

-B

BLACK

---

BLACK}

---

JUMPER
PLASTIC
SHIELD

}

RED

BLACK
(FROM
PRIMARY
SUPPLY)

JUMPER
WIRE

BLACK
(FROM
SECONDARY
FROM MAIN
(PRIMARY)
POWER
SUPPLY

SSl~~_

~~g~NDARY t:~-POWER
SUPPLY
RED
(FROM
SECONDARY
SUPPLY)

TERMINAL
STRIP

MKV84·1615

Figure 11

Backplane Terminal Strip Location and Connections
DECSA-36

Secondary PO ...r Supply Cabling
ror
POwerfigure
supplies
and Ihe
Iherelalive
fan is also
shown.for the Illain and secondary JlOwer sUPplies. The cabling
Thebolh
fOl/owing
shows
locations

SECONDARY SUPPLY

MAIN SUPPLY

Figure 12 Secondary Power SUPply Cabling

MKV84-0564

DECSA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DECSA Tech Tips/FCO Index
The following table lists Tech Tips and FCOs that pertain to the DECSA Communications Server. Space
is provided for adding new information.

Table 14 DECSA Tech Tips/FCO Index
Title

Speed
Bulletin

DEUNA-AA Revised DC Power Requirements
M7792 Switchpack E-62 Switch Assignments

293
293

M8743-BA FCO-ROOO7
M8743-BA DEC-O-LOG

315
315

TT01A

DECSA Diagnostic CSVLDI.SYS

382

TT02A

DECSA Logistic Information

449

Tech
Tip No.

DECSA-38

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

DECserver 100 TERMINAL SERVER
General Description
The DECserver 100 (Figure 1) is a high performance terminal server for use on an Ethernet Local Area
Network (LAN).
The server allows up to eight terminal users to access any of a set of computer systems on the Ethernet
network. It also offers an extensive command set for efficient communication among terminals, server,
and nodes. The terminal user's response time and throughput are similar to that for terminals directly
connected to a system.
The Ethernet LAN used must employ the Local Area Transport (LAT) network architecture. The LAT
architecture makes use of the unique features of the Ethernet network to provide a low-overhead, highly
efficient means of logically connecting any terminal to one or more nodes on the same Ethernet network.

FRONT

IIIIIIII

REAR

AC POWER CORD
RECEPTACLE
RESET TO FACTORY
SETTINGS SWITCH (S1)

ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER
CONNECTOR (J9)

AC LINE VOLTAGE
INPUT SELECTOR

INDICATOR

MKV85-1196

Figure 1 DECserver 100 Terminal Server

DSI00-l

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

Product Configurations
The DECserver 100 terminal server can be connected directly to the Ethernet network via an H4000
Ethernet transceiver or it can be connected to either a DELNI unit or an Etherjack connector box.
H4000

COAXIAL CABLE

~~~~~F======~l~~~~J~~~~~
TRANSCEIVER CABLE

ETHERJACK,

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

DELNI

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

DECserver 100

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

DECserver 100

MKV85-1197

Figure 2 DECserver 100 Ethernet Connections
DECserver 100 Versions
The server is available in two versions (DSRVA-AA and DSRVA-AB). Each version has a different input
voltage.
Model

Input Voltage

DSRVA-AA
DSRVA-AB

120 Vac
240 Vac

DS100-2

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION
Hardware Components
The DECserver 100 package consists of:
•

DEC server 100 hardware unit - DSRVA-AA or DSRVA-AB

•

Country kit - Correct power cord, site preparation/installation guide, and operations guide

•

Software - OECserver 100 software and software installation guide

Terminal cables for the DECserver 100 terminal server are ordered separately. There are two types of
terminal cables used with the DECserver 100 terminal server:
•
•

BC220-XX null modem cable
BC22E data terminal cable

Software Components
DECserver 100 Software - Server software implements the LAT architecture at the terminal server. This
software supports the LA T protocols, provides access to the server command language, and provides
maintenance and testing functions for the server.
Host Software - One module used to implement LAT resides on the VMS or RSX node and is called
LTDRIVER. LTDRIVER is analogous to the terminal driver module of any operating system. Terminal
drivers control the system's local terminals. LTDRIVER provides the instruction set to control remote
terminals through the OECserver 100 terminal server.
The LAT virtual circuit software is another module used to implement LAT. This module constitutes the
interface between the terminal users' data transmissions and the lines that make up the circuit.
Server Software Operation (Figure 3) - The server software is installed on an Ethernet node which
implements Phase IV of DEC net software. When the software is installed on a node, that node becomes
the Load Host.
The following software files should be found on the Load Host. VMSINSTAL copies the following files
into SYS$SYSROOT[OECSERVER).
***DSVxxxRNT.DOC -

A file that contains the DEC server release notes.

***DSVCONFIG.COM -

A file that contains a program which has the command procedure for
building the configuration file.

***PS0801ENG.SYS -

The distributed DEC server 100 image file.

Other files in this directory are:
***DSVCONFIG.DAT -

A configuration file containing the configuration information for the
DECserver 100 terminal server. This file is the configuration file created
by running DSVCONFIG.COM.

***PSDMPyyyy.SYS -

The up-line DECserver 100 dump file. This file is copied to
SYS$SYSROOT[DECSERVER] when an up-line dump occurs.
NOTE
xxx will change with revision of the software. yyyy
equals last four digits of the server Ethernet
address.
DS100-3

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

When the server (DSRVA-XX) is powered on or given the Initialize command, it runs its internal self-test.
If the self-test passes, the server then broadcasts a "Request for Down-Line Load" message on the
Ethernet network. The Load Host receives the broadcast message and down-line loads the server software
to the DEC server 100 terminal server.
Once the server software is loaded, terminal users are able to access other nodes on the Ethernet network.
The users are not restricted to the Load Host. Any node that implements the LTDRIVER software is
available to the users.

DEC
HOST

---

--,..

II
T

DEC
LOAD
HOST

DEC
HOST

-...

-r-

DSRVA-XX

I
1 .......... 8

_. ETHERNET

,..-

I
T

DSRVA-XX

1 .......... 8

II
T

MKV85-1198

Figure 3 DEC server 100 Topology

Terminal Connector Pin Assignments
Table 1 lists the pin assignments for each of the 25-pin D-subminiature (D-SUB) terminal connectors on
the back of the terminal server.
Table 1 Terminal Connector Pin Assignments
Pin
No.
7
2

Signal

Function

Ground
PJL TX L
PJL RX H

Signal Ground
Transmit Data
Receive Data

DS100-4

DEC server 100 INSTALLATION

Application Modes
When a user logs in on the terminal server, the terminal-to-service node operating mode may be set by
command or determined dynamically by preset characteristics.
The terminal server supports the following operating modes and speed ranges.
•

Interactive terminal mode - 75 to 19,200 bits/s

•

Flow-controlled block mode or file-transfer mode - 75 to 9,600 bits/s

Block mode applications supporting XOFF /XON flow control are supported. The main use of this mode is
by intelligent video terminals that support screen editing and send an entire screen of characters to the
service node.
File transfer operations are supported for the following DIGITAL personal computers at speeds of up to
9,600 bits/s:
•
•
•

Professional 350/380 series
Rainbow 100, 100+
DEC mate II

Terminals
The DIGITAL terminals listed in Table 2 are supported by the terminal server at transfer speeds up to
19,200 baud in the interactive terminal mode and up to 9,600 baud in flow-controlled block mode or filetransfer mode.

Table 2

Approved DIGITAL Terminals

Hardcopy Terminals
LA 12, LA50, LA 100;
LA120, LA180;
LA34, LA36, LA38

Video Display Terminals
VT50, VT52, VT5x/VT6x in VT52 mode;
VT100, VT101, VT102, VT125, VT131;
VT220, VT240, VT241

Intelligent Terminals/Personal Computers
GIGIor VT180 in VT100 mode;
RAINBOW 100, DECmate II;
PRO-325/350/380 in VT100 emulation mode

DSIOO-5

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation

Title

Document
Number

DECserver ]00 Terminal Server Technical Manual

EK-DSRVA-TM

DECserver ] 00 Terminal Server User's Pocket Guide

AV-Z084A-TK

DECserver ] 00 Terminal Server Operations Guide

AA-Z085A-TK

DECserver ]00 Terminal Server Identification Card

A V-DJ35A-TK

DECserver ]00 Terminal Server Software Installation Guide (VAX/VMS)

AA-D117 A-TE

DECserver 100 Terminal Server Site Preparation/Hardware Installation Guide

AA-CK93A-TK

LAT Terminal Server Network Manager's Guide

AA-D118A-TK

LA T-]] Server Manager's Guide

AA-BT77 A-TC

The Ethernet - A Local Area Network - Data Link Layer and Physical Layer
Specifications (Version 2.0, November 1982)

AA-K759B-TK

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver Installation Manual

EK-H4000-IN

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver with Removable Tap Assembly
Installation Card

EK-H4TAP-IN

Installing Etherjack

EK-DEXJK-IN

DELNI Installation/Owner's Manual

EK-DELNI-IN

Device Placement
The DECserver 100 terminal server can be placed either in an office or a computer room environment,
provided the location conforms to the environmental specifications listed in the installation flow diagram
of Figure 4.

DSIOO-6

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram
NOTE
Some flow diagram symbols have roman numerals
next to them. These roman numerals refer to supplementary information.

I. (SEE FOLLOWING PAGE)
GET DECserver
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK.
SYSTEM, OR SERVER)

_---.....1-----.....
II. (SEE FOLLOWING PAGES)
VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE MANAGER
THAT TH E DEC server
INSTALLATION SITE
MEETS SITE PREPARATION
REQUIREMENTS

UNPACK. INSPECT, AND
VERIFY CONTENTS OF
THE DECserver 100 BOX.
REFER TO THE SITE
PREPARATION/
INSTALLATION GUIDE

UNPACK. INSPECT, AND
VERIFY CONTENTS OF
THE DECserver 100
ACCESSORIES BOX(ES).
REFER TO THE SITE
PREPARATION/
INSTALLATION GUIDE

MKV85-1199

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 9)
DS100-7

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION INFORMATION
A. LOCATION WHERE DECserver IS TO BE INSTALLED
B. TYPE OF CONNECTING DEVICE AND ITS LOCATION (H4000. DELNI. AND/
OR ETHERJACK)
C. TYPE(S) OF TRANSCEIVER CABLE (BNE3X AND/OR BNE4X)
D. LOCATION OF TERMINALS

II.

SITE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS
A. CONNECTING DEVICE (H4000. DELNI. ETHERJACK) ALREADY INSTALLED
B. TRANSCEIVER CABLE FROM CONNECTING DEVICE ALREADY INSTALLED
C. TOTAL TRANSCEIVER CABLE LENGTH LIMIT FROM THE H4000 TO THE
DECserver 100 CANNOT EXCEED:
1.
2.

50 METERS (164 FT) OF BNE3X CABLE
12.5 METERS (41 FT) OF BNE4X CABLE

NOTE
1 METER (3.28 FT) OF BNE4X IS EQUIVALENT TO 4 METERS (13.21 FT) OF
BNE3X. IF THE TWO CABLE TYPES ARE MIXED. THE TOTAL CABLE LENGTH
CANNOT EXCEED THE ELECTRICAL EQUIVALENT OF 50 METERS (164 FT) OF
BNE3X CABLE.
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON INSTALLATION OF THE CONNECTING
DEVICE AND TRANSCEIVER CABLE LIMITS. REFER TO:
- ETHERNET INSTALLATION GUIDE (EK-ETHER-IN)
- DELNIINSTALLATION/OWNER'S MANUAL (EK-DELNI-IN)
-INSTALLING ETHERJACK (EK-DEXJK-IN)
MKV85-1200

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 9)

DSlOO-8

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1. VOLTAGE:
DSRVA-AA
100-120 VAC
SINGLE PHASE
47-63 HZ
0.5 AMP
30 WATTS
3AG 1.0 A SB
250 VAC

DSRVA-AB
200-240 VAC
1 n+PE
47-63 HZ
0.3 AMP
30 WATTS
5 MM (.20 IN) T 1 .0 A
250 VAC

2. TEMPERATURE
OPERATING
50 -104° F
10 - 40 0 C

NONOPERATING
-40 -151 0 F
-40- 66° C

THERMAL OUTPUT
95 BRITISH THERMAL UNITS
3. HUMIDITY
OPERATING
10% - 90%
NONCONDENSING

NONOPERATING
90% MAXIMUM

4. ALTITUDE
OPERATING
2.4 KM (8000 FT)

NONOPERATING
9.1 KM (30,000 FT)
MKV85-1201

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram
(Sheet 3 of 9)

DSIOO-9

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

FILL OUT THE DECserver
IDENTIFICATION CARD
(AV-DJ35A-TK)

GIVE THE DECserver
IDENTIFICATION CARD
TO THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER

GIVE THE DECserver
SOFTWARE PACKAGE
TO APPROPRIATE MANAGER FOR INSTALLATION ON THE LOAD
HOST

'--LA-B-E-L-T-H-E..JTIo.E-R-M-IN-A-L--' III.
CABLES BASED ON TH E
TERMINAL LOCATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER

TERM I NAL CABLE LABEll NG
SERVER NUMBER:
PORT NUMBER:
OFFICE NUMBER:

CONNECT A TERMINAL
CABLE TO TERMINAL
NUMBER 1

MKV85-1202

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram
(Sheet 4 of 9)

DSIOO-IO

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

.....- - - -.....- - -..... IV.
SET TERMINAL NUMBER
1 TO THE REQUIRED
PARAMETERS

TERMINAL NUMBER 1 PARAMETERS
SPEED:
SIZE:
PARITY:

9600 BPS
8 BITS/CHARACTER
NONE

INSTALL THE DECserver
AT ITS PERMANENT
LOCATION

CONNECT TERMINAL
NUMBER 1 TERMINAL
CABLE TO THE DECserver

CONNECT THE POWER
CORD TO THE DECserver.
DO NOT APPLY POWER
ATTHIS TIME

ASK THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER TO INSTALL
TH E DECserver
SOFTWARE

MKV85·1203

Figure 4 DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 5 of 9)

DSI00-ll

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

PLUG TH E DECserver
POWER CORD INTO THE
AC POWER OUTLET

REFER TO DECserver
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOWCHART

LOAD MESSAGE DISPLAY ON TERMINAL 1
LOCAL -901- INITIALIZING DECserver *
LOCAL -902- WAITING FOR IMAGE LOAD
LOCAL -903- LOADING FROM HOST *
LOCAL -904- IMAGE LOAD COMPLETE

* ETHERNET HEX ADDRESS DISPLAYED

MKV85-1204

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 6 of 9)

DSIOO-12

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

VERIFY TERMINAL 1
INSTALLATION AND PARAMETER SET UP

VI.

(SEE FOLLOWING PAGE)

VII.

(SEE FOLLOWING PAGE)

REFER TO DECserver
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOWCHART

(SEE FOLLOWING PAGE)
REFER TO DECserver
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOWCHART

REFER TO DECserver
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOWCHART

MKV85·1205

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram
(Sheet 7 of 9)

DSIOO-13

DECserver 100 INSTALLATION

VI.

TERMINAL 1 VERIFICATION
A. TERMINAL OF THE CORRECT TYPE?
B. POWER AVAILABLE?
C. TERMINAL TURNED ON?
D. TERMINAL CABLE IN GOOD CONDITION AND PROPERLY CONNECTED TO TERMINAL AND DECserver?
E. TERMINAL PARAMETERS SET UP?
SPEED:
9600 BPS
CHAR. SIZE:
B BITS/CHARACTER
PARITY:
NONE

VII.

RESETTING DECserver
RESET THE DECserver BY HOLDING SWITCH S1 IN, AND UNPLUGGING AND
REINSERTING THE POWER CORD ON THE DECserver

VIII. TERMINAL 1 DISPLAY
LOCAL -901- INITIALIZING DECserver *
LOCAL -902- WAITING FOR IMAGE LOAD
LOCAL -903- LOADING FROM HOST *
LOCAL -904- IMAGE LOAD COMPLETE

* ETHERNET HEX ADDRESS DISPLAYED
MKV85-1206

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 8 of 9)

DSlOO-14

DEC server 100 INSTALLATION

TERMINAL 1 PARAMETERS
SPEED:
PARITY:
CHAR. SIZE:

9600 BPS TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE
NONE
8 BITS/CHARACTER

REFER TO DECserver
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOWCHART

MKV84-1207

Figure 4

DECserver 100 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 9 of 9)

DSIOO-15

DECserver 100 CABLING

Power Cord Length
The length of the power cord for the DECserver 100 terminal server is 1.8 m (6 ft).
Ethernet Transceiver Cable Length
The maximum transceiver cable length, as measured from the H4000 transceiver to the server (this
includes lengths of transceiver cable connecting the server to either a DELNI unit or Etherjack connector
box), cannot exceed the following limits.
•
•

50.0 m (164 ft) when using BNE3X-XX transceiver cable
12.5 m (41 ft) when using BNE4X-XX transceiver cable

The BNE4X transceiver cable (also referred to as Office Cable) has an attenuation ratio of 1:4 when
compared to BNE3X transceiver cable. In other words, 1 m (3.3 ft) of BNE4X transceiver cable is
equivalent to 4 m (13.1 ft) of BNE3X transceiver cable.
If a combination of the two cable types is used, the total physical cable length cannot exceed the electrical
equivalent of 50 m (164 ft) of BNE3X transceiver cable.

DSlOO-16

DECserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Maintenance Features
The DECserver 100 terminal server provides the following maintenance features.
•

Hardware self-test - Initiated at power-up or by the Initialize command; verifies the server
hardware.

•

Software loopback testing to the Ethernet network - Run from the privileged terminal; verifies
that the Ethernet transceiver functions properly.

•

Test functions for terminals - Run from the privileged terminal; verifies that the server's
asynchronous ports are functioning properly.

•

Reset-to-factory-settings switch (S1) - Used to reset the permanent server and terminal characteristics to their factory-set values. The switch is used as follows when the unit is replaced or
when the current values cause the server to be unusable.
Press and hold the reset-to-factory-settings switch.
Unplug the ac power cord.
Plug in the ac power cord.
Hold the reset-to-factory-settings switch for 1 second, then release.

Diagnostic Description
The DECserver 100 terminal server uses an internal self-test as its only diagnostic. The self-test verifies the
following areas.
•
•
•
•

Operation of the 68000 microprocessor
Operation of the DART chips
Integrity of its internal memories (RAM, ROM, NVRAM)
Operation of its Ethernet controller interface

A green light emitting diode (LED) on the server rear panel and the error messages sent to terminal port
number 1 at server initialization, are the only indicators of the status of the self-test.
The green LED can be in one of three states.
•

ON STEADY - The self-test has completed successfully and did not detect any hardware
errors.

•

BLINKING - The self-test has detected a nonfatal problem during its execution.

•

OFF - The server either has no power or the self-test has detected a fatal hardware error during
its execution.

Executing Diagnostic
There are two methods for initiating the DECserver 100 self-test.
•

Issuing the Initialize command from the console (privileged) terminal

•

Unplugging and reinserting the server power cord

DSlOO-17

DECserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Error Indications/Symptoms
The status of the green LED on the rear panel and the operating condition of the connected terminals can
be of help in determining the possible cause of a fault associated with the server. The LED will be in one of
the three states listed earlier and the terminals will be in one of the three states listed below.
•
•
•

ALL terminals functioning properly
SOME of the terminals functioning properly
NONE of the terminals functioning properly

The one exception to the above is when the state of the LED is OFF. In this case the terminals are unable
to function.
Table 3 summarizes these error indications and the possible causes of the malfunction.

Table 3

DECserver 100 Error Indications/Symptoms and Possible Causes

LED/Terminal Status
ON/All inoperative

Possible Cause

Software not loaded on host
Service node(s) not available
Server/terminal parameter mismatch

1.
2.
3.

Server/terminal parameter mismatch
Service node(s) not available
EIA drivers on server port bad

Server diagnostic checksum error
Server parameter checksum error
Ethernet loopback test failure
Ethernet heartbeat test failure

2.
ON/Some inoperative

Blinking/All inoperative

2.
3.
4.

Blinking/Some inoperative

2.
3.

4.
OFF/All inoperative

DSIOO-18

Server diagnostic checksum error
Server parameter checksum error
Server port parameter checksum error
Server port hardware failure
Power not applied to server
Fatal server diagnostic failure

DECserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Status and Error Message Types
Table 4 lists the types of message codes that may be returned by the server software during operation.
Status and error messages are displayed in the following format where xxx (unless undefined) is a decimal
status or error code.
Local -xxx- Command response or error message
Table 4 Server Status and Error Message Types
Code Range

Message Type

000 to 099

Informational messages, normal command responses

100 to 199

Warning messages

200 to 299

Connection error messages

500 to 599

Server-specific informational messages

600 to 699

Server-specific warning messages

700 to 799

Server user and command error messages

900 to 999

Status and error messages issued by the firmware routines in program ROM

Fatal Bugcheck Error Message
The following message is displayed on a fatal bugcheck.
Local -913- Fatal Bugcheck PC=xxx, SP=xxx, SR=xxx, MEM=xxx, CODE=xxx
The message displays the contents of the CPU program counter (PC), stack pointer (SP), and status
register (SR) at the time of the failure.
The MEM field displays the illegal memory address on an addressing error or displays the address of the
instruction that may have caused the failure. The CODE field gives the reason for the failure as listed in
Table 5.

DSIOO-19

DECserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Table 5

System Crash Error Codes

Code

Description

CPU Exceptions
2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
A

B
C

Bus error
Address error
Illegal instruction
Divide by zero
CHK instruction
TRAPV instruction
Privilege violation
Trace
Line 1010 emulator
Line 1111 emulator
Other
Spurious interrupt

Self-Test Bugchecks (Program ROM)
11

12
14
15
22
23

24
31
32

NI port hardware memory error
NI port initialization timeout error
NI port transmit buffer error
Stack value incorrect in idle loop
Unlink error
Deallocate error
Unable to allocate XCB
Command completion error
Local output completion error

Server Software Bugchecks (Program RAM)

200
211

212
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223

224
225
226
227
228
229
230

LAT software checksum error
NI port hardware memory error
NI port initialization timeout error
NI port transmit buffer error
Stack value incorrect in idle loop
Unlink error
Deallocate error
Unable to allocate XCB
Command completion error
Local output completion error
EEPROM write block error
Entry on output queue with no slots
Transmit too long
Cannot find status
No available circuit control blocks
Low pool allocation error
Illegal local output state
Service defined with no nodes
Duplicate node/service name found
T-IMAXC out of range

DSIOO-20

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Next to some of the flow diagram symbols are roman numerals. These roman numerals refer to supplementary information.
NOTE
If the DECserver 100 unit requires replacement, a
new DECserver 100 Identification Card mut be filled out and given to the system, server, or network
manager.

DSRVA-XX INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE THE DSRVA BY HOLDING
SWITCH S1 IN, AND UNPLUGGING AND
REINSERTING THE POWER CORD

LOCATE CONSOLE
TERMINAL
II.

LOAD MESSAGE DISPLAY
LOCAL -901- INITIALIZING DECserver *
LOCAL -902- WAITING FOR IMAGE LOAD
LOCAL -903- LOADING FROM HOST *
LOCAL -904- IMAGE LOAD COMPLETE

* ETHERNET HEX ADDRESS DISPLAYED

MKV85-1208

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 12)
DSI00-21

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

PRESS <RET> TWICE

VERIFY THAT SERVER AND
TERMINAL PARAMETERS
MATCH

MKV85·1209

Figure 5

DEC server 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 12)

DSIOO-22

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

LOCATE A KNOWN
GOOD TERMINAL

SET THE TERMINAL TO
THE "PRIVILEGED" MODE

PERFORM A "TEST TERMINAL" TEST TO THE
BAD TERMINAL

III.

SETTING TERMINAL TO PRIVILEGED MODE
LOCAL> SET PRIVILEGED
PASSWORD> (OBTAIN FROM SERVER MANAGER)
BE SURE TO SET THE TERMINAL BACK TO
THE NONPRIVILEGED MODE WHEN DONE.

MKV86-0553

Figure 5 DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 3 of 12)

DSIOO-23

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

CONNECT A TERMINAL
PORT TEST CONNECTOR
TO THE SUSPECTED
PORT

PERFORM A "TEST TERMI NAL/LOOP" TEST TO
THE PORT

REFER TO THE TERMINAL'S MAINTENANCE
MANUAL

REPLACE THE DSRVA OR
USE AS IS WITHOUT
THE TERMINAL PORT

MKV86·0552

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 4 of 12)

DSI00-24

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE ·AIDS

APPLY POWER TO THE
DSRVA-XX

MKV85-1212

Figure 5 DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 5 of 12)

DSlOO-25

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

VERIFY THAT THE DECserver SOFTWARE IS
INSTALLED ON THE
LOAD HOST

REFER THE PROBLEM TO
THE SERVER MANAGER

MKV85-1213

Figure 5

DEC server 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 6 of 12)

DSIOO-26

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

DETERMINE THE ERROR
TYPE AND REFER THE
PROBLEM TO THE SERVER MANAGER

IV.

(SEE BELOW)

ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING ERROR MESSAGES MAY BE DISPLAYED:
LOCAL -905- WAITING FOR IMAGE DUMP
LOCAL -906- DUMPING TO HOST *
LOCAL -907- IMAGE DUMP COMPLETE
LOCAL -912- LOAD FAILURE, TIMEOUT
LOCAL -913- FATAL BUGCHECK ** (INDICATES A SYSTEM CRASH)
LOCAL -914- TIMEOUT, DUMP ABORTED
LOCAL -915- TRANSMISSION FAILURE AFTER TEN ATTEMPTS

* HOST ETHERNET HEX ADDRESS IS DISPLAYED
MEMORY LOCATIONS, ERROR CODES, ETC. ARE DISPLAYED

FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REFER TO THE DECserver 100 TERMINAL
SERVER OPERATIONS GUIDE - APPENDIX A
MKV85-1214

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 7 of 12)

DSlOO-27

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

(SEE FOLLOWING PAGE)

A PROBLEM WITH THE
ETHERNET EXISTS.
REFER THIS TO THE
SERVER MANAGER

THE ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER.lS AT FAULT.
REFER THIS TO THE
SERVER MANAGER

EXIT

MKV85-1215

Figure 5

DEC server 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 8 of 12)

DSIOO-28

DECserver tOO MAINTENANCE AIDS

LOCAL -911- WARNING - NONFATAL HARDWARE ERROR DETECTED
SERVER CODE 0000, TERMINAL CODES 00 **
LEFT TO RIGHT SERVER CODES ARE:
- ETHERNET HEARTBEAT ERROR
- ETHERNET LOOPBACK ERROR
- DIAGNOSTIC NVRAM CHECKSUM ERROR
- SERVER PARAMETERS CHECKSUM ERROR
LEFT TO RIGHT TERMINAL CODE IS:
- TERMINAL PORT ERROR
- TERMINAL PARAMETERS CHECKSUM ERROR

** CODES FOR THE REMAINING TERMINALS
MKV85-1216

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 9 of 12)

DSIOO-29

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

DETERMINE THE ERROR
TYPE AND REFER THE
PROBLEM TO THE SERVER MANAGER

VI.

(SEE BELOW)

LOCAL -905- WAITING FOR IMAGE DUMP
LOCAL -906- DUMPING TO HOST *
LOCAL -907- IMAGE DUMP COMPLETE
LOCAL -912- LOAD FAILURE, TIMEOUT
LOCAL -913- FATAL BUGCHECK ** (INDICATES A SYSTEM CRASH)
LOCAL -914- TIMEOUT, DUMP ABORTED
LOCAL -915- TRANSMISSION FAILURE AFTER TEN ATTEMPTS

* HOST ETHERNET HEX ADDRESS IS DISPLAYED
MEMORY LOCATIONS, ERROR CODES, ETC. ARE DISPLAYED
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REFER TO THE DECserver 1 00 TERMINAL SERVER OPERATIONS GUIDE - APPENDIX A
MKV85-1217

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 10 of 12)

DSI00-30

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

VERIFY THAT THE SERVER AND TERMINAL
PARAMETERS MATCH

VII.

(SEE BELOW)

VII.

THIS INFORMATION CAN BE OBTAINED
BY ENTERING THE "PRIVILEGED"
SHOW TERMINAL "NN" COMMAND AT
THE "LOCAL>" PROMPT.

DETERMINE IF THE TERMINAL IS ASSIGNED TO
A "DEDICATED SERVICE"
AND THE SERVICE IS
AVAILABLE

DETERMINE IF THE TERMINAL "GROUP CODE"
MATCHES THE SERVICE
"GROUP CODE"

REFER THIS PROBLEM
TO THE SERVER
MANAGER

MKV85-1218

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 11 of 12)

DSI00-31

DECserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE THE DSRVA OR
USE IT WITHOUT THIS
TERMINAL PORT

USE DEFAULT PARAMETERS OR REPLACE
SERVER

EXIT

MKV85-1219

Figure 5

DECserver 100 Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
(Sheet 12 of 12)

DSIOO-32

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION

DECserver 200 TERMINAL SERVER
General Description

computers
to an 200
Ethernet
Loeal Area
Network
(LAN).
The DECserver
asYnchronoUs
terminal
server
connects up to eight terminals, printers, modems, and
The DECserver 200 allows any combination of eight locally attached devices access to each other and to
remote computer systems on a LAN. Each device is lOgically connected to the network.

(OSRVB-Ax)

lQ
" -------

Q#I7~g:E
----JI

DfC,.,yC( 200lDL

O-Of

OECserver 200/0L
(OSRVB-Bx)

Figure I

DECserver 200 Terminal Server

D8200-1

MKV87- 1266

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION
DECserver 200 Versions
The server is available in two versions (DSRVB-Ax and DSRVB-Bx).
•

DSRVB-Ax

DECserver 200/MC supports RS-232-C connections with full modem
control (MC).

•

DSRVB-Bx

DECserver 200/DL supports devices that require data-leads (DL) only for
operation.
NOTE
The letter "A" or "B" replaces the "x" in the model
designation to represent the following voltage
requirements.

Model

Input Voltages

DSRVB-AA
DSRVB-AB

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

DSRVB-BA
DSRVB-BB

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

Product Configuration
The DECserver 200 terminal server can be connected directly to an Ethernet network via an H4000
Ethernet transceiver or it can be connected to either a DELNI unit or Etherjack connector box.
STANDARD
ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER CABLES

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

DECserver 200/DL

DECserver 200/Me

lKG-0482

Figure 2 Standard Ethernet Connections

DS200-2

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION
The DECserver 200 terminal server can also be connected to a Thin Wire Ethernet network via a
DIGITAL Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) or it can be connected to either a DELNI unit or Etherjack
connector box.

ThinWire ETHERNET COAXIAL CABLE

DESTA

-+-TRANSCEIVER CABLES --===::====-+-I
DELNI
ETHERJACK

DECserver 200/DL

DECserver 200/MC

DECserver 200/DL

MKV87·1267

Figure 3 ThinWire Ethernet Connections

DS200-3

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECserver 200 terminal server:

•

DECserver 200 Technical Manual

•

DECserver 200 Software Installation Manual

•

DECserver 200 Management Guide

•

DECserver 200 User's Guide

•

DECserver 200 User's Reference Card

•

DECserver 200 Identification Card

•

Terminal Server Commands and Messages Guide

•

LATplus/VMS Service Node Management Guide

Software Components
The basic software that is required for the installation and operation of the DECserver 200 includes:

•

DECserver 200 distribution software to be installed on each load host.

•

DEC net Phase IV software to be installed on each load host (not required for ULTRIX
systems).

•

LAT service node software to be installed on all LAT service nodes that communicate with the
DECserver 200 devices.

The distribution software must be installed on a load host that runs DECnet Phase IV software. The
distribution includes an image file that is down-line loaded to the DECserver 200.
LAT (Local Area Transport) software must be installed on each node using devices connected to the
DECserver 200.
LAT software packaging is as (operating system) dependent.
•

VAX/VMS or MicroVMS OS Version 4.2 or later - LATplus/VMS is contained in the
DECserver 200 software kit.

•

ULTRIX-32/32M OS - LAT service node software included in the OS.

•

RSX-ll-PLUS or Micro/RSX OS - LAT software included with DECnet-RSX software.

•

TOPS-tO or TOPS-20 OS - LAT software included with as.

DS200-4

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION
Preinstallation Checklist
Verify that the following items are installed or ready to be installed:

Hardware
•

The appropriate network interface (that is; Ethernet junction box, DELNI, DESTA, or
Ethernet transceiver, and so on). See Product Configuration section.

•

Transceiver cabling (installed, tested, and tagged). See Cabling section.

•

All devices and cables that connect to the DECserver 200. A terminal or personal computer (in
the terminal emulation mode) is available for installation verification as per the DECserver 200
Software Installation Guide. See Cabling section.

•

The H039 wall/partition mounting bracket kit or H041-AA rack mount kit if required.

Software
•

DECserver 200 ID card complete and given to the system/network manager. See Arranging for
Software Installation section.

•

Distribution software installed on the load host(s). See Software Components section.

•

DECnet Phase 4 software installed as required.

•

LAT service node software installed as required.

Environment
•

Verify that power requirements and DECserver 200 voltage select switch setting is correct (100
- 120 Vac or 220 - 240 Vac).

•

Verify that operating temperature 5° to 50°C (41° to 122°F); humidity 10% to 95%; and
altitude 2.4 km (8000 ft) requirements are met.

Service
•

Optional service contracts are in place if requested.

Arranging for Software Installation
•

Fill out the DECserver 200 Terminal Server Identification Card - Order Number
EK-D200T-ID-001 (see Figure 4).

•

Give the ID card and any software to the appropriate manager (systems/network manager).

•

Label the terminal cables based on the location information from the appropriate manager.

•

Connect and power-up a terminal to port number one. Configure the console terminal for 9600
bits/s, no parity, and 8-bit characters.

DS200-5

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION

MODEL: DSRYB-A
SN:

111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

* A G 6 2 0 00 1 9 9 *

SERIAL

NUMBER

DECserver 200
Identification Card
The serial number ami Ethernet address uniqucly identify your DECs(:ryer 200 hardware unit. Pkase cop)' the information from your hardware: unit onto this card.
Include your name:, the dat:: of installation. and the location (for l'xampk'. office nUIllher, building. floor) of the: hardware unit. You should then give: this card to );our system/network m:lI1:lger at the same time as you hand ove:r the software: cartoll.
Serial
number
Ethe:rne:t
address
Location
Your name _'_ _- - - - - - - - - - - - - - D a t e _ _ 1__ /_ __

MKV87-1269

Figure 4 DECserver 200 Identification Card

DS200-6

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

PREINSTALLATION
INSTALLATIONS

UNPACK AND VERIFY ALL
COMPONENTS RECEIVED

VERIFY THE VOLTAGE
SELECT SWITCH SETTING

CONNECT THE TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

CONNECT POWER CORD

GO TO MAINTENANCE AIDS
SECTION TABLE 4

CONNECT DEVICE CABLES

• DETERMINE WHICH ROUTER CONNECTOR
TO USE FOR EACH DEVICE (Jl TO J8)
• MARK AND ATTACH TWO LABELS TO EACH
DEVICE CABLE, ONE ON EACH END
• ATTACH CABLES TO APPROPRIATE DEVICES
• INFORM THE ROUTER MANAGER THAT THE
INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE

MKV87-1155

Figure 5 DECserver 200 Installation Flow Diagram

D8200-7

DECserver 200 INSTALLATION

Verifying Operation

Proper operation of the server is verified by the status of the four LEDs on the server's control/indicator
panel.
Whenever power is applied to the unit, the server performs diagnostic self-test and indicates a request for a
down-line load of the server image from the load host. The server self-test normally takes about 20 seconds
to complete, but the down-line loading of the server image could take longer if the network is busy. Allow
up to two minutes for the self-test and down-line loading of the server image to complete. The D2 status
LED will be ON indicating successful completion of self-test. Refer to the Diagnostic and Maintenance
Aids sections for more information.

DS200-8

DECserver 200 CABLING

Maximum Cable Length
The maximum cable length from transceiver to server for the following cables is:

•
•

BNE3X-xx = 50 m (164 ft)
BNE4X-xx = 12.5 m (41 ft)

Table 1 Loopback Connectors for DECserver 200/MC or 200/DL
Part Number

Type

12-22196-01

Ethernet

12-15336-08

Port

H3101

Port

H3103

MMJ*

*Used with H3104 cable concentrator.
**Not supplied with DECserver 200.

DS200-9

Optional **

DECserver 200 CABLING

DECserver 200/MC
NON-LAT HOST
IOciI

E-.l

11111111111111111

DECserver 200/MC

TERMINAL

LKG-0328

Figure 6 Connecting Port Devices to the DECserver 200 fMC
Table 2 Device Cables
Cable Type

Description

For Connecting

BC22D

Null modem cable

Printers, terminals, and personal computers
that are not utilizing modem control signals
for operation.

BC22R*

Null modem cable

Printers, terminals, and personal computers
that are utilizing modem control signals for
operation.

BC22E or
BC22F

Modem cable

Dial-in or dial-out modems.

*Recommended for devices that use full modem control signals.
DS200-10

DECserver 200 CABLING
DECserver 200/DL
Table 3 H3104-B DECserver 200/DL Adapter Kit
Part

Item

BC16C-I0

10-foot, 36-conductor cable.

H3103

MMJ loopback connector.

H3104

Cable connector that has eight 6-pin modified modular jacks which accept BC 16E-xx
DIGITAL office cables.

DECserver 200/DL

CONCENTRATOR
BC16E-xx
DEC OFFICE CABLE

MKV87-1268

Figure 7

DECserver 200/DL Cabling (Sheet 1 of 2)

DS200-11

DECserver 200 CABLING

ETHERNET COAXIAL CABLE

DECserver 200/DL

~f------- BC16C-10 CABLE (36-PIN) Le:.

--cbr-.....--

H3102 36-PIN CABLE COUPLER
BC16CID CABLE

a~ H3106 36-PIN TO 50-PIN ADAPTER

6~
gfool...__--

25-PAIR 50-CONDUCTOR TRUNK WIRING
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

H3106 36-PIN TO 50-PIN ADAPTER

~"""--- BC16CID CABLE

t-_..J

I
I

TO DEC423 DEVICE
....
CI

~ H310136-PINLOOPBACKCONNECTOR&

IIal71sm312111 1111
H3104CABLECONCENTRATOR&
9
c::::J.-....- H3103MMJ LOOPBACKCONNECTORLe:.
H8571-A DEC423 TO
RS-232-C PASSIVE ADAPTER
(COMMUNICATIONS PORTS)

MIll

BC16E-xx DEC OFFICE CABLE

ClIII

H8572 6-PIN CABLE COUPLER

~H3105 DEC423 TO RS-232-C ACTIVE

CONVERTER

H8571-B DEC423 TO
RS-232-C PASSIVE ADAPTER
(PRINTER PORTS)

ALSO AVAILABLE (NOT SHOWN):
•

H8240 50-FOOT SPOOL OF UNTERMINATED
BC16E CABLE FOR CUSTOM WIRING APPLICATIONS.

•

H8241 CRIMPING TOOL FOR ATTACHING MMJs
TO UNTERMINATED BC16E CABLES.

•

H8220 PACKAGE OF 50 MMJ CONNECTORS
USED WITH THE H8241 CRIMPING TOOL TO
TERMINATE CUSTOM CABLE LENGTHS FROM
H8240 SPOOL.

PART OF H3104-B DECserver 200/DL ADAPTER KIT.

.& SHIPPED WITH EACH DECserver

200/DL UNIT.

DEPENDING ON THE DATA SIGNAL RATES AND CABLE LENGTH,
SOME APPLICATIONS MAY REQUIRE THE USE OFTHE H3105
DEC423 TO RS-232-C ACTIVE CONVERTER. SEE YOUR
DIGITAL SALES REPRESENTATIVE FOR MORE INFORMATION.
MKV87·1278

Figure 7 DECserver 200/DL Cabling (Sheet 2 of 2)

D8200-12

DECserver 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
The DEC server 200 diagnostic self-test performs a number of DECserver 200 hardware tests. The self-test
executes (and a down-line load occurs) whenever the DECserver initializes. The DECserver can be
initialized in a number of ways:
•

By powering up the server,

•

By executing the INITIALIZE command,

•

By executing a NCP LOAD command on a DEC net load host, and

•

By pressing <CTRL/P> if there was an error that prevented down-line loading during the most
recent self-test.

The 02 status LED on the control/indicator panel displays the results of the self-test.
•

If it remains OFF after the self-test, there is a fatal error.

•

If it blinks, there is a nonfatal error. For nonfatal hardware errors, an error message appears on
a terminal attached to the console port.

•

If it glows, the self-test detected no hardware errors.

DS200-13

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 4 Status LEDs
LED
Name

Name
Definition

State

Indications

Power ON/OFF

ON*

DC voltages correct.

OFF

DC voltages incorrect (see NOTE).

Passed self-test.

OFF

Fatal error (see NOTE).

Blinking

Nonfatal error.

ON*

Server image file successfully loaded.

OFF

Down-line load in progress.

Blinking

Multiple load failure.

ANY STATE*

Network active.

OFF

Network inactive.

Diagnostic

Software

Network activity

NOTE
Remove and replace the DECserver 200.
IMPORTANT
Allow two minutes for power-up diagnostic and
down-line loading (DLL) to complete. All LEDs
light for one second at power-on (lamp-test) time.
*Indicates normal condition after the two minute power-up diagnostic and DLL have completed.

DECserver· 200 Fault Conditions

Dl LED OFF - Power is not reaching DECserver 200.
•

Ensure that the voltage select switch is set to the correct voltage.

•

Secure the power cable at the server and at the wall outlet.

•

Check the wall outlet using another appliance or light, or plug the server power cord into
another outlet. If no power is available, check the wall outlet's circuit breaker.

•

Determine if the server circuit breaker has tripped. If it has, reset the circuit breaker. If the
breaker trips more than once, replace the server.

•

Replace a defective power cord with a new cord.

DS200-14

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
D2 LED OFF - Fatal error or test is in progress. If 02 remains OFF for more than 20 seconds after the
DI LED goes ON, there is a fatal hardware error. There is no corrective procedure for this problem.
D2 LED Blinking - If the D2 LED is blinking after power-up, the server has detected a nonfatal hardware
error during self-test. The following sections list the errors that occur in conjunction with the D2 LED
blinking on your display.

Error Messages 920 and 921
Local -920- parameter checksum error on port n
Local -921- factory-set parameters applied to port n
These messages indicate a port checksum error. The permanent characteristics for the indicated port do
not pass the internal checksum test. The factory-set defaults are in effect.
I.

Enter the DEFINE PORT command to reset the port characteristics to values of your choice.
Then reinitialize the server using the INITIALIZE command, or

Reset the server characteristics using the software Reset Switch CSl) on the back of the server.
Press and hold the switch IN while removing and reinserting the server power cord.

Error Messages 930 and 931
Local -930- server parameters checksum error
Local -931- factory-set server parameters applied
The server characteristics in the permanent data base are not operational. The factory-set defaults are
operating.
1.

Enter the DEFINE SERVER command to reset the port characteristics to values of your
choice. Then reinitialize the server using the INITIALIZE command, or

Reset the server characteristics using the software Reset Switch (1) on the back of the server.
Press and hold the switch IN while removing and reinserting the server power cord. If this
action fails to correct the problem, the memory used to store the characteristics is faulty. The
server must be replaced.

Error Message 932
Local -932- hardware revision level checksum error
The server's nonvolatile memory is faulty. There is no corrective procedure for this problem. The server
must be replaced.

DS200-15

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Error Messages 935 and 936
Local -935- service characteristics checksum error
Local -936- service has been disabled
The service characteristics in the permanent data base are not operational. The factory-set defaults are
operating.
1.

Enter the DEFINE SERVER command to reset the port characteristics to values of your
choice. Then reinitialize the server using the INITIALIZE command, or

Error Messages 941,942, and 950
Local -941- transceiver loopback error
Local -942- image load not attempted
Local -950- troubleshooting procedures should be followed
These messages indicate that there is a fault between the server and the coaxial cable.
1.

Check the transceiver cable that runs from the server to the transceiver, to the DELNI, or to
the Etherjack. Ensure that there is a secure connection at both ends of the cable. Check the
cable for damage. If damaged, replace the cable.

If the above action does not correct the problem:

Disconnect the transceiver cable from the server.

Plug the Ethernet loopback connector into the Ethernet connector on the server.

Initialize the server by pressing <CTRL/P> on the console terminal, or by unplugging and
reinserting the server's power cord.

Wait 20 seconds for the diagnostic test to complete, then observe the status of the D2
LED:
(1)

If the D2 LED continues to blink and the error messages reappear after the
self-test, the server is faulty and must be replaced.

(2)

If the D2 LED stays ON, proceed to the next step to isolate and determine the
faulty unit.

Unplug the Ethernet loopback connector from the Ethernet connector on the server.

Reconnect the transceiver cable to the Ethernet connector on the server.

Disconnect the other end of the transceiver cable from the DELNI, from the Etherjack, or
from the transceiver on the Ethernet coaxial cable.

Plug the Ethernet loopback connector into the transceiver cable.
DS200-16

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Initialize the server by pressing <CTRL/P> on the console terminal, or by unplugging and
reinserting the server's power cord. Wait 20 seconds for the self-test to complete.
(1)

If the D2 LED continues to blink, the transceiver is faulty and must be
replaced.

(2)

If the D2 LED stays ON, the faulty unit is the device the transceiver cable was
connected to (the DELNI, the Etherjack extension, the transceiver, or the
Ethernet tap for the transceiver).

If the above procedures do not correct the problem, the transceiver unit or transceiver Ethernet tap is
faulty. Remove and reinstall the transceiver in a new location. Initialize by pressing <CTRL/P> on the
console terminal, or by unplugging and reinserting the server's power cord. If the D2 LED stays ON, the
new Ethernet tap is working and the DECserver 200 will function properly. If the error messages persist,
the transceiver is probably faulty. Replace the transceiver.

Error Messages 943 and 944
Local -943- transceiver heartbeat error
Local -944- check transceiver type for heartbeat support
These messages indicate that a heartbeat signal was not detected by self-test. This does not cause the D2
LED to blink.
1.

The transceiver is an 802.3 compatible transceiver or a non-DIGITAL transceiver that was
made to conform to the Ethernet Version 1.0 specification. The signal is used in all DIGITAL
Ethernet transceivers. If this condition occurs on a DIGITAL transceiver or a DELNI, there
may be a problem with the transceiver.

If a non-DIGITAL (or 802.3) transceiver is being used, disable the server heartbeat detection
ability by defining the server characteristic (HEARTBEAT) as DISABLED>. Enter the
DEFINE/ST SERVER HEARTBEAT DISABLED commands.

If the above procedures do not correct the problem, there is a transceiver or transceiver cable problem.

No Messages on Console Terminal
•

The port to which the terminal is physically connected is not defined as the console port.

•

The console terminal is faulty.

•

The internal characteristics for the console terminal are not set up correctly.

D3 LED Blinking - Perform the following steps before proceeding with problem analysis:
•

Connect a terminal to port one.

•

Configure the terminal for 9600 bits/s, 8-bit character size, and no parity.

•

Press <CTRL/P> on the terminal. <CTRL/P> restarts the DECserver 200 self-test and DLL.

•

Terminal will display messages.

DS200-17

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Down-Line Load Starts and Then Fails
The following messages appear on the console terminal at various intervals:
Local -902- waiting for image to load
Local -903- loading from host host-address
Local-912- load failure, timeout
The load host does not contain a node data base for the server, or the load host does not contain the proper
node information.
Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal display and notify the server
manager.

Down-Line Load Does Not Start
The following messages appear on the console terminal at various intervals:
Local -902- waiting for image to load
Local -912- load failure, timeout
Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal display and notify the server
manager.
900-999 Console Messages - Messages in this section appear under one of the following circumstances:
•

When the INITIALIZE command is entered

•

When the server is powered up

•

When a fatal error occurs

These messages appear only on the console port device. Message codes are always enabled for the console
port device.

Nonfatal Error messages
Message Number 911 Appears
Local-911- Warning - Nonfatal hardware error detected server code XXXX, terminal codes nn nn nn nn
nn nn nn nn
XXXX Service Code Indication
1000 Ethernet heartbeat error
0100 Ethernet loopback error
0010 ECO/LANCE checksum error
0001 Server parameter checksum error.
Terminal codes [each nn indicates one of eight terminals]:
nn
10
01
00

Terminal Code Indication
Terminal port error
Terminal parameter checksum error
NO ERROR AT PORT

DS200-18

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Message Number 913 Appears
If message number 913 appears on the console port terminal, it means that the DECserver 200 detected an
internal fatal error (fatal bugcheck).
A software problem, or bug, is likely to cause only an intermittent fatal bugcheck on the DECserver 200.
The unit may operate for a period of time, and then fail. If there is more than one server on the Ethernet,
the problem may affect all units.
If the fatal error was a hardware error, the problem is probably isolated to one DECserver. The hardware
problem may be intermittent and only affect the unit occasionally.

Fatal Bugcheck Error Message
Local-913- Fatal Bugcheck PC=XXX, SP=XXX, SR=XXX, MEM=XXX, CODE=XXX
Contents of Program Counter
PC
SP
Contents of Stack Pointer
SR
Contents of Status Register
MEM= The illegal memory address of an addressing error or the address of the instruction that
caused the error.
CODE = The reason for the failure
Code 002 to OOC

CPU exceptions. CPU communication and instruction errors.

Code 011 to 032

Self-test bugchecks - Program ROM. Errors when mapping ROM.

Code 101 to IFF

ROM code detected errors during DLL or dump.

Code 200 to 300

System crash error codes.

Code 100

Memory parity error.

Code 400

Hardware watchdog timer expired.

For additional information, see the DECserver 200 Crash Code List section.

DS200-19

DECserver 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
DECserver 200 Crash Code List -

*** 68000 exceptions
002 Bus Error
003 Odd Address Error
004 Illegal Instruction
005 Zero Divide
006 CHK Instruction
007 TRAPV Instruction
008 Privilege Violation
009 Trace
OOA Line 1010 Emulator
OOB Line 1111 Emulator
OOC Other Exception

*** ROM code detected crash codes
101

IFF These should never appear while software is running; only during down-line load and upline dump.
*** Software detected crash codes
FE_CHK
FE_MERR
FE_INIT
FE_RBUFF
FE_XBUFF
FE_STK
FE_ULNK
FE_DELOC
FE_XCBAL
FE_CMD
FE_LOUT
FE_NVR
FE_OUTQ
FE_XMT

EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
FE~TS
EQU
FE_CCB
EQU
FE_ALLOC EQU
FE_OUTS
EQU
FE_HSB
EQU
FE_DUP
EQU
FE_IMAXC EQU
FE_NOCB EQU
FE_ASB
EQU
FE_EXSE
EQU
FE_RXSLF EQU
FE-XSMSG EQU
FE_ISPD
EQU
FE_MEV NT EQU
FE_MPAR EQU
FE_USER
EQU

$200
. $211
$212
$213
$214
$215
$216
$217
$218
$219
$220
$221
$222
$223
$224
$225
$226
$227
$228
$229
$230
$231
$232
$251
$252
$253
$260
$261
$290
$300

Code Checksum Error (Code Corruption)
Port Hardware Memory Error
Port Initialization Timeout Error
Port Receive Buffer Error
Port Transmit Buffer Error
Stack Value Error
Unlink Error
Deallocate Error
Unable to allocate XCB
Command Completion Error
Local Output Completion Error
NV-RAM Write Block Error
Entry on output queue with no slots
Transmit too long
Cannot find status
Ran out of CCBs
Allocation Error
Illegal local output state
Host service block with no NCBs found
Duplicate service/node names processed
T--IMAXC out of range crash
No node counter block when counter incremented
No NCB pointer in ASB
Existing session on reverse port
Retransmitted a message to ourself! (lB connects)
Excess messages to ourself (IB connects)
Invalid speed during table scan
Nonexistent modem event
Memory parity error detected
User-initiated crash (via CRASH command)

*** Miscellaneous error codes
100
400

Memory Parity Error
Hardware watchdog timer expired

DS200-20

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION
DECserver 250 ETHERNET BASED SERVER
General Description
The DECserver 250 Ethernet Based Server (Figure 1) is a six-line server. It provides the interface between
four asynchronous serial data communications channels and two parallel channels with an Ethernet or IEEE
802.3 local area network.
The DECserver 250 supports:
•

RS-232-C connection with full-modem control on port I

•

RS-232-C connection for terminals on port 1

•

RS-232-C connections for printers on ports 1 through 4

•

Digital Data Products parallel connections for printers on ports 5 and 6

Features
The DECserver 250 offers the following features.
•

Permits fast, easy connections between the devices attached locally to the server ports and the
remote devices on the network.

•

Manages device traffic and leaves computer systems more time for applications tasks.

•

Reduces and simplifies cabling required for connecting devices to a network.

•

Supports two parallel connected line printers.

•

Supports up to four serial connected line printers.

•

Supports a dial-in and dial-out modem on port 1.

CONTROL/INDICATOR
PANEL

VOLTAGE
SELECT
SWITCH

SOFTWARE RESET
SWITCH 81

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR

CIRCUIT
BREAKER
POWER CORD
RECEPTACLE
MKV89-0199

Figure 1 DECserver 250 (Rear View)
DS250-1

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION
DECserver 250 Configuration Rules
There are many different ways to configure the DECserver 250 as long as the transceiver cables, the device
cables, and the server power cable do not exceed the maximum length as described in Table 1, and that the
following constraints are observed.

Maximum length for the transceiver cable cannot exceed 50 m (164 ft). This maximum length
may be reduced due to the internal cabling equivalence of a device (such as a DELNI) that is
connected between the server and the transceiver, or due to the use of office transceiver cable.
a.

Cabling equivalence is a measure of the internal timing delay of a device, expressed in
meters of transceiver cable. This cabling equivalence must be subtracted from the 50-meter
maximum. For example; if a device has a 5-meter cable equivalence, then its maximum
allowable transceiver cable length is (50 m - 5 m) or 45 meters.

Office transceiver cable (BNE4x-xx), due to its smaller diameter, has a signal loss that is
four times that of the BNE3x-xx transceiver cable. Therefore, if office transceiver cable is
used, the maximum transceiver cable distance must be divided by 4. This means the
maximum office transceiver cable length allowed is 12.5 meters.

If the configuration includes a device, and the device has any internal cabling equivalence, this
should be subtracted from the 50-meter maximum before dividing by 4. For example; if a device
has a 10-meter cabling equivalence and is attached to its transceiver using office cable, then the
maximum allowable transceiver length is (50 m - 10 m)/4 or 10 meters.
2.

When connecting the server to a configuration that includes a DELNI, allow a 5-meter cabling
equivalence loss for the DELNI.

Maximum allowable lengths for device cables should not exceed guidelines set by RS-232-C
(EIA232) specifications. Parallel ports are limited to 9.1 m (30 ft) unless an LLFOI (Long Line
Fiber Optic Interface) Fiber Optic Long Line adapter is used.

Table 1 Maximum Cable Lengths
Maximum Cable
Length

From

Transceiver

Server

50 m (164 ft)
See rules 1 & 2

BNE3x-xx* transceiver cable

Transceiver

Server

12.5 m (41 ft)
See rules 1 & 2

BNE4x-xx* office transceiver cable

Device

Server

See rule 3

Depends on specific device. See the
DECserver 250 Hardware Installation/ Owner's Guide (EK-D250C-IN)

Wall outlet

Server

1.8 m (6 ft)

Server power cable (included in
DSRVP-xx country kit)

Cable Type

*BNE3x-xx transceiver cables and BNE4x-xx office transceiver cables can be interconnected. However, the
cable attenuation (signal loss) for the office transceiver cable is greater than that of the BNE3x-xx
transceiver cable by a factor of four. For example, 2 m (6.6 ft) of office transceiver cable is electrically
equivalent to 8 m (26.2 ft) of BNE3x-xx transceiver cable.
DS250-2

DECse"er 250 INSTALLATION
DECserver 250 Versions
The DECserver 250 is available in two versions:
Model

Input Voltage

DSRVP-AA
DSRVP-AB

100-120 Vac
220-240 Vac

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECserver 250 Ethernet server.
Title

Document
Number

DECserver 250 Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide

EK-D250C-IN

DECserver 250 Software Installation Guide (VMS)

AA-MH06A-TE

DECserver 250 Software Installation Guide (ULTRIX-32)

AA-MG92A-TE

DECserver 250 Management Guide

AA-MH07 A-TE

DECserver 250 Problem Determination Guide

AA-MG96A-TE

DECserver 250 Commands Mini-Reference

AA-NC53A-TE

DECserver 250 Identification Card

EK-D250T-ID

Terminal Server User's Reference Card

AV-HY69S-TK

Terminal Server Commands and Messages Reference

AA-LD83C-TK

DECserver 250 Rackmount Option Installation Guide

EK-DC200-IN

DS250-3

DECservel' 250 INSTALLATION
Hardware Components
The following hardware is required for a DECserver 250 installation.
•

DECserver 250 Ethernet Server

•

Country kit containing:
Power cord
DECserver 250 Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide (EK-D250C-IN)
DECserver 250 Identification Card (EK-D250T-ID)
Blank labels for cables
Ethernet loop back connector (12-22196-01)
Parallel loopback connector (12-15336-14)
Rackmount kit (H041-AA)

•

Serialloopback connector (12-15336-08)

•

Accessories Box(es)/Bags (The number of accessories boxes or bags depends on the options
ordered). Accessories may include:
Transceiver cables (straight end or right-angled end connectors)
Device cables
H4080 turnaround connector
Etherjack junction box (DEXJK)
Wall/partition mounting bracket kit (H039)

Software Components
DECserver 250 operation requires the following software packages.
•

DECserver 250 distribution software - Installed on at least one load host.

•

DECnet Phase IV software - Installed on at least one load host.

•

LAT service node software - Required on all LAT service nodes that communicate with DECserver 250 devices.

The distribution software must be installed on a load host that runs DECnet Phase IV software. The
distribution software includes a server image file that is down-line loaded to the DECserver 250. The server
image constitutes the server software that enables the server to perform its functions.
Table 2 Minimum Operating System Version
Operating System

Version

VMS
ULTRIX

V4.7
V2.0

DS250-4

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION
Equipment Placement
The DECserver 250 can be located in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms. The
DECserver 250 can be rack or wall mounted or placed on a desk or shelf.
Enviroomental Requirements
Temperature
Relative humidity

5° to 50°C (41 ° to 122°F)
10% to 95% (noncondensing)

Physical Descriptioo
Length
Height
Depth
Weight (unpacked)

49.3 em (19.4 in.)
11.75 cm (4.6 in.)
3l.2 cm (12.3 in.)
5.9 kg (13.0 lbs)

Power Requirements
The operating power range of the DECserver 250 is provided in Table 3.
Table 3 DSRVP Power Requirements
Version

Nominal
Voltage

Voltage
Range

Current

Frequency

DSRVP-AA
DSRVP-AB

120 Vac
240 Vac

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

1.0 A
0.5 A

50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz

DS250-5

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

SECURE DECserver 250
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK,
SYSTEM, OR SERVER)

VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE MANAGER
THAT THE DECserver 250
INSTALLATION SITE
MEETS SITE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE DECserver 250
BOX

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE DECserver 250
ACCESSORIES BOX

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DS250-6

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION

FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THE
WALL·MOUNTING
HARDWARE KIT

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 3)

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 3)

Figure 2 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DS250-7

DECsener 250 INSTALLATION

•
ARRANGE FOR
SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION

LOCATE SERIAL AND ETHERNET
ADDRESS ON BACK OF SERVER

FILL OUT THE DECserver 250
• IDENTIFICATION
CARD
•

GIVE THE DEC •• rver 250 IDENTIFICATION
CARD TO THE APPROPRIATE MANAGER

•

ASK TO BE NOTIFIED WHEN THE SOFTWARE
IS INSTALLED

CONNECT THE
SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL CABLE

SET VOLTAGE
SELECTION SWITCH
TO MATCH POWER
CORD VOLTAGE
(SEE FIGURE 5)

Figure 2 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DS250-8

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION

--{ :

ENSURE THAT THE TRANSCEIVER CABLE IS
CONNECTED AT BOTH ENDS
VERIFY WITH THE SYSTEM MANAGER THAT
THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETE

PLUG POWER CORD INTO
THE DECserver 250 AND
INTO THE WALL OUTLET

AFTER TWO MINUTES,
COMPARE THE STATE
OF THE FOUR STATUS
LEOs TO THOSE SHOWN
IN FIGURE 6.

GOTO
TROUBLESHOOTING IN
THE MAINTENANCE
AIDS SECTION

Figure 2 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DS250-9

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION

ENCLOSURE
BonOM

INSTALL

MOUNTING BRACKETS
INSTALLED USING
EXISTING SCREWS

MKV89·0458

Figure 3

Rack Mounting the OECserver 250

OS250-10

DECsener lSO INSTALLATION

=============:=Ij~

MKV89-0459

Figure 4 Connecting the Transceiver Cable

DS250-11

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION

FOR 1OO/120V OPERATION:
IF "240V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "'120V" IS

VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

\1)
-O,b

------------------------------FOR 220/240V OPERATION:
IF "120V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "240V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

~DI

MKV89·0183

Figure 5

Selecting the Operating Voltage

D8250-12

DECserver 250 INSTALLATION

··,t",·,··· -01

o = MAY BE ON OR OFF OR FLICKERING,

.:,:;, . -02

INOICATING NETWORK TRAFFIC.

.,.",:j,"'.. -03

-04
MKV89·0205

Figure 6 Status LED Indications for Proper Server Operation

DS250-13

DECserver 250 CABLING

t:abling
Before connecting the device connectors to the server, contact the server manager to determine if certain
devices were designated to specific ports on the server. Make a list that identifies the server and the server
port location for each device connected to the server.
Use the cabling flow diagram (Figure 7) to complete the cabling of the DECserver 250.

CONNECT ONE END OF
THE CABLE TO THE
APPROPRIATE DEVICE
(AS MARKED ON THE
LABEL)

DETERMINE WHICH
SERVER CONNECTOR
(J 1 TO J6) TO USE FOR
EACH DEVICE
B J-----------I~

MAKE TWO LABELS
FOR EACH CABLE

CONNECT THE OTHER
END OF THE CABLE
TO THE SERVER
CONNECTOR (AS
MARKED ON THE LABEL)

MARK EACH LABEL
WITH SOURCE AND
DESTINATION
INFORMATION

ATTACH ONE LABEL AT
BOTH ENDS OF EACH
DEVICE CABLE

C__

STOP_)

Figure 7 DECserver 250 Cabling Diagram

DS250-14

DECserver 150 CABLING

Dec7 ervt/Jtt

POR:1 ~~
7e("mi~/·t

~:It.t
J.

--(v",il1' .JIj

MKV89-0457

Figure 8 Connecting Device Cables

DS250-15

DECserver 250 DIAGNOSTICS
Self-Test Diagnostics
When power is applied to the DECserver 250, it performs a diagnostic self-test and initiates a request for a
down-line load of the DECserver image from the load host. All four status LEOs illuminate for 1 second
(lamp check) when power is first applied. Allow 2 minutes to elapse before determining the state of the
status LEOs.
Compare the state of the status LEDs on the server to those shown in Table 4 and follow the corrective action
indicated.

Table 4 Status LEDs/Indications
Corrective
Action

LED

Definition

State

Indication

Power ON/OFF

The server's dc
vol tages are correct

OFF

The server's dc
voltages are NOT
correct

Self-test passed

OFF

Fatal error or
test-in-progress

See Table 5

Blinking

Nonfatal error

See Table 5

Server image
successfully
loaded

OFF

Down-line load
in progress

Blinking

Multiple-load
failure

ON*

Indicates activity
on the network

Diagnostic

Software

Network
Activity

See Table 5

*May be ON or OFF or flickering, depending on the amount of traffic on the network.

DS250-16

DECserver 250 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting

Table 5 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom

Possible Cause

DI LED OFF

Power is not reaching the Ensure that the voltage select switch is set to the correct
DECserver
voltage for the country where the unit is being installed (see
Figure 5).

Corrective Action

Secure the power cable at the server and the wall outlet.
Check the wall outlet for power.
Determine if the server circuit breaker has tripped. If it has,
press in on the white button to reset the breaker. If the
circuit breaker trips more than once, replace the DECserver
250 unit.
Replace the defective server power cable with a new one.
The DECserver
is defective

Replace the DECserver 250 unit.

D2 LED OFF

A hardware
error has
made the unit
nonoperational

There is no corrective procedure for this problem. Replace
the DECserver 250 unit.

D2 LED
Blinking

Nonfatal error
in self-test

To isolate and diagnose the problem:
I.

Connect a console terminal to port 1 (J I) of the server,
then power up the terminal.

Configure the terminal to operate at 9600 bits/s with a
character size of 8 bits and no parity.

Unplug the server power cable at the wall outlet, then
reinsert it.

Read the error message that appears on the terminal
display. Find the error message in the Error Messages
section and follow the recommended corrective action.
If no message appears, refer to the No Messages on
Console Terminal section.

DS250-17

DECserver 250 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 5 Troubleshooting Chart (Cont)
Symptom

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

D3 LED
Blinking

Down-line load
problem

To isolate and diagnose the problem:
1.

Connect a console terminal to port 1 (Jl) of the server,
then power up the terminal.

Configure the terminal to operate at 9600 bits/s with a
character size of 8 bits and no parity.

Press CTRL/P on the console terminal keyboard to
restart the server self-test and start the down-line loading of the server image from the load host.

Read the message that appears on the terminal display.
Find the error message in the Error Messages section
and follow the recommended corrective action.

Error Messages
The following error messages may appear on the console terminal. These messages are associated with a
blinking LED D2 or D3.
NOTE
For server installation, the console terminal must be
configured to operate at 9600 bits/s with a character
size of 8 bits and no parity.
Local -920- Parameter checksum error on port n
Local -921- Factory-set parameters applied to port n
Problem - These messages indicate a port checksum error. The permanent characteristics for the
indicated port do not pass the internal checksum test. The factory-set defaults are in effect.
Corrective Action - Reset the server characteristics using the software reset switch (S I), located on
the server's control/indicator panel. Press and hold this switch in while unplugging and reinserting the
power cable. If this action fails to correct the problem, replace the DECserver 250 unit.
Local -922- Port hardware error on port n
Local -923- Port n has been disabled
Problem - These messages indicate a port hardware error.
Corrective Action - Replace the DECserver 250 unit.

DS250-18

DECserver 150 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Local -930- Server parameters checksum error
Local -931- Factory-set server parameters applied
Problem - These error messages indicate that the server characteristics in the server's permanent
database are not operational. The factory-set defaults are now in effect.
Corrective Action - Reset the server characteristics using the software reset switch (81), located on
the server's control/indicator panel. Press and hold this switch in while unplugging and reinserting the
power cable. If this action fails to correct the problem, replace the DECserver 250 unit.
Local -932- Hardware revision level checksum error
Problem - This error message indicates that the server's nonvolatile memory is faulty.
Corrective Action - Replace the DECserver 250 unit.
Local -935- Service characteristics checksum error
Local -936- Service has been disabled
Problem - These error messages indicate that the service characteristics in the permanent database
are not operational. The factory-set defaults are operating.
Corrective Action - Enter the DEFINE SERVICE command to reset the service characteristics, then
use the INITIALIZE command to reinitialize the server.
Reset the server characteristics using the software reset switch (S 1), located on the server's control/indicator panel. Press and hold this switch in while unplugging and reinserting the power cable. If
this action fails to correct the problem, replace the DECserver 250 unit.
Local -941- Transceiver loopback error
Local -942- Image load not attempted
Local -950- Troubleshooting procedures should be followed
Problem - These error messages indicate that there is a fault in the transceiver cabling between the
server and the coaxial cable.
Corrective Action - Check the transceiver cable to be sure the connection is secure at both ends.
Check the cable for any sign of damage. Replace the cable if it is questioned.

If this action fails to correct the problem:
l.

Disconnect the transceiver cable from the server.

Plug the Ethernet loopback connector (12-22196-01) into the Ethernet connector on the server.

Initialize the server by pressing CTRL/P on the console terminal, or by unplugging and reinserting the power cable.

D8250-19

DECsener 250 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Wait 20 seconds for the diagnostic test to complete, then observe the status of the D2 LED.
a.

If the D2 LED continues to blink and the error messages reappear after the self-test (within
10 or 15 seconds), the server is faulty and must be replaced.

If the D2 LED glows steadily, go to step 5 to isolate the faulty unit:
NOfE
When using the Ethernet loopback connector to
troubleshoot the DECserver 250, the D3 LED may
blink and messages 902 and 912 may appear on the
console terminal. This is because the DECserver 250
was disconnected from the network and an attempt
was made to down-line load the server image.

Unplug the Ethernet loopback connector from the Ethernet connector on the server.

Reconnect the transceiver cable to the Ethernet connector on the server.

Disconnect the other end of the transceiver cable.

Plug the Ethernet loopback connector into the transceiver cable.

Initialize the server by pressing CTRLjP on the console terminal, or by unplugging and reinserting the power cable.
a.

If the D2 LED continues to blink, the transceiver cable is faulty and must be replaced.

If the D2 LED glows steadily, the faulty unit is the device the transceiver cable was
connected to. Repair or replace the faulty device.

Local -902- Waiting for image load
Local -903- Loading from host host-address
Local -912- Load failure, timeout
Problem - These error messages indicate that the host system (addressed in the error message) failed
to complete the down-line load to the server.
Corrective Action - Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal and notify
the server manager.
Local -902- Waiting for image load
Local -912- Load failure, timeout
Problem - These error messages indicate that the load host is not responding to server down-line load
request within the allotted timeout period.
Corrective Action - Copy the error message exactly as it appears on the console terminal and notify
the server manager.

DS250-20

DECserver 250 MAINTENANCE AIDS
No Messages on Console Terminal
When there are no error messages on the console terminal, refer to Table 6 for possible causes and corrective
action.
NOTE
For server installation, the console terminal must be
configured to operate at 9600 bits/s with a character
size of 8 bits and no parity.

Table 6 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages
Possible Cause

Corrective Action

The port to which the console
terminal is physically
connected is not defined as
the console port.

Ensure that the console terminal is physically connected to port I (J1).on the server.

The console terminal is faulty.

Replace the console terminal.

The internal characteristics
for the console terminal
are not set up properly.

Reset the internal characteristics for the console
terminal.

DS250-21

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION
DECserver 300 TERMINAL SERVER
General Description
The DECserver 300 Ethernet terminal server (Figure 1) allows devices to communicate on an Ethernet local
area network (LAN). The DECserver 300 hardware supports the EIA-423-A electrical interface standard,
and connects up to 16 terminals, printers, modems, and computers to an Ethernet LAN.

Features
The DECserver 300 offers the following features:
•

Permits fast, easy connections between the devices attached locally to the server ports and the
remote devices on the network.

•

Manages device traffic and leaves computer systems more time for applications tasks.

•

Reduces and simplifies cabling required for connecting devices to a network.

•

Provides access to Digital host systems on the LAT network.

VOLTAGE
SELECT
SWITCH

PORT DEVICE
CONNECTORS
(1-16)
STANDARD ETHERNET
CONNECTOR

DISPLAY
SOFTWARE RESET
SWITCH (S1)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
POWER CORD
RECEPTACLE

STANDARD/ThinWire
SELECTOR SWITCH
ST ANDARD jThinWire
SELECTOR LED
ThinWire ETHERNET
CONNECTOR
LKC-2S65-88

Figure 1 DECserver 300 Terminal Server

DS300-1

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION
DECserver 300 Configuration Rules
There are many different ways to configure the OECserver 300 as long as the transceiver cables, the device
cables, and the server power cable do not exceed the maximum length as described in Table 1, and that the
following constraints are observed.
1.

Maximum length for the transceiver cable cannot exceed 50 m (164 ft). This maximum length
may be reduced due to the internal cabling equivalence of a device (such as a OELNI) that is
connected between the server and the transceiver, or due to the use of office transceiver cable.
a.

Cabling equivalence is a measure of the internal timing delay of a device, expressed .in
meters of transceiver cable. This cabling equivalence must be subtracted from the 50-meter
maximum. For example, if a device has a 5-meter cable equivalence, then its maximum
allowable transceiver cable length is (50 m - 5 m) or 45 meters.

If the configuration includes a device, and the device has any internal cabling equivalence, this
should be subtracted from the 50-meter maximum before dividing by 4. For example, if a device
has a 10-meter cabling equivalence and is attached to its transceiver using office cable, then the
maximum allowable transceiver length is (50 m - 10 m)/4 or 10 meters.
2.

When connecting the server to a configuration that includes a DELNI, allow a 5-meter cabling
equivalence loss for the OELNI.

OS300-2

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

Table 1 Maximum Cable Lengths
From

Maximum Cable Length

Cable Type

Transceiver

Server

50 m (164 ft)
see rules 1 & 2

BNE3x-xx· transceiver cable

Transceiver

Server

12.5 m (41 ft)

BNE4x-xx* office transceiver
cable

see rules 1 & 2
Wall outlet

Server

1.8 m (6 ft)

Server power cable (included in
DSRVP-xx country kit)

Server

RS423/
EIA-423-A
device

1200 m (4000 ft)
(4.8 Kbytes)

H8245 or H8246 (24 AWG,
4-pair, twisted-pair)

900 m (3000 ft)
(9.6 Kbytes)
300 m (1000 ft)
(19.2 Kbytes)
Server **

EIA-232-D
device

75 m (250 ft)
(4.8 or 9.6 Kbytes)

24 AWG, twisted-pair

15 m (50 ft)
(19.2 Kbytes)
Server **

EIA-232-D

15 m (50 ft)

BC16E

* BNE3x-xx transceiver cables and BNE4x-xx office transceiver cables can be interconnected. However,
the cable attenuation (signal loss) for the office transceiver cable is greater than that of the BNE3x-xx
transceiver cable by a factor of four. For example, 2 m (6.6 ft) of office transceiver cable is electrically
equivalent to 8 m (26.2 ft) of BNE3x-xx transceiver cable.
** May be extended using the H3105 active adapter.

DS300-3

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION
Configurations
There are many possible LAN configurations for the DECserver 300. Some of the possible configurations
are shown in Figures 2 through 4.

STANDARD ETHERNET
COAXIAL~ CABLE ____

TRANSCEIVERS

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

ETHERJACK
DEC server 300

DECserver 300

TRANSCEIVER CABLES

LKG-259"-B9

Figure 2 Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Configuration

DS300-4

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

~~TERMINATOR

~~T CONNECTOR
\..-CONNECTOR
ETHERNET CABLE

~ ~CONNECTOR
"

~T CONNECTOR
\..-CONNECTOR

____ ThinWire ETHERNET CABLE
DECserver 300

CONNECTOR

~T CONNECTOR
\..- CONNECTOR

____ ThinWire ETHERNET CABLE

VAXstation 2000

~~TERMINATOR

~T CONNECTOR
~CONNECTOR

lKG-25Q4-SQ

Figure 3 ThinWire Ethernet Standalone Configuration

DS300-5

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

DEMPR

VAXstotion 2000

ThinWire ETHERNET CABLES

DECserver 300

CONN~

TERMINATOR

T CONNECTOR
LKG-2595-89

Figure 4

DEMPR ThinWire Configuration

DS300-6

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION
DECserver 300 Versions
The OECserver 300 is available in the following two versions.

Model

Input Voltage

DSRVF-BA
OSRVF-BB

100-120 Vac
220-240 Vac

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the OECserver 300 Ethernet server.

•
•

DECserver 300 Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide

EK-A0366-IN

DECserver 300 Technical Description

EK-A0367-TM

•

DECserver 300 Software Installation Guide (VMS)

AA-NE45A-TE

•
•

DECserver 300 Software Installation Guide (ULTRIX-32)

AA-NE30A-TE

DECserver 300 Problem Determination Guide

AA-NE42A-TE

•

DECserver 300 Identification Card

EK-A0368-IC

•

Terminal Server Commands and Messages Guide

AA-HQ84A-TK

•

LAT Terminal Server Network Manager's Guide

AA-DJI8B-TK

•

LAT]] Server Manager's Guide

AA-BT77 A-TC

•

LATpius/VMS Service Node Management Guide

AA-HB28A-TE

OS300-7

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

Hardware Components
The following hardware is required for a DECserver 300 installation.
•

DECserver 300 Ethernet server

•

Country kit containing:
Power cord (DSRVF-BB only)
DECserver 300 Hardware Installation/Owner's Guide (EK-A0366-IN)
DECserver 300 Identification Card (EK-A0368-IC)
Blank labels for cables
Rackmount kit (H041-AA)
BNC T-connector (12-25869-01)
2 BNC terminators (12-26318-01)
Port (serial) loopback connector (H3103)

•

Accessories box(es)/bags (the number of accessories boxes or bags depends on the options
ordered). Accessories may include:
Transceiver cables (straight end or right-angled end connectors)
Device cables
H4080 turnaround connector
Etherjack junction box (DEXJK)
Wall/partition mounting bracket kit (H039)

Software Components
DECserver 300 operation requires the following software packages.
1.

DECserver 300 distribution software (installed on at least one load host)

DECnet Phase IV software (installed on at least one load host)

LAT service node software (required on all LAT service nodes that communicate with DECserver
300 devices)

The distribution software must be installed on a load host that runs DECnet Phase IV software. The
distribution software includes a server image file that is down-line loaded to the DECserver 300. The server
image constitutes the server software that enables the server to perform its functions.

Table 2

Minimum Operating System Version

Operating System

Version

VMS
ULTRIX

V4.7
V2.0

OS300-8

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION
Equipment Placement
The DECserver 300 can be located in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms. The
DECserver 300 can be rack or wall mounted, or placed on a desk or shelf. Regardless of where it is mounted,
it must be at least 45 cm (18 in.) above the floor. Allow for 15 cm (6 in.) of airspace around the server
air vents.

Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Relative Humidity

5° to 50°C (41 ° to 122°F)
10% to 95% (noncondensing)

Physical Description
Length
Height
Depth
Weight (unpacked)

49.3 cm (19.4 in.)
11.75 cm (4.6 in.)
31.2 cm (12.3 in.)
5.4 kg (11.9 lbs)

Power Requirements
The operating power range of the DEC server 300 is provided in Table 3.

Table 3

DSRVF Power Requirements

Version

Nominal
Voltage

Voltage
Range

Current

Frequency

DSRVF-BA
DSRVF-BB

120 Vac
240 Vac

100 - l20
220 - 240

1.0 A
0.5 A

50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz

DS300-9

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

SECURE DECserver 300
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPR lATE
MANAGER (NETWORK,
SYSTEM, OR SERVER)

VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE MANAGER
THAT THE DECserver 300
INSTALLATION SITE
MEETS SITE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE DECserver 300
BOX

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE OPTION BOXES
CONTAINING CABLES
AND ACCESSORIES

UNPACK, INSPECT, AND
VERIFY THE CONTENTS
OF THE COUNTRY KIT

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

DS300-1O

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THE
WALL-MOUNTING
HARDWARE KIT

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 6)

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 6)

FASTEN THE UNIT
TO THE RACK

MKV

Figure 5 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DS300-11

X4001

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

SELECT ThinWire
ETHERNET (FIGURE 7)

INSTALL BNC
T-CONNECTOR AND
BOTH TERMINATORS
(FIGURE 8)

CONNECT A CONSOLE
TERMINAL (FIGURE 15)

SET VOLTAGE
SELECTION SWITCH
TO MATCH POWER
CORD VOLTAGE
(SEE FIGURE 9)

Figure 5 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DS300-12

DECsener 300 INSTALLATION

CONNECT THE POWER
CORD TO THE SERVER

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING IN
THE MAINTENANCE
AIDS SECTION

BASIC HARDWARE
INSTALLATION
COMPLETE

Figure 5 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DS300-13

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

,
,

r?
I
I

¢
I

I
I

"'::::m:;
/
Jdj.~

:~'!
L'~TEN

UNIT TO RACK
(SCREWS NOT PROVIDED)

",,';,
\,~

'-CD

FASTEN BRACKETS USING
THE SCREWS PROVIDED

MKV89·0338

Figure 6

Rack Mounting the DECserver 300
DS300-14

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

FOR ThinWire OPERATION:
PRESS THE SELECTOR SWITCH
(THE GREEN LEO WILL LIGHT)

~CO,

LKC-2757-89

Figure 7 Selecting Thin Wire Ethernet

DS300-15

DECserver 300 INSTALLATION

INSERTING ThinWire
T-CONNECTOR

LOCKING ThinWire
T-CONNECTOR

T-CONNECTOR

'~~

TERMINA TORS

LKG-2758-89

Figure 8 Connecting the Thin Wire T-Connector and Terminators

DS300-16

DECsener 300 INSTALLATION

FOR 100!120V OPERATION:
SLIDE THE SWITCH TO THE LEFT
UNTIL "120V" IS VISIBLE

FOR 200!240V OPERATION:
SLIDE THE SWITCH TO THE RIGHT
UNTIL "240V" IS VISIBLE

LKG-2573-89

Figure 9 Selecting the Operating Voltage

DS300-17

DECserver 300 CABLING
Cabling
Before connecting the device connectors to the server, contact the server manager to determine if certain
devices were designated to specific ports on the server. Make a list that identifies the server and the server
port location for each device connected to the server.

The DECserver 300 can connect to either standard Ethernet or to ThinWire Ethernet. To select ThinWire
Ethernet, press the selector switch (Figure 10) and then apply power to the server. The ThinWire Ethernet
LED lights when the server is powered up.
To select standard Ethernet, release the selector switch and then apply power to the server. The standard
Ethernet LED lights.

FOR ThinWire OPERA TION:
PRESS THE SELECTOR S~TCH
(THE GREEN LED WILL LIGHT)

FOR STANDARD OPERATION:
RELEASE THE SELECTOR SWITCH
(THE GREEN LED WILL GO OFF)

~CO....

. ~

"-0,

~r>..
o

LKG-2574-89

Figure 10 Selecting Standard or ThinWire Ethernet

DS300-18

DECserver 300 CABLING
Connecting to Standard Ethernet - Proceed as follows:
1.

Power down the server.

Unlock the slide latch on the server's standard Ethernet connector by pushing it in the direction
shown in Figure 11.

LKG-2575-89

Figure 11

Unlocking the Slide Latch

Connect the transceiver cable (Figure 12).

LKG-2576-89

Figure 12

Connecting the Transceiver Cable

DS300-19

DECserver 300 CABLING
4.

Lock the slide latch by pushing it in the direction shown in Figure 13.

LOCK

ETHERNET
LOCK

LKG-2577-89

Figure 13

Locking the Slide Latch

Power up the server.

Verify that the standard/Thin Wire Ethernet selector switch is in the OUT position and the
standard Ethernet LED is ON.

DS300-20

DECser\'er 300 CABLING
Connecting to ThinWire Ethernet - Proceed as follows:
1.

Insert the T-connector into the BNC connector (Figure 14) at the rear of the server.

Turn the barrel of the connector clockwise to lock it.

Verify that the standard/ThinWire Ethernet selector switch is in the IN position and the
ThinWire Ethernet LED is ON.

INSERTING ThinWire
T-CONNECTOR

LOCKING ThinWire
T-CONNECTOR

LKG-2578-89

Figure 14 Connecting to ThinWire Ethernet

DS300-21

DECserver 300 CABLING
Connecting to a Serial Communication Line
To connect a serial communication line, insert the modified modular plug (MMP) into one of the 16 female
modified modular jack (MMJ) connectors (Figure 15). If a console terminal is to be connected, it must be
connected to port 1.
In a rackmount configuration, the server is connected to a patch panel using a OECconnect SER cable;
BC23P-1O (unshielded) or BC23R-1O (shielded).
NOTE
The BC23R-IO cable has ground tabs at the MMP
cable end that must be attached to the DECserver
300 earthing screws (see Figure I).

INSERTING MMP
CONNECTOR

))
LKG-2579-89

Figure 15 Connecting to a Serial Communication Line
OS300-22

DECserver 300 DIAGNOSTICS
setf-Test Diagnostics
When power is applied to the DECserver 300, it performs a diagnostic self-test and initiates a request for a
down-line load of the DECserver image from the load host.
NOfE
For self-test to successfully complete, the DECsener
300 must be connected to one of the following:
• An operational Ethernet segment
• ThinWire Ethernet port selected and fitted with
BNC T-connector and two terminators (supplied
with country kit)
• Standard Ethernet port selected and fitted
with optional Ethernet loopback connector
(12-22196-02)
Before power is applied to the DECserver 300, perform the following steps:
1.

Connect a console terminal to port number 1.

Configure the terminal for 9600 bits/So 8-bit character size, and no parity.

Remove and reinsert the server ac power plug.

Observe the seven-segment display (Figure 16).

When the server power cord is plugged in, the seven-segment display shows an "8", and the Diagnostic Dot is
on for approximately 0.5 seconds as a DISPLAY CHECK. The display then counts down from F to 5 as the
self-test diagnostics are run. If the self-test diagnostics are successful, the server attempts a down-line load of
software from the host. If the server is not connected to an Ethernet segment at this time, the display
alternates between "4" and "3" and the Diagnostic Dot remains ON (see Table 4).
NOfE
An alternating 4-3 display without an Ethernet connected, indicates successful completion of self-test.
If a fatal error is detected, the count stops and the code of the test that failed flashes. If a nonfatal error is
detected, the count continues and the Diagnostic Dot blinks. See Troubleshooting in the MAINTENANCE
AIDS section for more information.

NOfE
There is one exception to this sequence. If the sener
fails the Ethernet subsystem external loopback test,
the display stops at "9" and the Diagnostic Dot
blinks. The "9" on the display does not blink.

OS300-23

DECsener 300 DIAGNOSTICS

LKG-269J-89

Figure 16

The Seven-Segment Display

DS300-24

DECserver 300 DIAGNOSTICS
All segments and the Diagnostic Dot on the seven~segment display are initially turned on for approximately
0.5 seconds as a DISPLAY CHECK. Table 4 lists all other possible displays and their meaning.
Table 4 DECserver 300 Seven-Segment Display Codes
Display

System Status

Bootstrap test executing

RAM subsystem test executing

Interrupt subsystem test executing

Timer test executing

ROM subsystem test executing

Ethernet subsystem test executing in the internalloopback mode

Ethernet subsystem externalloopback test executing

Asynchronous subsystem test executing in the internal loopback mode

Reserved

System exerciser test executing

Requesting load

Requesting load backoff

Loading
Requesting a dump

Dumping

Rotating
Figure 8
Pattern·

Server software is executing

•

Diagnostic Dot** (Status as follows)
ON
OFF
BLINKING

•

No fatal errors
Fatal errors or self-test in progress
Nonfatal error detected

The rotating figure 8 pattern indicates normal operation .
The Diagnostic Dot is part of the seven-segment display.

DS300-25

DECsener 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting

Table 5 DECserver 300 Display and Indications
Corrective
Device

State

Indication

Action

Diagnostic
Dot

ON*

Self-test
passed

None required

OFF

Fatal error

See the DECserver 300 problems and
corrections section

Blinking

Nonfatal
error

See the DECserver 300 problems and
corrections section

OFF

No power

See the DECserver 300 problems and
corrections section

Display
failed

See the DECserver 300 problems and
corrections section

Nonfatal
error

See the DECserver 300 problems and
corrections section

9 and
blinking dot

Ethernet
error

Ethernet externalloopback failed

Blinking
F through 5

Fatal error

Remove and replace the DECserver 300

Load request

See the DECserver 300 problems and
corrections section

SevenSegment
Display

b~ckoff

Rotating
figure 8*

Server
software
executing

* Indicates normal server operation.

DS300-26

None required

DECserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Problem - Seven-segment display OFF
Corrective Actioo - Verify that the ac power is being applied to the unit. Remove and replace the DECserver
300 if the following items are not at fault.
•

The voltage select switch is set correctly.

•

The ac power being supplied by the wall outlet and DECserver 300 power cable is correct.

•

The server circuit breaker is not in the tripped position.

Problem - Diagnostic Dot OFF, seven-segment display is blinking F through 5
Corrective Action - Remove and replace the DECserver 300 unit.
Problem - Diagnostic Dot BLINKING
Corrective Action - Perform the following procedure to isolate and diagnose the problem.
1.

Connect a console terminal to port 1 of the terminal server. Power ON the console terminal. All
console terminals used for terminal servers are configured for 9600 bits/s, no parity, and 8-bit
character size.

Unplug and reinsert the server power cord.

Read the error messages that are displayed on the console terminal. If no error messages are
displayed (when using a working terminal), then the console port may be defective or undefined.

Problem - Seven-segment display always displays a 3
Corrective Actioo - Perform the following procedure to isolate and diagnose the problem.
1.

Connect a console terminal to port 1 of the terminal server. Power ON the console terminal. All
console terminals used for terminal servers are configured for 9600 bits/s, no paity, and 8·bit
character size.

Enter <CTRL/P> on your console terminal keyboard.

Read the error messages that are displayed on the console terminal. If no error messages are
displayed (when using a working terminal), then the console port may be defective or undefined.

DS300-27

DECserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Terminal Display Messages
The Initialize program outputs messages to a terminal connected to port 1 (see EXAMPLE 1). Messages
occur at 30 second intervals if no errors are detected by the self-test.
EXAMPLE 1 SUCCESSFUL LOAD
Local -901- Initializing DECserver [SERVER HARDWARE ADDR.-ROM-H/W REV]
Local -902- Waiting for image to load
Local -903- Loading from [EXTENDED DECNET ADDRESS]
Local -904- Image load complete
EXAMPLE 2 LOAD HOST NOT FOUND
Local -912- Load failure, timeout
EXAMPLE 3 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS PROBLEMS
Local -910- Image load not attempted, network communication error
Local -916- Illegal load image, load aborted
Local -915- Transmission failure after ten attempts
Up-Line Dump Messages
The following messages are displayed when the DECserver 300 requests an up-line dump to the original load
host. If the host does not support an up-line dump, a dump occurs to any dump host responding to the
multicast service message.
•

After requesting assistance from a dump host:
Local -905- Waiting for image to dump

•

After the up-line dump starts:
Local -906- Dumping to host [EXTENDED DECNET ADDRESS]

•

On completion of the up-line dump:
Local -907- Image dump complete

At completion of the up-line dump, the DECserver 300 enters the self-test program and reboots.
Timeout, Dump Aborted Message
The message "Local -914- Timeout, dump aborted" is displayed during an up-line dump.
Program control transfers to self-test at the completion of the up-line dump.

DS300-28

DECsener 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
LOAD or DUMP Failure Message
Local -915- Transmission failure after 10 attempts
•

The procedure is restarted for a down-line load.

•

During an up-line dump, the process is aborted and program control transfers to self-test.

Local -910- Image load not attempted, network communication error
•

The Ethernet loopback fails under self-test.

•

There are possible transceiver or cable problems.

•

Typing CTRL/P restarts self-test and down-line load.

•

Typing CTRL/P has no effect if the LAT software is successfully loaded to the server.

Nonfatal Error Messages
Local-911- Warning-Nonfatal hardware error detected server code XXXx, terminal codes nn nn nn nn nn
nn nn nn
•

Server status codes
XXXX Service code indication
1000 Ethernet heartbeat error
01 00 Ethernet loopback error
0010 ECO/LANCE checksum error
0001 Server parameter checksum error

•

Terminal codes (each nn indicates one of eight terminals)
nn Terminal code indication
10 Terminal port error
01 Terminal parameter checksum error
00 NO ERROR AT PORT

Image File Bad Message
Local -916- Illegal load image, load aborted
The down-line load process specified one of the following:
•
•
•

An odd memory address
The address of an interrupt vector area
A parameter load with an odd address

DS300-29

DECserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Fatal Bugcheck Error Message
Local -913- Fatal Bugcheck PC=XXx, SP=XXx, SR=XXX, MEM=XXX, CODE=XXX
PC=Contents of program counter
SP=Contents of the stack pointer
SR=Contents of status register
MEM=Illegal memory address on an addressing error or the address of the instruction that caused the
error
CODE=Reason for the failure (see Table 6)
Table 6 Fatal Bugcheck Codes
Code

Reason Failed

002 to OOC

CPU exceptions, CPU communications and instruction errors

011 to 032

Self-test bugchecks; program ROM errors when mapping ROM

101 to IFF

ROM code detected errors during down-line load or up-line dump

200 to 300

System crash error codes

100

Memory parity error

400

Hardware watchdog timer expired

Ethernet Failure Messages
Local -941- Transceiver loopback error
Local -942- Image load not attempted
Local -950- Troubleshooting procedures should be followed

DS300-30

DECserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Additional Tests
TEST PORT Command - The TEST'· PORT command is used to send a stream of ASCII data to a port.
EXAMPLE 4 shows the format used for the TEST PORT command.
EXAMPLE 4 TEST PORT COMMAND
TEST [PORT port-number] [COUNT n][WIDTH n] [LOOPBACK {EXTERNAL}] {INTERNAL}
PORT port-number

Specifies the port to be tested.

COUNT n

Specifies the number of lines in the data stream.

WIDTH n

Determines the width (in characters) of each line:
Range of 1 to 132 characters
Default of 72

LOOPBACK

Specifies that the data stream is looped back and checked for errors.

EXTERNAL

Loops the data back through an external loopback connector.

INTERNAL

Loops the data back from internal port hardware loopback.

In EXAMPLE 5, port 2 was tested in Internal Loopback mode from a privileged port.
EXAMPLE 5 TESTING PORTS IN INTERNAL LOOPBACK MODE
Local> TEST PORT 2 COUNT 10 LOOPBACK INTERNAL
Local -511- Test complete
720 Bytes written,

o error(s) detected

The display indicates that 720 bytes were transmitted and received without error.

In EXAMPLE 6, port 2 was tested from a privileged port in External Loopback mode, without the use of a
loopback connector.
EXAMPLE 6 TESTING PORTS IN EXTERNAL LOOPBACK MODE
Local> TEST PORT 2 COUNT 10 LOOPBACK EXTERNAL
Local -511- Test complete
720 Bytes written,

720 error(s) detected

The display indicates that 720 bytes were transmitted and none were returned.

DS300-31

DECserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

TEST SERVICE Command - The TEST SERVICE command in EXAMPLE 7 tests the communications
link between the DECserver 300 and a service node or port offering a service.
EXAMPLE 7 TEST SERVICE
TEST SERVICE service-name [NODE node-name] [DESTINATION port-name] - [COUNT nJ
[WIDTH n] [LOOPBACK {EXTERNAL}][
{INTERNAL}]
service-name

Specifies the name of the service to be tested.

NODE node-name

Specifies the name of the service node.

DESTINATION port-name

Specifies the name of the port on the service node.

COUNT n

Specifies how many buffers of characters are transmitted.

WIDTH n

Specifies how many characters are transmitted in each buffer.

LOOPBACK

Determines how the data is looped back; from an EXTERNAL
loopback connector or from INTERNAL port hardware. If LOOPBACK is omitted, the protocol software loops back the data.

TEST LOOP Command - The TEST LOOP command in EXAMPLE 8 can be used to test the physical
connections between your server and another Ethernet node.
EXAMPLE 8 TEST LOOP
TEST LOOP address! [HELP {TRANSMIT} ASSISTANT address2] {RECEIVEHFULL
addressl

Specifies the Ethernet address of the target node.

ASSISTANT address2

Specifies the Ethernet address of an assistant node.

FULL

Assistant node that relays outgoing and returning transmissions.

RECEIVE

Assistant node that relays transmissions returning to the server.

TRANSMIT

Assistant node that relays outgoing server transmissions.

DS300-32

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

DECserver 500 TERMINAL SERVER
General Description
The DECserver 500 is an Ethernet communications server connected to a maximum of 128 devices such as
host systems, terminals, printers, plotters, and modems. These devices (although they may not support LAT)
are then allowed to communicate on an Ethernet LAN with LAT devices. The LAN must employ
LAT software.
DECserver 500 Versions
The server is available in two versions (DSRVS-nx), where "nx" designates the particular model. The "n" in
the model number is an A or B, which specifies rack-mount or office. The "x" in the model number also uses
an A or B, which specifies the operating voltage of the server. Each style is factory equipped for either 120
Vac or 240 Vac operation. Table 1 lists the four basic models. Figure 1 and Figure 2 show controls, indicators,
and connectors found on a typical DECserver 500.

Table 1 DECserver 500 Model Designator
Model

Description

DSRVS-AA
DSRVS-AB

120 Vac Rack-mount model
240 Vac Rack-mount model

DSRVS-BA
DSRVS-BB

120 Vac Office model
240 Vac Office model

DS500-1

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

00000000000000000000000000000000000

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDODDODDD~uuD !P

MODULE
OK LEOS
ETHERNET SELFTEST LEOS

POWER ON/OFF
SWITCH
LED DISPLAY

rmOODOOOO

$e~e DODDDDDDDD[;~JDDO~ODOO
AC POWER
RECEPTACLE

MKV88-1212

Figure 1 Controls and Indicators

DS500-2

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

00000000000000000000000000000000000
-I DOODDDDDDDOOODDDDDDDDODDDDDDUOOOOOO

o
GENERAL PURPOSE PORT
LOCAL CONSOLE PORT

' - - - - CPU
MODULE
LINE CARD
CONNECTORS

!----

L......-_

ETHERNET CONTROLLER
MODULE

CXA 16 OR CXB16 LINE CARD

" - - - - - CXY08 LINE CARD
MKV88-1213

Figure 2 Line Cards, Ports, and Connectors

DS500-3

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION
Network Configuration
Configurations depend on the type and the number of line cards that populate the DECserver 500 backplane. Up to 128 ports are possible. Any combination of devices properly connected to the available ports are
allowed to communicate with LAT devices on Ethernet. Figure 3 shows a DECserver 500 network
configuration.

ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER CABLES
DELNI

ETHERJACK

DECserver 500
UODOODDDDDDDODDDODODODOOODODDDDDDDD
nDOODCDDDOOOODDOOOODDOOOOrnOODDDDDD

DECserver 500

MKV88·1214

Figure 3

Typical Configuration

DS500-4

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

Modular Hardware Description
Table 2 describes the modular DECserver 500 hardware.

Table 2 Hardware
Module

Description

System Unit

An office model or a 19-inch rack-mount model DECserver 500. Each model contains
a 120 or 220 Vac power supply, two fans, and a Q-bus backplane.

KDJ11-SB

CPU that manages powerup self-test and down-line load (DLL) of server software from
the host.
Provides communications between individual device ports and Ethernet LAN nodes.
Supports user services (multiple-session, intraport communications, on-line HELP, and
various diagnostic routines used to test server functions).

Ethernet
Controller

Performs all data and physical link layer functions.

CXA16

A two-connector line card that supports up to 16 DEC423 type port devices. Each
connector has eight full-duplex, asynchronous channels using data-Iead- only communications. A status LED on the card remains lit after self-test has successfully completed.

CXB16

A two-connector line card that supports up to 16 RS-422-A type port devices. Each
connector has eight full-duplex, asynchronous channels using data-lead- only communications. A status LED on the card remains lit after self-test has successfully completed.

CXY08

A two-connector line card that supports up to eight RS-232-C type port devices. Each
connector has four full-duplex, asynchronous channels using full modem control communications signals. A status LED on the card remains lit after self-test has successfully completed.

Bus Grant

Continuity jumper card used to fill vacant line card slots in the backplane and pass
priority control signals when a failed line card is removed.

DSSOO-5

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

Line-Card Vectors/Addresses
Table 3 lists the octal device addresses and interrupt vectors for line cards in slots 3 through 10. Figures 4
and 5 show the line-card switchpacks.

Table 3 Line-Card Device Address and Interrupt Vectors
Slot

Card

Address

Vector

3
4
5
6
7
8

LCI
LC2
LC3
LC4
LC5
LC6
LC7
LC8

17760440
17760460
17760500
17760520
17760540
17760560
17760600
17760620

310
320
330
340
350
360
370
400

9
10

MSB

LSB
7

DEVICE
121 1 20 119 1 18 117 1 16 115 114 13112 111 110 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 11 1 0 1 ADDRESS
, BITS
ALL FIXED AT 1
ALL FIXED AT 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 J l'

ALWAYSOPEN--------~~~--JL-J~~-l--i--1--i--1~

(DHU11 MODE)

DEVICE
ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK

CLOSE = 1

! f I

CARD 1 /
SLOT

"'9

"10

LC1

OPEN

LC2

OPEN

CLOSE 17760460

LC3

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

LC4

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

CLOSE 17760520

LC5

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE

OPEN

LC6

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE

CLOSE 17760560

LC7

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

LC8

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

CLOSE 17760620

SWITCHPACK SWITCHES

DEVICE
ADDRESS
17760440

17760500

17760540

17760600

LKG-l074-87

Figure 4

10-Position Address Switch Selection

DS500-6

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

MSB

LSB
VECTOR
ADDRESS
BITS

ALWAYS
OPEN
ALWAYS
CLOSED
4

INTERRUPT
VECTOR
SWITCH PACK

7
CLOSE

CARD 1
SLOT

4
5
SWITCHPACK SWITCHES

CLOSE = 1

VECTOR
ADDRESS

LC1

OPEN

310

LC2

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

320

LC3

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE

330

LC4

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

LC5

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

350

LC6

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

360

LC7

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE

370

Lca

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

340

400
LKG-l073-87

Figure 5

8-Position Vector Switch Selection

DS500-7

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION

DECserver 500 Software Installation Requirements
The requirements are:
•

DECserver 500 distribution software must be installed on the identified load host(s).

•

DECnet Phase IV software must be installed on the identified load host(s) (supports DLL, dumps,
and remote console operation).

•

LAT service node software must be installed on all LAT (Local Area Transport) service nodes
that communicate with the DECserver 500 over the Ethernet LAN.

Once identified, system hosts become load hosts only after the distribution software is installed and the
systems are running DEC net Phase IV software. The distribution includes an image file that is down-line
loaded to the DECserver 500.
LAT software must be installed on each service node using devices connected to the DECserver 500.
LAT software packaging is operating-system dependent as follows.
•

VAX/VMS or MicroVMS Version 4.2 or later - LATplus/VMS is contained in the DECserver
500 software kit.

•

RSX-IIM-PLUS or Micro/RSX - LAT software included with DECnet-RSX software.

•

TOPS-IO or TOPS-20 - LAT software included with operational software.

All service-node software on the LAN should be installed and running before the server becomes operational.
For more information see the DECserver 500 Software Product Description.

DS500-8

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DECserver 500 terminal server:

Title

Part Number

DECserver 500 Hardware Documentation Kit

EK-DECS5-KT

DECserver 500 Site Preparation Instruction Kit

EK-DECS5-SP

DECserver 500 Quick Reference Card

EK-DECS5-RC

DECserver 500 Problem Determination and Service Guide

AA-JD81A-TK

DECserver 500 System Technical Manual

EK-DECS5-TM

DECserver 500 User's Guide

AA-HU81A-TK

DECserver 500 User's Reference Card

AV-HY69A-TK

DECserver 500 Hardware Installation Guide

EK-DECS5-IN

DECserver 500 Software Installation Guide (VMS / MicroVMSj

AA-HS49A-TE

DECserver 500 Software Installation Guide (RSX-JJ M-PLUSj

AA-HS60A-TC

DECserver 500 Software Installation Guide (Micro/ RSXj

AA-HS61A-TC

DECserver 500 System Owner's Guide

AA-HY68A-TK

DECserver 500 Management Guide

AA-HU8 OA-TK

DECserver 500 Management Reference Card

AV-HY67A-TK

DECserver 500 Glossary of Terms

AA-KK21A-TK

DECserver 500 Identification Card

EK-DECS5-IC

Terminal Server Commands and Messages Guide

AA-HQ84B-TK

LAT Concepts Guide

AA-HY66A-TE

LATPLUS/VMS Service Node Management Guide

AA-HB28A-TE

DECserver 500 System Service Manual

None Listed

DECserver 500 Commands Mini-Reference

None Listed

DS500-9

DECserver 500 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram
Figure 6 is a flowchart that outlines the hardware and software installation steps for the DECserver 500.

HARDWARE
• INSTALLATION

SOFTWARE

t INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

t VERIFICATION

l
NOTES
• REFER TO THE DECserver Hardware Instal/ation Guide
•• IF BLANK SLOTS ARE LEFT BETWEEN MODULES ON THE
SERVER BACKPLANE, THE SERVER WILL FAIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC SELF-TEST. BECAUSE THE BUS-REQUEST
AND BUS-GRANT SIGNALS ARE PASSED FROM SLOT TO
SLOT BY THE MODULES, A BLANK SLOT PREVENTS
MODULES BEYOND THE OPEN SLOT RELATIVETO THE CPU
MODULE FROM GAINING CONTROL OF THE Q-BIJS.

t REFER TO THE DECserver500 Software Instal/ation Guide
fop. Sys.j

Figure 6

Installation Flow Diagram

DS500-10

DECserver 500 CABLING

Devices
The DECserver 500 can be connected to a number of current DIGITAL products and to various
non-DIGITAL devices.
The following are RS-232-C devices. More information can be found in the Software Product
Description (SPD).
DIGITAL Terminals
•
•
•

LAI2, LAI00, LA120
LA34, LA36, LA38
VT 100 and VT200 series

DIGITAL Personal Computers
•
•
•
•
•

VT 180 (in the VT 100 terminal emulation mode)
Professional 300 series
Rainbow 100 series
DEC mate I, II, and III
VAXmate

Non-DIGITAL Personal Computers (VT100 emulation)
•

IBM PC, PC/XT, and AT

DIGITAL Printers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

LA50, LAlOO, LA180, and LA110
LCPO 1 ink jet printer
LG series printers
LN01, LN03 laser printers with RS-232-C interface option
LPQ02, LPQ03
LXY12, LXY22
DECtaik

DECserver 500 supports asynchronous modems compatible with BELL 103J and 212A standards, and
modems that conform to CCITT Y.21, Y.21 bis, Y.22, and Y.22 bis. The following DIGITAL modems
supported in both dial-in and dial-out modes include:
•
•
•
•
•

DF02 (300 bits/s)
DF03 (300/1200 bits/s)
DFl12 (300/1200 bits/s)
DF124 (1200/2400 bits/s)
DF224 (300/600/1200/2400 bits/s)

The terminal interfaces listed, enable non-LAT host connections to server ports, providing non-LAT devices
with access to LAT and LAN.
•
•
•
•

DLl1, DLV11
DZ11, DHVll
DHll, DHVll, DHUll
DMF32, DMZ32

DS500-11

DECserver 500 CABLING
Device Placement
Table 4 lists the maximum allowable distance that a port device connected to the DECserver 500 can be
placed. The CXA16 line card supports DEC423-to-DEC423 standards. A passive adapter or an active
adapter can be used to convert from DEC423 to RS-232-C four-wire (see Figure 7). The CXB16 line card
supports the DEC422 standards.
Table 4 Maximum Distance Guidelines for CXAI6/CXBI6
4800
Bits/s

9600
Bits/s

19200
Bits/s

38400
Bits/s

DEC423 to DEC423

300 m
(1000 ft)

150 m
(500 ft)

DEC423 to RS-232-C
w/H3105A adapter

300 m
(1000 ft)

150 m
(500 ft)

DEC423 to RS-232-C

75 m
(250 ft)

60 m
(200 ft)

RS-422-A to RS-422-A

1200 m
(4000 ft)

Standards

A shielded male-to-male cable with 18 twisted pairs (TP) connects between the CXA16 or CXB16 line card
and the H3104 cable concentrator. The following are part numbers for the cables (see the DECserver 500
Hardware Installation Guide for more information).
BC16C-I0
BC16C-25
BC16C-50
BC16C-150

10 ft
25 ft (shipped with CXAI6/CXB16)
50 ft
150 ft

The six-wire cable, with MMJ connectors, is used between the cable concentrator and the device. The
following are part numbers for the cables.
BC16E-02
BC16E-I0
BC16E-25
BC16E-50

2 ft
10 ft
25 ft
50 ft

DS500-12

DECserver 500 CABLING

DEC423 CONNECTION
H3104
CABLE
CONCENTRATOR

BC16E-XX
CABLE

PASSIVE
ADAPTER 1

c:::J

H8571-A

RS-422-A CONNECTION
H3104
CABLE
CONCENTRATOR

BC16E-XX
CABLE

PASSIVE
2
ADAPTER

EIA-232-D CONNECTION
BC19N-XX
CABLE

BC22D·XX
CABLE

EIA-232-D terminals can be adapted to DEC423 by using a passive
adapter. Use an H8571-A adapterforterminals with a 25-pin connector.
Use an H8571-B adapter for terminals with a 9-pin connector.

RS-422-A terminals may require an adapter for MMJ to RS-422-A
connectors. (Not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation).

e::s

MKV88·1216

Figure 7 Connecting a Test Terminal to a Server Port

Ethernet Connections
Information on the transceiver cables can be found in the Communications Options Minireference Manual.
Port Device Connections
The DECserver 500 System Owner's Guide and the DECserver 500 Hardware Installation Guide provide
a complete list of order numbers for accessories, office cables, adapters, and connectors. The illustrations in
this section are from the guides and show how the DECserver 500 is connected to Ethernet and how the
various line cards are connected (Figures 8 through 15).
Table 5 lists the port numbers associated with each line-card slot. Figures 14 and 15 show a configuration
that uses CXA16 (CXBI6) and CXY08 line cards. Each line-card slot supports 16 ports. When a CXA16
or CXB 16 line card is installed in a slot, all of the 16 associated ports are used. A CXY08 line card in the
same slot, however, uses only the first 8 ports assigned to that slot.

DS500-13

DECserver 500 CABLING

DODDDDDODDODDDDDDDDDDDDDDDUDDDDDDDD
ODODDDDDDDDDDODDODOOODDDDODDDDDDDDO 0
CXB16 (RS-422-A)

CJo

CXA16 (DEC423)
LINE CARD

ODOODD D0 ~~
DDOOODODDDDDOODDO 0 I------J
0

BC16D-25
~ 36-CONDUCTOR

CABLE
/c',<'

~,/

H3104
CABLE CONCENTRATOR

MKV88-1217

Figure 8

RS-422-A or DEC423 Device Connections

DS500-14

DECserver 500 CABLING

CXA16
J2

J1
~------ BC16D-25 CABLE (36-PIN)

--~"'4__- - H3102 36-PIN CABLE COUPLER

BC16C/DCABLE

c::::J~ H3106 36-PIN TO 50-PIN ADAPTER

~
c:b"
9 . 4.- - - - -

~
r--.J

•

H8571-A DEC423 TO
RS-232-C PASSIVE ADAPTER
(COMMUNICATIONS PORTS)

BC16C/D CABLE

H3104 CABLE CONCENTRATOR

~ H3103MMJLOOPBACKCONNECTOR

MIll

BC16E-xx DEC OFFICE CABLE

c:::J ..

H8572 6-PIN CABLE COUPLER

0..-

H3106 36-PIN TO 50-PIN ADAPTER

~ H310136-PINLOOPBACKCONNECTOR

1/8/7/61514J3/2/11 I..

TO DEC423 DEVICE

25-PAIR 50-CONDUCTOR TRUNK WIRING
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

H31 05-X DEC423 TO R8-232-C ACTIVE
CONVERTER

DEC423 TO RS-232-C PASSIVE ADAPTER MIGHT BE REQUIRED.
USE AN H8571-A FOR 25-PIN CONNECTORS; USE AN H8571-B
FOR 9-PIN CONNECTORS. (PRINTER PORTS)

ALSO AVAILABLE (NOT SHOWN):
•

H8240 lOOO-FOOT SPOOL OF UNTERMINATED
BC16E CABLE FOR CUSTOM WIRING APPLICATIONS.

•

H8241 CRIMPING TOOL FOR ATTACHING MMJs
TO UNTERMINATED BC16E CABLES.

•

H8220 PACKAGE OF 50 MMJ CONNECTORS
USED WITH THE H8241 CRIMPING TOOL TO
TERMINATE CUSTOM CABLE LENGTHS FROM
H8240 SPOOL.

DEPENDING ON THE DATA SIGNAL RATES AND CABLE LENGTH,
SOME APPLICATIONS MAY REQUIRE THE USE OF THE H3105-X
DEC423 TO RS-232-C ACTIVE CONVERTER. SEE YOUR
DIGITAL SALES REPRESENTATIVE FOR MORE INFORMATION.

LKG-0880

Figure 9 DEC423 Accessories

DS500-15

DECserver 500 CABLING

CXB16

.....f - - - - - - - - BC16D-25 CABLE (36-PIN)
---,

Ofool4.--- H3102 36-PIN CABLE COUPLER

81. -4---.

~
6
8""'.......-* PASSIVE ADAPTER MAY BE NEEDED FOR
MMJ-TO-RS-422-A
SUPPLIED

CONNECTORS.
DIGITAL

$
r---.J

(NOT

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION).

9
Clr--------------J
PASSIVE ADAPTER
~
MIGHT BE REQUIRED

H31 06 36-PIN TO 50-PIN ADAPTER

25-PAIR 50-CONDUCTOR TRUNK WIRING
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

H31 06 36-PIN TO 50-PIN ADAPTER

BC16C/D CABLE

~ H3101 36-PIN LOOPBACK CONNECTOR

I 18 17 16\5141312 11 1 I...

TO RS-422-A DEVICE

BC16C/D CABLE

H3104 CABLE CONCENTRATOR

~ H3103 MMJ LOOPBACK CONNECTOR

4l1li

BC16E -xx DEC OFFICE CABLE

Cl ...

H8572 6-PIN CABLE COUPLER

PASSIVE ADAPTER
MIGHT BE REQUIRED

ALSO AVAILABLE (NOT SHOWN):
•

H8240 1000-FOOT SPOOL OF UNTERMINATED
BC16E CABLE FOR CUSTOM WIRING APPLICATIONS.

•

H8241 CRIMPING TOOL FOR ATTACHING MMJs
TO UNTERMINATED BC16E CABLES.

•

H8220 PACKAGE OF 50 MMJ CONt-JECTORS
USED WITH THE H8241 CRIMPING TOOL TO
TERMINATE CUSTOM CABLE LENGTHS FROM
H8240 SPOOL.

MKV88-1218

Figure 10 RS-422-A Accessories

DS500-16

DECserver 500 CABLING

'''"'0

L.....::::I~==~Fl~::::-----I

·TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

BC19N-12

U<G-1155-87

Figure 11

EIA-232-D Device Connection

DS500-17

DECserver 500 CABLING

lKG-0847-87

Figure 12 Connecting a BC 16D Cable to an H3104 Cable Concentrator

LINE CARD

CABLE
LATCHED
IN PLACE
CABLE

CD
Figure 13

LKG-l061-87

Line-Card Cabling

DS500-18

DECserver 500 CABLING

113-120

97-10481-8865-7249-5633-4017-24

121-128

105-112

1-8

89-9673-8057-6441-4825-329-16
LKG-0708

Figure 14 Maximum Port Numbering with CXA16 Line Cards

DS500-19

DECserver 500 CABLING

33-36

17-24

1-8

CXY08
LINE CARDS
LKG-0709

Figure 15

Mixed Line-Card Port Numbering

DS500-20

DECserver 500 CABLING

Table 5 Port Numbering
Item

LC-8

LC-7

LC-6

LC-5

LC-4

LC-3

LC-2

LC-l

Card Slot Range

113-128

97-112

81-96

65-80

49-64

33-48

17-32

1-16

CXY08 Line Card
Top Connector
Bottom Connector
Unused Ports*

113-116
117-120
121-128

97-100
101-104
105-112

81-84
85-88
89-96

65-68
69-72
73-80

49-52
53-56
57-64

33-36
37-40
41-48

17-20
21-24
25-32

1-4
5-8
9-16

CXA16 or CXB16
Line Cards
Top Connector
Bottom Connector
Unused Ports

113-120
121-128
none

97-104
105-112
none

81-88
89-96
none

65-72
73-80
none

49-56
57-64
none

33-40
41-48
none

17-24
25-32
none

1-8
9-16
none

* CXY08 line cards do not use the high-order eight ports of their line-card slot.

DS500-21

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic Self-Test Program
The server diagnostic self-test program performs two primary functions:
•

Tests the server hardware for failures

•

Initiates a down-line load of the server from a host computer if no hardware failures are detected

Additionally, the program supports the following functions:
•

A boot mode that allows the server software to be loaded when nonfatal hardware errors are
detected by the diagnostics. Nonfatal errors are errors that affect only the line cards.

•

The use of a local console terminal that enables users to interact with the diagnostic tests to
control the testing of specific server modules.

•

Maintenance Qperations Protocol (MOP) functions that enable the use of a remote console to test
server hardware, to load the server software, and to execute an up-line dump of the contents of
server memory to a designated host computer.

•

The continuous self-testing of the server to support manufacturing testing requirements.

•

A System Configuration Verification Program that automatically checks for a valid server
hardware configuration each time the server is powered ON or the BOOT switch is pressed.

•

An interactive System Configuration Assistance Program that helps the user verify that server
modules are properly addressed and installed in the correct slots in the server backplane.

DS500-22

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

Switch-Selected Diagnostic Boot Modes
The BOOT MODE select switch selects different modes. The modes are listed in Table 6. This switch
is a 16-position rotary switch (see Figure 16) located on the face of the CBU module. The unused
switch positions are reserved. For more information, see the DECserver 500 Problem Determination

and Service Guide.
Table 6 Boot Modes
Switch
Position

Boot
Mode

Normal boot, line-card errors allowed
Normal boot, no errors allowed
Local console, no boot
System Configuration Assistance Program, no boot
Installation testing, boot

1
2

3
7

NOTE:
Booting the server in a mode other than those listed will cause the server
to malfunction. Verify that the desired boot mode is properly selected.

POWER ON/OFF
SWITCH

00000000000000000000000000000000000
:j DODDDDOOODDDOODOODDOOOOOODDOOODDDDD

LED DISPLAY

II
0~

0000000000
000000000000000000000
"

GENERAL PURPOSE
' \ PORT(A2)
LOCAL CONSOLE
PORT (A1)
LKG-l080-87

Figure 16

Boot Mode Selection

DS500-23

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

To select and execute a boot mode, refer to Figure 16 and perform the following steps:
CAUTION
Use a small screwdriver to position the BOOT
MODE select switch; otherwise damage to the switch
will occur.
1.

Using a small screwdriver, turn the BOOT MODE select switch to the number that corresponds
to the desired boot mode. Table 6 lists the different boot modes.

Boot the server by pressing the BOOT switch.

Observe that the selected boot mode is displayed in the LED display for five (5) seconds and then
the server proceeds to execute the selected boot mode.
NOTE
The five-second delay allows time to select a different
boot mode.

Boot the server in Mode 0 or 1 for normal operation. These modes can be used for troubleshooting.
Each time the server is booted in one of these modes, the diagnostic self-test program executes the following
tests before requesting a down-line load of the server software.
•
•
•
•

System Kernel Test
Ethernet Citizenship Test
Board-Level Line-Card Test
System Configuration Verification Program

Boot Mode 0 - In Boot Mode 0, line-card faults are nonfatal and are ignored.
Boot Mode 1 - In Boot Mode 1, any hardware fault is considered fatal. When fatal faults are detected, the
server displays an error code in the LED display and does not request down-line load of the server software.
If the diagnostics detect fatal hardware faults in either Mode 0 or 1, the server displays an error code in the
LED display and does not request a down-line load.
Boot Mode 2 - Boot Mode 2 (Local Console), places the server under the control of the server firmware and
activates the server Console Commands Interface. Select this mode only when a local console terminal is
connected and when there is a need to control system testing for an extended period of time.
When booting the server in Boot Mode 2, the server executes the following tests automatically:
•
•
•
•

System Kernel Test
Ethernet Citizenship Test
Board-Level Line-Card Test
System Configuration Verification Program

If these tests complete successfully, the Console Commands Interface activates, the local console prompt
(Console» is displayed at the local console terminal, and control of the server is passed directly to the local
console port. The local console terminal can then be used to run more extensive diagnostic tests using the
Console Commands Interface commands.

DS500-24

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

In Boot Mode 2, the Remote Console Facility (RCF) is also enabled. While NCP commands are typically
used to activate a remote console, other facilities can also be used depending on the DECnet implementation
and the operating system. Once the remote console is activated, it can be used just like the local console to
execute Console Commands Interface commands.
When the remote console is activated, the following message appears on the local console:
Console>
Remote console activated, no input accepted for local consoles.
Console>
While the remote console is activated, the local console becomes an output-only terminal, and a copy of all
communications between the remote console and the server is printed at the local console. When the remote
console is deactivated, the local console is reactivated and the following message is printed at the local
console:
Console>
Remote console de-activated, input accepted from local consoles.
Console>
Boot Mode 3 (System Configuration Assistance Program) - This diagnostic program helps to verify that
the server hardware configuration is valid. This is particularly important when the server hardware is
upgraded, or when modules are replaced or are repositioned on the server backplane due to hardware failures.
When booting the server in Boot Mode 3, the server automatically executes the following:
•
•
•
•

System Kernel Test
Ethernet Citizenship Test
Board-Level Line-Card Test
System Configuration Verification Program

After completing these tests, the System Configuration Assistance Program must be executed. This program
performs the following operations:
1.

Prints a map of the server hardware configuration at the local console terminal.

Generates the address that corresponds to the selected slot number and prints the following
information when module slots are selected using the BOOT MODE select switch:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Selected module slot number
Device address
Vector address
Module type

If the slot is empty, or the module installed in that slot does not respond, the program prints
the following message:
THIS SLOT HAS NO UNIT INSTALLED.

DS500-25

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

Causes the MODULE OK LED on the module that responds to the address to blink. If the
module that responds is in a slot other than the slot selected, then the module should be moved to
the correct slot or its address must be changed. If none of the modules respond, then either none of
the modules have the address generated or the module having the address failed. If more than one
module responds, then two or more modules are set to the same address.
NOTE
When a module is removed from the server, another
module or a bus grant module must be installed if a
vacant slot is created between modules. The server
cannot be operated with a vacant slot between modules on the server backplane. If the server is powered
ON with a vacant slot, it will fail the diagnostic
self-test program.

To execute the System Configuration Assistance Program, proceed as follows:
1.

Connect an interactive terminal to the local console port (A 1).

Use a small screwdriver to turn the BOOT MODE select switch to position 3.

Boot the server using the BOOT switch and observe that the number 3 displays for five (5)
seconds in the LED display. If a different number displays, make sure the BOOT MODE select
switch is in position 3.

After a five-second delay, the System Configuration Verification Program addresses each slot on
the server backplane in ascending order (starting with the Ethernet controller module), momentarily lights the MODULE OK LED on each module that responds, and prints a configuration map
(see Figure 17) of the server configuration at the local console.

The System Configuration Assistance Program then flashes the LED on LCI in slot 3. If a linecard LED other than the one in slot 3 flashes, then the module is incorrectly addressed.
NOTE
Failure of the MODULE OK LED to blink can also
mean that the module is faulty.

To check the addressing of the other modules, turn the BOOT MODE select switch to positions 1
through A and observe that the LEDs on each module, except for the CPU module, flash
according to the information in Table 7. Additionally, as each module slot is selected, the server
prints the module slot number, the module device address and vector, and the module type at the
local console terminal. Any deviation from Table 7 or the printout in Figure 18 indicates an
addressing problem.

DS500-26

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

1
Slot - 3
177 60440 - 17760456
Slot - 4
17760460 - 17760476
Slot - 5
177 60500 - 17760516
17760520 - 17760536
Slot
6
17760540 - 17760556
Slot - 7
17760560 - 17760576
S10 t - 8
17760600 - 17760616
Slot - 9
Slot - 10 17760620 - 17760636
Slot - 11
Slot - 12
Press RETURN to continue
17772100
17772516
17773000 - 17773776
Slot - 2
17774440 - 17774456

EXP '" 310
EXP '" 320
EXP .. 330
EXP '" 340
EXP '" 350
EXP '" 360
EXP '" 370
EXP = 400
This slot
This slot

ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
has
has

'" 310 CXA 16 IN DHUll MODE

= 320 CXA16 IN DHUll MODE
'" 330 CXY08 IN DHUll
'" 340 CXY08 IN DHUll
'" 350 CXY08 IN DHUll
'" 360 CXA16 IN DHUll
'" 370 CXA16 IN DHU 11
'" 400 CXA16 IN DHUll
no unit installed.
no unit installed.

MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE

Memory Error Register
Memory Management Register #3
BOOT ROM
Ethernet, DEQNA Vector" 120
Physical Address: 08-00-2B-00-9C-IC
17776500 - 17776506
SLUl (alternate console)
17777520
Native Mode Register
17777546
Line Time Clock CSR, BEVENT '" 1
17777560 - 17777566
SLUO (main console)
17777572 - 17777576 Memory Management Registers 0, 1, 2
17777750 - 17777752 Maintenance Register
17777766
CPU Error Register
Press <CTRL/C) to leave Configuration Assistance Mode

l
MKV88-1219

Figure 17

System CAP Printout Number I

Table 7 Switch Positions for
Server Module Slots
Switch
Positions

Slot
Address

I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CPU
NET

LCI
LC2
LC3
LC4
LC5
LC6
LC7
LC8

9
A

DS500-27

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

Slot
is the CPU slot.
Slot - 2 17774440 - 17774456
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

17760440
17760460
17760500
17760520
177 60540
17760560
177 60600
17760620

17760456
17760476
17760516
17760536
17760556
17760576
17760616
17760636

Ethernet, DEQNA, VECTOR = 120
Physical Address: 08-00-2B-00-9C-1C
VECTOR = 310 CXA16 IN DHUll MODE
VECTOR = 320 CXY08 IN DHUll MODE
VECTOR
330 CXA16 IN DHUll MODE
VECTOR ... 340 CXA16 IN DHUll MODE
VECTOR = 350 CXA16 IN DHUll MODE
VECTOR ... 360 CXY08 IN DHUll MODE
VECTOR = 370 CXA16 IN DHU 11 MODE
VECTOR ... 400 CXA16 IN DHUll MODE

MKV88-1220

Figure 18

System CAP Printout Number 2

DS500-28

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS
Boot Mode 7 (Installation Testing) - This mode is intended for initial installation of the server hardware and
software. This mode is also used for troubleshooting. When the server is booted in this mode, the following
tests are automatically executed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

System Kernel Test
Ethernet Citizenship Test
Board-Level Line-Card Test
System Configuration Verification Program
Extended Ethernet Interface Test
Extended Line-Card Test
System Exerciser Test
Internal Loopback Test

On successful completion of the above tests, the server automatically initiates the loading of server software
by sending out an MOP Request Program message over the Ethernet LAN using the MOP dump/load
multicast address.
NOTE
Boot Mode 7 should not be used for normal operation. Because additional testing is done in this mode,
the server takes longer to boot. Therefore, to expedite
booting the server for normal operation, use either
Boot Mode 0 or Boot Mode 1. Boot Mode 0 is
recommended because it allows a remote console to be
used for troubleshooting when a line card fails.
Status and Error Codes LED Display
The LED display provides a visual indication of server status. It displays status and error codes that indicate
whether the server is operating properly or whether it has failed. In case of failures, the error code assists in
isolating the fault.
The codes displayed by the LED display fall into two general categories:
•

Diagnostic Status and Error Codes - These codes are displayed while the server self-test
diagnostics are running.

•

Software Status and Error Codes - These codes are displayed after successful completion of
server diagnostics and initiation of the down-line load request for server software.

Diagnostic Status and Error Codes - Status and error codes are displayed in the LED display (refer back to
Figure 16) while the server diagnostic self-test program is running. The codes indicate which test is currently
executing or has failed. Refer to Table 8 for an explanation of each diagnostic status and error code.
Server Software Status and Error Codes - The server software status and error codes are not displayed until
after the successful completion of the diagnostics and the initiation of a down-line load request for server
software. While the software is being loaded, the LED display indicates the load status. For example, the
LED display alternately flashes the letter B and the number 3 to indicate that a load host has responded to
the server's request for a down-line load and that the server software is about to be loaded.
After the software is successfully loaded, the LED display indicates that the software is running by
alternately flashing the numbers 0 and 8. If the software does not load successfully or fails after it has been
loaded, the LED display indicates the type of failure.
Refer to Table 9 for an explanation of each software status and error code.
DS500-29

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS
Table 8 Diagnostic Status and Error Codes
LED Display

Description SLASH (/) = ALTERNATING DISPLAY

STATUS CODES
Indicates that the System Kernel Test is running. The system kernel comprises the
CPU, ROM, and RAM on the CPU module.

1/2

Indicates that the Ethernet Citizenship Test and Board-Level Line-Card Test on all
modules except the CPU module are running.

l/C

Indicates that the System Configuration Verification Program is executing.

1/3

Indicates that the Extended Ethernet Interface Test is running.

1/4

Indicates that the Extended Line-Card Test is running.

1/5

Indicates that the System Exerciser Test is running.

1/6

Indicates that the server is under the control of the local console.

1/7

Indicates that the server is under the control of a remote console.

LED Display

Description

ERROR CODES

Indicates failure of the System Kernel Test.

E/2

Indicates failure of the Ethernet Citizenship Test or the Board-Level Line-Card
Test. If the Ethernet Citizenship Test fails, at least one of the LEDs on the Ethernet
controller module illuminates. If the Board-Level Line-Card Test fails, the LED on
the faulty line card extinguishes.

E/3

Indicates failure of the Extended Ethernet Interface Test.

E/4

Indicates failure of the Extended Line-Card Test.

E/5

Indicates failure of the System Exerciser Test.

E/C

Indicates that a software error has occurred within the diagnostic self-test program.

E/F

Indicates that a hardware configuration error was detected by the System Configuration Verification Program.

NOTE:
If error codes other than those listed in this table are displayed, reboot the server and observe the sequence of
status codes up to the point of failure.

DS500-30

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

Table 9 Server Software Status and Error Codes
LED Display

Description SLASH (J) = ALTERNATING DISPLAY

B/l

Indicates that the server is requesting a load host by specific address.

B/2

Indicates that the server is requesting a load host by issuing a multicast message.
The first host computer to respond becomes the load host for the duration of the
down-line load.

B/3

Indicates that the load host has responded and the server is requesting that the
software be down-line loaded.

B/4

Indicates that the software is being down-line loaded.

B/5

Indicates that the server software is initializing and is starting up.

0/8

Indicates that the software is running normally.

E/B

Indicates that efforts to down-line load the server software from a load host failed.

E/C

Indicates that a software error has occurred within the diagnostic self-test program.

Indicates that the server failed to successfully complete software initialization due to
an internal software problem or to an unsupported hardware configuration.

D/l

Indicates that the server has requested a specific host computer to serve as a dump
host.

D/2

Indicates that the server has issued a multicast message for a dump-host volunteer.

D/3

Indicates that server memory is being dumped to a host computer.

D/4

Indicates that server memory has been dumped to a host computer.

E/D

Indicates that efforts to dump server memory to a host computer failed.

DS500-31

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS
Module Self-Test LEDs
All of the modules have LEDs that indicate whether the Board-Level Line-Card Test executes successfully.
CPU Module
The CPU module board-level test checks the system kernel, that is; the CPU, ROM, and RAM. If a failure
is detected, the number 0 displays in the LED display.
Ethernet Controller Module
DEQNA, the Ethernet controller module, has three LEDs that are all turned ON when the server is
powered up or when the BOOT switch is pressed. The Ethernet Citizenship Test then turns OFF the LEDs
one at a time to indicate that the following events have occurred:
1.

The first LED turns OFF when the test starts running.

The second LED turns OFF after the module's internalloopback test executes successfully.

The third LED turns OFF after the module's externalloopback test executes successfully.

If one or more of the LEDs remain ON, it means that the Ethernet controller module has failed the test.
NOTE
If the Ethernet Citizenship Test fails, the server displays error code E/2 in the LED display on the CPU
module.
CXA16, CXB16, and CXY08 Line Cards
Each line card has a MODULE OK LED. The LED turns ON to indicate that the module Board-Level
Line-Card Test has executed successfully.
The effect that failing the Board-Level Line-Card Test has on the server depends on the boot mode. In Boot
Mode 0 (line-card errors allowed), the diagnostic self-test program issues a request for a down-line load of
the server software. In Boot Mode I (no errors allowed), the diagnostic self-test program does not issue the
down-line load request, but displays error code E/2 in the LED display on the CPU module.
Server Local Console Ports
The server is equipped with two local ports (refer to Figure 16).
•

The Local Console Port - An input/output port used to connect the local console. This port is
provided primarily for use during installation, maintenance, and reconfiguration of the server. The
server software considers this port to be port O.

•

The General Purpose Port - Operational only when the diagnostic firmware is running on the
server, but not when the server software is running. It is a backup port during diagnostic testing.
If the local console port fails, this port can be used for the same purpose.

DS500-32

DECserver 500 DIAGNOSTICS

Local Console Terminal
A local console terminal is used to monitor server events during the execution of the server diagnostic selftest program and to display diagnostic and software error messages. If the server fails, the local console
terminal can also be used for troubleshooting.
To execute an up-line dump of the server memory, refer to the DECserver 500 Problem Determination and
Service Guide.
To execute a dump using the CRASH command, enter the following commands:
Local> SET PRIVILEGED<RET>
Password> SYSTEM (Default password, not echoed)<RET>
Local> CRASH<RET>
Spares
The modules contained in the Field Service spares kits, and the loopback connectors applicable to the
DECserver 500 server, are listed in Table 10.
Table 10 Server Spares and Test Equipment
Spare/Equipment

Part Number

AC switch assembly
AC line filter
Backplane blank module cover (single width)
BCI6D-xx cable
BCI9N-xx cable
Bus grant module
Cable concentrator
CXA 16 line card
CXB 16 line card
CXY08 line card
DC fans (left or right)
DEQNA-SA Ethernet controller module
Ethernet 15-pin loopback connector
Fuse for the Ethernet controller module
H3101 CXAI6/CXB16 module/cable 36-way loopback connector
H3103 cable concentrator MMJ loopback connector
H3197 CXY08 25-pin cable loopback connector
H3046 CXY08 module 50-way loopback connector
KDJ 11-SB CPU module
Power cable (backplane to dc fans)
Power supply (120 Vac/240 Vac)

70-01469-01
70-23769-01
70-23981-01
N/A
N/A
M9047
H3104
M3118-YA
M3118-YB
M3119-YA
12-23609-04
M7504-PA
12-22196-01
N/A
12-25146-01
12-25083-01
12-15336-07
12-26964-01
M7554-PB
17-01360-01
H7868-A/H7868-B

NOTE:
Refer to the DECserver 500 Hardware Installation Guide for electrical schematics of the DECserver 500
loopback connectors.

DS500-33

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures
This section describes how to remove and how to install the server field replaceable units (FRU). In
cases where the installation procedure is different from the removal procedure, a separate installation
procedure is provided.
WARNINGS
The procedures described should be performed by
qualified service personnel only. DO NOT attempt to
remove any FRUs while server power is turned ON.
SAFETY REGULATIONS REQUIREMENT: Do
not apply power to the server unless all modules and
blank module covers are installed. The server must
not be operated with uncovered module slots.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage system components.
Use a grounded wrist strap (29-11762-00) and
grounded work surface when accessing any internal
part of the system.

DS500-34

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Cover Removal and Replacement
The office model of the server is equipped with front and back covers. All FRUs except the backplane are
accessed from the front of the server and, therefore, require only the front cover to be removed. To remove
the backplane, both covers must be removed.
Front Cover - To remove the cover, perform the following steps:
1.

Refer to Figure 19 and insert the antistatic key into the keyhole and turn it clockwise to the
STOP position (unlocking the front cover).

LKG-0941

Figure 19

Unlocking the Front Cover

DS500-35

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 20 and lift the cover up and then outward.

CD
LIFT

(?),
OUT

LKG-1055-87

Figure 20

Cover Removal

To replace the cover, refer back to Figure 20 and perform the removal steps in reverse order:
1.

Insert the antistatic key in the keyhole and turn it clockwise to the STOP position.

Position the front cover so that the door brackets slide onto the notches in the server frame.

Lock the cover in place by turning the key counterclock- wise to the STOP position.

DS500-36

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Rear Cover - To remove and replace the rear cover, refer to Figure 21 and perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver.

®
BACKWARD~~~~~

" , ':::'''''G

''''-''Q

"
CD'
' ' 'Q

REMOVE
,~CREWS

--------- :-"~ ",

LKG-1057-87

Figure 21

Rear Cover Removal and Installation

Remove the front cover as described earlier.

Remove the ten (10) screws (five on each side) holding the rear cover to the front of the chassis.
NOTE
The rear cover is bound to the top panel and side
panels. The four panels constitute the rear cover and
are removed as one piece.

To remove the rear cover, slide it backward about 2.4 cm (1 inch) to disengage the two buttons on
the top panel from the two slots at the top of the chassis.

Lift the rear cover up and away from the chassis.

To replace the cover, reverse the above steps.

DS500-37

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Module Removal
NOTE
If blank slots are left between modules on the server
backplane, the server will fail the diagnostic self-test.
Because the bus-request and bus-grant signals are
passed from slot to slot by the modules, a blank slot
prevents modules beyond the open slot relative to the
CPU module from gaining control of the Q-bus.
To remove a module, perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver.
1.

If the server has a front cover, remove the cover as described earlier.

Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Refer to Figure 22 and loosen the two (2) lj4-turn fasteners securing the handle to the card cage
by pressing in and turning in a counterclockwise direction.

V4-TURN
FASTENER
"-

RELEASE
LEVER

LKG-1076-87

Figure 22

Module Removal

OS500-38

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
4.

Simultaneously pull the upper and lower release levers outward to disengage the module from the
backplane. Gently slide the module outward and remove it from the server.

Put the module in a safe place.

If the module is to be returned to Digital Equipment Corporation, it must be properly packed
for shipping.

NOTE
If the module is to be replaced by a new module, use
the shipping container and packing material from the
new module to pack and ship this module.

DS500-39

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Power Supply Removal and Installation
To remove and replace the power supply, perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver
and a flathead screwdriver.
1.

If the server has a front cover, remove the cover as described earlier.

Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Refer to Figure 23 and remove the five (5) screws securing the metal ventilation plate (located
just below the modules) and remove the plate.

Figure 23

Ventilation Plate Removal

DS500-40

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 24 and loosen the two (2) fasteners holding the power supply to the
server enclosure.

LKG-1072-87

Figure 24

Power Supply Removal and Installation

Slowly slide the power supply out of the server.
CAUTION
The power supply is directly connected to the backplane. Remove it slowly to avoid damage to the
backplane connector.

To install the new power supply, reverse the above steps.
CAUTION
When installing the power supply, be sure that the
bottom and top edges of the supply are mounted in
the plastic guides in the card cage.

DS500-41

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
AC Switch Assembly Removal and Installation
To remove and replace the ac switch assembly, perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver, a
flathead screwdriver, and a small ratchet set.
1.

If the server has a front cover, remove the cover as described earlier.

Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Remove the power supply as described earlier.

Refer to Figure 25 and remove the three (3) screws holding the bottom of the ac switch assembly
to the server enclosure.

LKG-1059-87

Figure 25

AC Switch Assembly Screw Removal

DS500-42

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 26 and locate the three (3) bolts holding the ac switch assembly to the right side
of the server enclosure, and remove the nuts from the bolts.

AC
~~~~~--";~SWITCH

ASSEMBLY

\..-_ _ _ AC POWER
CABLE
LKG-1070-87

Figure 26

Removing the AC Switch Assembly

Disconnect the ac power cable from the plug on the ac line filter. The power cable is part of the ac
switch assembly.

Slowly slide the assembly out of the server.

To install the new ac switch assembly, reverse the above steps.
CAUTION
When installing the power supply, be sure that the
bottom and top edges of the supply are mounted in
the plastic guides in the card cage.

DS500-43

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
AC Line Filter Removal and Installation
To remove and replace the ac line filter, perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver.

If the server has a front cover, remove the cover as described earlier.

Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Refer back to Figure 23 and remove the five (5) screws securing the metal ventilation plate
(located just below the modules) and remove the plate.

Refer to Figure 27 and loosen the two (2) screws holding the left-most server panel in place, and
remove the panel.

~FASTENERS (2)

LKG-1071-87

Figure 27

Left-Most Panel Removal

DS500-44

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 28 and disconnect the ac power cable from the ac line filter.

LKG-1062-87

Figure 28

Unplugging the AC Power Cable

DS500-45

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
6.

Refer to Figure 29, remove the three (3) screws holding the ac line filter in place, and slide the
filter out of the server.

LKG-1068-87

Figure 29

Removing the AC Line Filter

To install the new ac line filter, reverse the above steps.

DS500-46

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Fan Removal and Installation
Two cooling fans are attached to a metal plate bolted to the bottom of the card cage.
To remove and install the fans, perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver.
1.

If the server has a front cover, remove the cover as described earlier.

Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Remove the ac line filter as described earlier.

Refer to Figure 30 and carefully disconnect the two (2) dc power cords from the fans.

[ 9t!.~
J

LKG-1060-87

Figure 30

Disconnecting the Fan Power Cords

DS500-47

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 31 and locate the two (2) screws that hold the fans in place, and remove them.

LKG-l064-87

Figure 31

Fan Removal and Installation

Lower the metal plate and remove the fans from the server.

Remove the fan(s) from the metal plate.

To install the new fans, reverse the above steps.
CAUTION
When installing the new fans, be sure the fans
are positioned so that the direction of the airflow is down. Each fan has arrows next to the power
connector to indicate the direction of fan
rotation and airflow.

DS500-48

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
~

CPU Module Installation Procedure
The CPU module installation procedure is made up of the following steps:
•
•

Module installation
Testing

Module Installation - Perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver.

Ensure that the server power ON/OFF switch is OFF and the power cord is unpluged.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Hold the module up to the CPU module slot with the component side facing the power supply.

Align the module with the card cage guides and slide it into the slot until it engages the
backplane. The module handle should be about a 1/4-inch from being flush with the Ethernet
controller module handle when it engages the backplane.

Simultaneously pull the upper release lever down and the lower release lever up to fully seat the
module. The module handle should now be flush with the Ethernet controller module handle.

Carefully press in on the 1/4-turn fasteners and turn them clockwise to secure the module.

DS500-49

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Testing - To test the CPU module to ensure that it is working properly, proceed as follows:
1.

Refer to the "Connecting A Local Console Terminal" section and connect an interactive terminal
to local console port AI.

Plug in the server power cord and set the server power ON/OFF switch to ON.

Observe that the CPU light emitting diode (LED) display illuminates.

Use a small screwdriver to set the BOOT MODE select switch to position 2 (Local Console
mode). The server allows five (5) seconds for a boot mode to be selected when the power
ON/OFF is turned ON; otherwise, simply press the BOOT switch after selecting Boot Mode 2.

Observe that the server executes the diagnostic self-test program and then alternately displays the
numbers 1 and 6 in the LED display to indicate that the local console terminal is activated.

Type the following commands at the local console prompt:
Console > Desel/test:all<RET>
Console >Sel/test:Sys<RET>
Console >Start/EOP: 1<RET>
NOTE
While the System Exerciser Test is executing,
the LED display alternately displays the numbers
1 and 5.

Observe the local console for error information. If the test passes, the message: "End of Pass I" is
displayed. If the test fails, the message: "n errors" is displayed (n equals the number of errors
detected).

DS500-50

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Ethernet Controller Module Installation Procedure
The module installation procedure is made up of the following steps:
•
•
•

Module preparation
Module installation
Testing

Module Preparation - Before installing the Ethernet controller module, the module jumpers must be
verified and the Ethernet address chip must be swapped with the Ethernet address chip on the faulty
Ethernet controller module.

Verifying Module Jumpers
The module is configured with three jumpers, WI through W3. When the module is shipped, the jumpers
are properly configured for the server. Use Figure 32 and Table 11 to verify that the jumpers are
properly configured.
Swapping the Ethernet Address Chip and Address Plate
The Ethernet controller module is equipped with an Ethernet address chip that determines the server's
Ethernet address. If the Ethernet address changes, the node database on each load host must be updated
with the DSVCONFIG procedure to swap the server's Ethernet address in the database. To avoid having to
do that, remove the address chip and the address plate from the Ethernet controller module that failed and
install that chip and plate on the new module.

ETHERNET
ADDRESS

CHIP
LKG-l079-87

Figure 32

Ethernet Controller Module

DS500-5I

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 11 Ethernet Controller Module Jumper Configuration and Functions
Jumper

Installed

Function Selected

WI
W2
W3

Yes
No
Yes

Device address (17774440)
Bus request holdoff timer (disabled)
Sanity timer (disabled)

Perform the following steps:
1.

Refer back to Figure 32 and locate the Ethernet address chip and the address plate on the
new module.

Refer to Figure 33 and use the chip removal tool supplied with the module to remove the chip.

®
LKG-1065-87

Figure 33

Removing the Ethernet Address Chip

Remove the Ethernet address plate from the new module.

Put the chip and the plate into an envelope and label it "new address parts." This prevents
confusing the new parts with the old parts.

Remove the address chip and the address plate from the old Ethernet controller module.

DS500-52

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 34 and position the old chip over the chip socket slots on the new module. Make
sure that the notch on the chip is on the correct side, and align one side at a time before pressing
the chip down into the socket.

®
LKG-1067-87

Figure 34 Installing the Ethernet Address Chip

Press the chip into place, being careful not to bend the legs.

Install the old address plate on the new module.

DS500-53

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Module Installation - Perform the following steps:
NOTE
This procedure requires a phillips-head screwdriver.
1.

Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.

Hold the module up to the Ethernet controller module slot with the component side facing the
CPU module.

Align the module with the card cage guides and slide it into the slot until it engages the
backplane. The module handle should be about a 1/4-inch from being flush with the CPU module
handle when it engages the backplane.

Simultaneously pull the upper release lever down and the lower release lever up to fully seat the
module. The module handle should now be flush with the CPU handle.

Carefully press in on the 1/4-turn fasteners and turn them clockwise to secure the module.

Refer to Figure 35 and, if necessary, unlock the slide latch on the Ethernet connector, install the
transceiver cable, and lock the slide latch.

Tug gently on the transceiver cable to be sure it is securely connected.

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

®
LKG-1075-87

Figure 35

Installing the Transceiver Cable

DS500-S4

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Testing - Perform the following tests to verify that the Ethernet controller module and the server are
operating properly.
NOTE
In order to successfully run the Ethernet Citizenship
Test, the server must be connected to an operational
Ethernet transceiver, or an Ethernet loopback
connector must be installed on the Ethernet
controller module.

LED Checks
The Ethernet controller module has three LEDs that indicate the results of the Ethernet diagnostic tests
(see Figure 36). Table 12 defines the LED indications.

00000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000

0000000000
000000000000000000000

ETHERNET
CONTROLLER
MODULE
LEOs

DBJ 0

LKG-0550

Figure 36

Ethernet Controller Module LEDs

DS500-55

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 12 Ethernet Controller Module LED Indications
LED 1

LED 2

LED 3

Definition

OFF

The module passed the Ethernet Citizenship Test.

OFF

Transceiver, Ethernet, or cable error.

OFF

Module internal error.

Cannot load boot/diagnostic ROM contents, the bootstrap has not
yet executed, or the first set-up message frame has failed.

Test Procedure
To test the module:

Refer to the "Connecting A Local Console Terminal" section and connect an interactive terminal
to local console port (Al).

Plug in the server power cord and set the server power ON/OFF switch to ON.

Observe that all three LEOs on the Ethernet controller module turn ON within 1 second after the
power is turned ON.

Observe that the server executes the diagnostic self-test program and then alternately displays the
numbers 1 and 6 in the LED display to indicate that the local console terminal is activated.

Type the following commands at the local console prompt:
Console >Drop/units:all<RET>
Console >Add/units:NET<RET>
Console > Desel/test:all<RET>
Console >Sel/test:Eth<RET>
Console >Start/EOP: 1<RET>
NOTE
While the Extended Ethernet Interface Test is
executing, the LED display alternately displays the
numbers 1 and 3.

Observe the local console for error information. If the test passes, the message: "End of Pass 1" is
displayed. If the test fails, the message: "n errors" is displayed (n equals the number of errors
detected).

DS500-56

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Line-Card Installation Procedure

The following sections describe how to install the CXAI6, the CXBI6, and the CXY08 line cards. The
procedure is made up of the following steps:
•
•
•

Module preparation
Module installation
Testing

Module Preparation - The module device address and interrupt vector must be set before the module is
installed. Each module is factory set to a device octal address of 17760440 and an octal interrupt vector of
300. For the module to operate properly in the server, however, the device address and interrupt vector must
be set according to the line-card slot selected to house the module.

To set the addresses:
1.

Refer to Table 13 and determine the proper device address and the interrupt vector.

Table 13 Line Card Device Octal Addresses
and Interrupt Vectors
Slot

Device Address

Interrupt Vector

LCI
LC2
LC3
LC4
LC5
LC6
LC7
LC8

17760440
17760460
17760500
17760520
17760540
17760560
17760600
17760620

310
320
330
340
350
360
370
400

DS500-57

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
2.

Refer to Figure 37 and locate the two (2) switchpacks.

mmm~~m~mm~

-------OPEN - - - - - - \

DEVICE ADDRESS
SWITCHPACK

\
\

"",,,-__J_,_ .......1

LED

I
\

/
\

,
r~

r., /

r-,

L-1/
I

LJ,IIffIIEHD"
I

L...J

mmm r --, r

II
Wr::::sl C=W

"I
',L ..J L --I
\

\
\

\
\
\
\
\

INTERRUPT VECTOR
SWITCHPACK

\
\

2345678

mmmmmmmm

- - - - - OPEN - - - - LKG-0551

Figure 37

Line-Card Switch pack Locations

DS500-58

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 38 and use the lO-position switchpack to set the device address.

MSB

LSB
7

121 1 20 119118 117116 115 114

ALWAYSA~~~I~E_D_A_T_1

DEVICE
ADDRESS
BITS

13112 111 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3

_ _ _....
,

! 1 l! J J 1 1\

ALL FIXED AT 0

(DHU11 MODE)
DEVICE
ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK

CLOSE=1

CARD
SLOT

DEVICE
ADDRESS

SWITCHPACK SWITCHES

LC1

OPEN

17760440

LC2

OPEN

CLOSE 17760460

LC3

OPEN

LC4

OPEN

17760520

LC5

OPEN

17760540

LC6

OPEN

CLOSE 17760560

LC7

OPEN

LC8

OPEN

CLOSE 17760620

17760500

17760600

LKG-1 074-87

Figure 38

Line-Card Device Address Selection Guide

DS500-59

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 39 and use the 8-position switchpack to set the interrupt vector.

MSB

LSB
VECTOR
ADDRESS
BITS

ALWAYS
OPEN
ALWAYS
CLOSED
6

INTERRUPT
VECTOR
SWITCH PACK

7
CLOSE

CARD 1
SLOT

CLOSE = 1

SWITCH PACK SWITCHES

VECTOR
ADDRESS

LC1

LC2

OPEN

LC3

OPEN

LC4

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

340

LC5

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

350

LC6

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

360

LC7

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE

370

Lca

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

OPEN

310

OPEN

CLOSE OPEN

320

OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE

330

OPEN

400
LKG-l073-87

Figure 39

Line-Card Interrupt Vector Selection Guide

DS500-60

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Module Installation - Perform the following steps:
CAUTION
Be careful not to snag module components on the
card guides or the adjacent modules. Ensure that an
antistatic wrist strap is being worn.
Set the server power ON/OFF switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD: Do not remove
or replace any FRUs with power applied to the server.
2.

Hold the module up to the appropriate line-card slot with the component side facing the CPU
module.

Align the module with the card cage guides and slide it into the slot until it engages the
backplane. The module handle should be about a 1/4-inch from being flush with the adjacent
line-card handle when it engages the backplane.

4.
I

Simultaneously pull the upper release lever down and the lower release lever up to fully seat the
module. The module handle should now be flush with the adjacent line card.

Carefully press in on the 1/4-turn fasteners and turn them clockwise to secure the module.

Refer to Figure 40 and reconnect the appropriate line- card cable to the lower line-card connector.
LINE CARD

CABLE
LATCHED
IN PLACE

CABLE

LKG-l061-87

Figure 40 Connecting the Line-Card Cable

Lock the connector in place using the line-card bail latches.

Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to install the upper line-card cable.

DS500-61

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Testing - To test the line card to ensure that it is working properly, proceed as follows:
1.

Refer to the "Connecting A Local Console Terminal" section and connect a console terminal to
the server local console port (AI).

Plug in the server power cord and set the server power ON/OFF switch to ON.

Use a small screwdriver to set the BOOT MODE select switch to position 3 (System Configuration Assistance Program). The server allows five (5) seconds for a boot mode to be selected when
the power ON/OFF is turned ON; otherwise, simply press the BOOT switch after selecting Boot
Mode 3.
Observe that the server executes the diagnostic self-test program, that the LED display constantly
displays the number 3, and that a configuration map is printed out at the local console terminal.

Check the configuration map to ensure that the line card's device address and interrupt vector are
set correctly.

Use a small screwdriver to set the BOOT MODE select switch to position 2 (Local Console mode)
and press the BOOT switch.

Observe that the server executes the diagnostic self-test program and then alternately displays the
numbers 1 and 6 in the LED display to indicate that the local console terminal is activated.

Type the following commands at the local console prompt:
Console >Drop/units:all<RET>
Console >Add/units:LCn<RET>
Console >Desel/test:all<RET>
Console >Sel/test:Asy<RET>
Console >Start/EOP: 1<RET>
NOTE
The "n" in LCn represents the line-card slot number.
While the Asynchronous Test is executing, the LED
display alternately displays numbers 1 and 4.

DS500-62

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Connecting a Local Console Terminal
The console terminal must be RS-232-C (or DEC423) compatible. If possible, the console terminal should be
a hard-copy terminal, such as an LA 100 or an LA36 terminal and so on. If a hard-copy terminal is not
available, a video (soft copy) terminal (such as a VT100 terminal) can be used.

DECserver 500 SYSTEM

0000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000

CPU MODULE
LOCAL CONSOLE
PORT
BC16E-xx
CONSOLE CABLE

LKG-085o-S7

Figure 41

Connecting a Console Terminal

DS500-63

DECserver 500 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Refer to Figure 41 and perform the following steps to comlect the terminal to the server local console port
(Al).
1.

Connect a BCI6E-xx console cable to the local console port on the CPU module.

Connect the other end of the console cable to the communications port of the terminal.

A passive adapter can be used to adapt the communications connector to the BCI6E-xx cable. Use an
H8571-A adapter for 25-pin connectors and an H8571-B adapter for 9-pin connectors.
3.

Configure terminal communications parameters to match the console port default parameters
identified in Table 14.

Table 14 Console Port Default Parameters
Parameter

Default Value

Character size
Parity
Speed

8
None
9600

DS500-64

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

DECserver 550 TERMINAL SERVER
General Description
The DECserver 550 is a high-end, Ethernet based terminal server that can be used to connect terminals,
printers, modems, personal computers, and host computers to an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 local area network.
The DECserver 550 can support connections of host computers to its serial data communication interface
modules.
The DEC server 550 is compatible with Ethernet Specification V2.0 and supports communications with
asynchronous port devices that are compatible with the DEC423, RS-422, and RS-232-CjCCITT
V.24jY.28 signaling specifications.
NOTE
Refer to the DECserver 500 section in this
volume for details on installing and testing the
DECserver 550.
Functionally and physically, the DECserver 550 is similar to the DECserver 500 and the upgraded
DECserver 500, with the following differences.

Table 1

DECserver 500jDECserver 550 Differences

DECserver 500

DECserver 500 Upgrade

DECserver 550

Single power supply

Two nonredundant
power supplies
M9060-YA load module

KDJ II-SB CPU
(0.5 MB memory)

KDJ II.,SD CPU
(1.5 MB memory)

KDJ II-SD CPU
(1.5 MB memory)

DEQNA Ethernet
controller (supports
standard Ethernet)

DEQNA Ethernet
controller. Also
supports use of DESQA
for both standard and
Thin Wire Ethernet

DESQA Ethernet
controller (supports
both standard and
Thin Wire Ethernet

CXA16, CXB16, CXY08

CXA 16, CXB 16, CXY08,
CXM04 and future highpower options

256 sessions

512 sessions

Vl.O minimum software
version

V 1.1 minimum software
version

DS550-1

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION
DECserver 550 Versions
The DECserver 550 is available in two versions (DSRVS-nx), where "nx" designates the particular model.
The "n" specifies whether the model is a rack-mount version or an office version. The "x." specifies the
operating voltage. Table 2 lists the four basic models.
Table 2

DECserver 550 Models

Model

Description

DSRVS-CA
DSRVS-CB

120 Vac rack-mount model
240 Vac rack-mount model

DSRVS-OA
DSRVS-OB

120 Vac office model
240 Vac office model

Network Configurations
The DECserver 550 supports both standard (Thickwire) and ThinWire Ethernet interconnects which can be
selected by a jumper on the DESQA module (Figure 1). DECserver 550 configurations for standard
Ethernet are the same as the DECserver 500 configurations.
JUMPER BLOCK
000
000

ggg
000
000
000
000
'-r-''-r-'

ThinWire-.J

LThickwire

DOD

D
MKV88·1835

Figure 1

Standard/ThinWire Ethernet Selection
OS550-2

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents or documentation kits for more information on the DECserver 550
terminal server.
Use the documentation kit order number when ordering software documentation; use the document number
when ordering hardware documents.
Software Manual Kits

VMS Software Documentation Kit
Order number
Contents

RSX-I1M-PLUS Software Documentation Kit
Order number
QRZ46-GZ
Contents
Identified by number 2 in Table 3

Micro/RSX Software Documentation Kit
Order number
QYZ46-GZ
Contents
Identified by number 3 in Table 3

Table 3
Found
in Kit

)

QA-03KAA-GZ
Identified by number 1 in Table 3

1,2,3
1

2
3

1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
1
1,2,3

Software Manuals

Title

Using DECserver 500 Documents
DECserver 500 Software Installation Guide (VMS)
DECserver 500 Software Installation Guide (RSX-ll M-PLUS)
DECserver 500 Software Installation Guide (Micro/RSX)
DECserver 500 User's Guide
Terminal Server User's Reference Card
DECserver 500 Management Guide
Terminal Server Commands and Messages Reference
DECserver 500 Commands Mini-Reference
DECserver 550 System Owner's Guide
Local Area Transport (LAT) Network Concepts
DECserver 550 Problem Determination and Service Guide
LATplus/VMS Service Node Management Guide
Terminal Server Glossary

DS550-3

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

Hardware Manuals
Title

Part Number

DECserver 550 Hardware Installation Guide

EK-DS550-IN

DECserver 550 Identification Card

EK-DS550-IC

DECserver 550 Troubleshooting Quick Reference Card

EK-DS550-RC

BA2l3 Enclosure Illustrated Parts Breakdown

EK-BA213-IP

DECserver 500/550 Print Set

MP-02505-0 1

Hardware Components
The following list shows the difference in the field replaceable units between the DECserver 500 and the
DECserver 550.
DECserver 500

DECserver 550

DEQNA (M7504-PA) Ethernet
controller. Supports standard
Ethernet interconnects.

DESQA (M3127-PA) Ethernet
controller. Supports standard
and ThinWire Ethernet interconnects.

KDJ11-SB CPU (M7554-SB) with
0.5 MB memory

KDJI1-SD CPU (M7554-SD) with
1.5 MB memory
M9060-YA load module
ThinWire loop back connector
made up of:
• One BNC TEE (H8223), and
• Two terminators (H8225)
Strain relief clamp (PIN: 12-29702-01)

DS550-4

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

Physical Specifications
The only difference in physical specifications between the DECserver 500 and the DECserver 550 is the
weight. The DECserver 550 office model weighs 40.7 kilograms (90 lbs) and the rack-mount model weighs
29.9 kilograms (66 lbs).
Electrical Specifications
Table 4 lists the power specifications for the DECserver 550.

Table 4

Power Specifications

Parameter

DSRVS-CA (or -DA)

DSRVS-CB (or -DB)

Voltage range

100-120 Vac (3-wire)

220-240 Vac (IN+PE)

Frequency

47 to 63 Hz

Line Current

10.2 amperes (maximum)

4.7 amperes (maximum)

Power

675 watts

The DECserver 550 has two nonredundant power supplies. These power supplies are the same as those used
in the DECserver 500, and the installation procedures are also the same. The power distribution is different,
however, as shown in Figure 2.
DECserver 550

DECserver 500 + UPGRADE

+5V

vi
+12V

+5V

+12V

a.:

---

SLOTS 1-12

r-+5V

a.:

'------v-----/ '----v--'
SLOTS 7-12

SLOTS 1-6 ' - -

* SLOT 12 LOAD MODULE M9060A
PROVIDES 5A LOAD FOR P.S.2
MKV88·1836

Figure 2

Power Distribution (DECserver 500jDECserver 550)

Installation
Installation for the DECserver 550 is the same as installation for the DECserver 500. Refer to the
DECserver 500 section in this volume for details on installing the server. For information on installing the
CXM04 Line Card, continue with this section.

DS550·5

DEC~r~r550INSTALLATION

Installing the CXM04 Line Card

POWER UP THE
SERVER IN BOOT
MODE2

YES
VERIFY THAT THE
LOCAL CONSOLE
TERMINAL SHOWS A
SELF-TEST VERSION OF
V2.0.0 OR HIGHER

TYPE SHOW SERVER
STATUS AT THE
LOCAL PROMPT OF
ANY TERMINAL
ATTACHED TO THE
SERVER

VERIFY THAT THE
REVISION OF THE ROM
IS V2.0.0 OR LATER
(SEE FIGURE 4-)

MKV89-0134

Figure 3

CXM04 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

OS550-6

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

VERIFY THAT THE
SHIPPING BOX
CONTAINS THE ITEMS
SHOWN IN FIGURE 5

DETERMINE THE
LOCATION OF THE
FIRST VACANT LINE
CARD SLOT TO THE
LEFT OF THE CPU
MODULE

ADDRESS SWITCHES
TO THE LINE CARD
SLOT SELECTED
(FIGURES 6 AND 7)

SET THE INTERRUPT
VECTOR SWITCHES TO
THE LINE CARD SLOT
SELECTED (FIGURES
6 AND 8)

MKV89·0135

Figure 3

CXM04 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

DS550-7

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

(

YES
SET POLE NUMBER 7
OF THE INTERRUPT
VECTOR SWITCHPACK
TO THE OPEN
POSITION
SET ALL FOUR
JUMPERS TO PINS 1
AND 2 (FIGURE 9)
SET ALL FOUR
JUMPERS TO PINS 2
AND 3 (FIGURE 9)

MKV89-0136

Figure 3

CXM04 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

DS550-8

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

REMOVE THE FILLER
GAP PANEL IF
NECESSARY (FIGURE
10)

REMOVE THE LOAD
MODULE IF
NECESSARY (FIGURE
11 )

INSTALL THE CXM04
IN THE SELECTED
SLOT (FIGURE 12)

)

CONNECT CABLES TO
THE CXM04 LINE CARD.
REFER TO THE
CABLING SECTION

TEST THE CXM04 LINE
CARD. GO TO THE
"TESTING THE CXM04
LINE CARD" SECTION

MKVB9·0137

Figure 3

CXM04 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

DS550-9

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

Local> SHOW SERVER STATUS
DECserver 500 V2.1.1
Address:

LAT V5.1

08-00-2B-08-D2-28

ROM V2.0.2
Name:

C212

Uptime: 0 1:10:40
Number:

Cur

High

Max

Active Ports:
Active Users:
Queue Entries:

1
1
0

33
33
8

Minutes to Shutdown:
DisCARDd Nodes:
Resource Errors:

0
0
0

Available Services:
Local Services:
Reachable Nodes:

18
0
18

N/A
255
100

Port Framing Errors:
Port Parity Errors:
Port Overrun Errors:

0
0
0

Active Circuits:
Connected Nodes:
Connected Sessions:
% CPU Used:
% Memory Used:

0
0

64
64
256
100
100

Primary Host:
JOANY
Load Address: AA-00-04-00-35-04
Dump Address: None Available

1
5

41
5

MKV89-0162

Figure 4

Example of A SHOW SERVER STATUS Command

DS550-10

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

o CXM04 LINE CARD

[]

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII

D
o CXM04 LOOPBACK CABLES (4)

)

o BARREL CONNECTOR
MKV89-0157

Figure 5

Contents of Shipping Box

DS550-11

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

(

9 10

mmm~m~mmlmlml
-----OPEN----\

\
\
\

INTERRUPT VECTOR
SWiTCHPACK
\

\
\
\

PIN 1 C
\
\
\

PIN
PIN 3 C
\

JUMPER
\
\
\
\

CONFIGURA TI ON
JUMPERS

DEVICE ADDRESS '"
SWiTCHPACK
"

1 2 3

7 8

m1mml~~~~~~
-----OPEN-----LKG-2448-88

Figure 6

CXM04 Switch pack Locations

DS550-12

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

MSB

LSB

o
DEVICE
ADDRESS

BITS

OPEN=1

DEVICE
ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK

CARD
SLOT

LC1

)

SWlTCHPAQ( SWITCHES

CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN . CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

DEVICE
ADDRESS

CLOSE 177604-40

LC2 CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN
LeJ CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

CLOSE CLOSE OPEN OPEN 177604e0
CLOSE OPEN CLOSE CLOSE 17760500

LC4 CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE
L~ ClOSE ClOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

ClOSE OPEN ClOSE OPEN 1776~20
ClOSE OPEN OPEN ClOSE 1776~

LCS CLoSE CLOSE ClOSE CLOSE OPEN
LC7 ClOSE ClOSE CLOSE ClOSE OPEN
LCS ClOSE ClOSE ClOSE ClOSE OPEN
LC9 CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN
LC10 ClOSE ClOSE ClOSE ClOSE OPEN

ClOSE OPEN OPEN OPEN 1776~0
OPEN ClOSE ClOSE ClOSE 17760600
OPEN CLOSE ClOSE OPEN 17760620
OPEN CLOSE OPEN ClOSE 17760640
OPEN CLOSE OPEN OPEN 17760660
LKG-2449-88

Figure 7

CXM04 Device Address Switch Settings

DS550-13

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

MSB
VECTOR
ADDRESS

BITS

INTERRUPT
VECTOR
SWiTCHPACK

OPEN=1
RESS BOTIOM
PORTION IN
TO OPEN
' - - - - - - OPEN TO SELECT

-.--+---r---+---+--~--~--T

CARD
SLOT

C~ P~T

VECTOR
SWlTCHPACI( SWITCHES

ADDRESS

LC1

OPEN

a.OSE

310

LC2

OPEN

a.OSE

320

LC3

OPEN

a.OSE

330

LC4

OPEN

OIIEN a.OSE

340

LC5

OPEN

a.OSE

350

LC8

OPEN

a.OSE

360

LC7

OPEN

a.OSE

LC8

a.OSE a.OSE OPEN

LC9

CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

~
410

CLOSE CLOSE OPEN

420

370

LKG-2450-88

Figure 8

CXM04 Interrupt Vector Switch Settings

DS550-14

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

FOR CONNECTING
IBM@3270 TERMINALS

---J
PIN 1 c

......~~--J

PIN2~

PIN3 C
JUMPER

FOR CONNECTING CCU
AND IBM@3270 TERMINALS
CONFIGURATION
JUMPERS

MKV89-0158

)

Figure 9

Configuration Jumper Setting

DS550-15

DECseiver 550 INSTALLATION

BLANK MODULE
HANDLE

FILLER GAP PANEL

LKG- 2451-88

Figure 10

Removing the Filler Gap Panel

DS550-16

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

LOAD
MODULE

RELEASE
LEVERS

LKG-2452-89

Figure 11

Removing the Load Module

DS550-17

DECserver 550 INSTALLATION

CARD CAGE
MODULE GUIDES
(TOP AND BOTTOM)
MKV89-0159

Figure 12

Installing the Line Card

DS550-18

DECserver 550 CABLING

\
)

Cabling
Cabling for the DECserver 550 is the same as cabling for the DECserver 500 except for the cabling of the
CXM04 Line Card. This section covers cabling for the CXM04. Refer to the DECserver 500 section in this
volume for details on cabling the DECserver 550.
The CXM04 Line Card can be used in one of two configurations.
•

A single line card can support up to four IBM® 3270 terminals with associated connections to a
single IBM® 3x74 or equivalent cluster controller unit (CCU). Figure 13 is an example of this
configuration.

•

A single line card can support up to eight IBM® 3270 terminals with no connections to a CCU.
Figure 14 is an example of this configuration.

Each CXM04 Line Card supports up to eight coaxial cables and/or twisted-pair cables with baluns.
Whenever twisted-pair cabling is used, baluns must be used at the CXM04 Line Card connector and at the
terminal (or CCU) connector.
NOTE
The coaxial cable must be RG62A/U or equivalent.
Table 5 shows the maximum cable lengths and the cabling procedure is provided in the flow diagrams of
Figures 15 and 16.

)

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

DS550-19

DECserver 550 CABLING

Table 5 Maximum Cable Lengths
Cable

Maximum Distance

Cable Type

Server

IBM(1i) 3270 terminal with

1500 m (4920 ft)

Coaxial only

no connection to a CCU
Server

IBM® 3270 terminal with
no connection to a CCU

305 m (1000 ft)

Twisted pair

Server

IBMCii) 3270 terminal with

610 m (2000 ft)

Shielded
twisted pair

no connection to a CCU
CCU

IBM® 3270 terminal via
the server

1500 m (4920 ft)*

Coaxial only

CCU

IBM(iI) 3270 terminal via

305 m (1000 ft)*
with two baluns
total between the
CCU and the IBM®
3270 terminal

Coaxial and
unshielded
twisted pair

the server

CCU

IBM@ 3270 terminal via
the server

610 m (2000 ft)*
with two baluns
total between the
CCU and the IBM®
3270 terminal

Coaxial and
unshielded
twisted pair

CCU

IBM(tO 3270 terminal via
the server

244 m (800 ft)*
with four baluns
total between the
CCU and the IBM®
3270 terminal

Unshielded
twisted pair

*This is the combined distance from the terminal to the server, and from the server to the CCU.

DS550-20

DECserver 550 CABLING

CXM04

RG62A/U
COAXIAL CABLE
OR
TWISTED PAl R
WITH BALUNS

TERMINALS

CONTROLLER
UNIT
MKV89-0160

Figure 13

CXM04 Configuration for IBM® 3270 Terminals and CCU

DS550-21

DECserver 550 CABLING

0000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000

CXM04

RG62A/U
COAXIAL CABLE
OR
TWISTED PAIR
WITH BALUNS

MKV89-0161

Figure 14

CXM04 Configuration for IBM® 3270 Terminals Only

DS550-22

DECserver 550 CABLING

CONNECT THE CABLE
FROM THE CCU TO THE
BOTTOM CONNECTOR

NOTE
FOR EXISTING CCU TO
IBM@3270 TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS, IT IS
IMPORTANT TO KEEP
THE SAME CCU TO
TERMINAL PORT
NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

'1
)

DETERMINE WHICH
IBM@3270
TERMINAL CONNECTS
TO THE NEXT
CONNECTOR. (SEE
NOTE)

CONNECT THE CABLE
FROM THIS TERMINAL
TO THE NEXT
CONNECTOR

THE CXM04 LINE CARD IS
CONFIGURED SO THAT
EACH TERMINAL CAN
COMMUNICATE ONLY
WITH THE CCU LINE THAT
IS PHYSICALLY ATTACHED
TO TH E ADJACENT
CONNECTOR.
A CXM04 CONNECTED
TO MULTIPLE CCUs
WILL CAUSE A FATAL
ERROR.

GO TO THE "TESTING
THE CXM04 LINE

MKV89-0151

Figure 15

Cabling Flow Diagram for IBM® 3270 Terminals and CCU

OS550-23

DECserver 550 CABLING

CONNECT THE CABLE
FROM THE FIRST IBM®
3270 TERMINAL TO
THE BOTTOM
CONNECTOR

CONNECT THE CABLE
FROM THE NEXT IBM®
3270 TERMINAL TO

INSTALL THE FILLER
GAP PANEL TO THE
LEFT 0 F TH E LAST
LINE CARD (IF
NEEDED)

LABEL THE CABLES
BASED ON THE
PRESCRIBED
NUMBERING SCHEME

GO TO THE "TESTING
THE CXM04 LINE
CARD" SECTION

MKV89-0152

Figure 16

Cabling Flow Diagram for IBM® 3270 Terminals Only

DS550-24

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics
Diagnostics for the DECserver 550 are the same as diagnostics for the DECserver 500. Refer to the
DECserver 500 section in this volume for details on diagnostics. Continue with this section for information
on testing the CXM04 Line Card.

)
/

DS550-25

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

Testing the CXM04 Line Card

YES
SIMULTANEOUSLY
PRESS ALT AND TEST
(OR EQUIVALENT)
KEYS ON THE LEFT
SIDE OFTHE
KEYBOARD

TYPE A RANDOM
SERIES OF
CHARACTERS ON THE
LARGER KEYPAD

RECHECK CABLING OR
REFER TO THE
NO

DECserver 500/550
PROBLEM
DETERMINA TION AND
SERVICE GUIDE

MKV89·0153

Figure 17

Testing the CXM04 (Sheet 1 of 4)

DS550-26

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

ENSURE THAT ONE
VIDEO DEC423 OR
EIA-232-D COMPATIBLE
TERMINAL IS CABLED
TO THE CPU MODULE
AT THE LOCAL
CONSOLE PORT

SET THE SERVER BOOT
MODE SWITCH TO
POSITION 3 (FIGURE
18)

)

APPLY POWER TO THE
SERVER AND OBSERVE
THAT THE SELF-TEST
PROGRAM RUNS

REMOVE POWER AND
RECHECK THE DEVICE
ADDRESS SWITCHES

MKV89-0154

Figure 17

Testing the CXM04 (Sheet 2 of 4)

DS550-27

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

SET THE BOOT MODE
SWITCH TO POSITION
2 AND PRESS THE
BOOT MODE SWITCH

REFER TO THE
DECserver 500/550
PROBLEM
DETERMINA TlON AND
SERVICE GUIDE

START THE
ASYNCHRONOUS
TEST

REFER TO THE
DECserver 500/550
~----. PROBLEM
DETERMINA TION AND
SERVICE GUIDE
NO

MKV89-0155

Figure 17

Testing the CXM04 (Sheet 3 of 4)

DS550-28

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

RECORD THE CABLE
DESTINATIONS ON THE
CONFIGURATION
CHART ON TH E BACK
OF TH E DECseNer 550

TROUBLESHOOTING
QUICK REFERENCE
CARD

SET BOOT MODE
SWITCH TO
POSITION 1

PRESS THE BOOT
SWITCH AND OBSERVE
WHETHER THE SELFTEST PASSES 0 R
FAILS

REFER TO THE
NO
DECseNer 500/550
>---1 PROBLEM

DETERMINA TlON AND
SERVICE GUIDE

REINSTALL THE
FRONT COVER IF
APPLICABLE

MKV89·0156

Figure 17

Testing the CXM04 (Sheet 4 of 4)

DS550-29

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

ETHERNET
SELF-TEST
LEOs
MODULE OK LEOs

POWER SWITCH ON

..s

COAXIAL -H--I-+-+-I-~
CABLES

LOCAL CONSOLE
PORT

CXM04 LINE CARD
LKG-2512-89.4.

Figure 18

Server Self-Test Indicators and Switches

DS550-30

DECserver 550 DIAGNOSTICS

MAP OF THE DECserver 500/550
Slot

Qbus Address

17774440
17760440
17760460
5 17760500
6 17760520
17760540
17760560
17760600
10 17760620
11 17760640
12 17760660

17774456
17760456
17760476
17760516
17760536
17760556
17760576
17760616
17760636
17760656
17760676

Vector
Exp Act
120
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
400
410
420

120
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
400

Name

Device

Installed

Status

CPU
KDJ11-SD, 18 MHz, 1024kb Good
NETO DI!!SQA, 08-00-00-00-00-01 Good
LC01 CXM04
Good
LC02 CXY08, DHUll MODE
Good
LC03 CXA16, DHUll MODE
Good
LC04 CXA16, DHU11 MODI!!
Good
LCOS CXA16, DHU11 MODE
Good
LC06 CXY08, DHU11 MODI!!
Good
LC07 CXA16, DHU11 MODE
Good
LC08 CXA16, DHU11 MODI!!
Good
Nothing installed
Nothing installed
MKV89-0163

Figure 19

Sample System Configuration Map

)

DS550-31

DECserver 550 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Maintenance Aids
Maintenance aids for the DECserver 550 are the same as the maintenance aids for the DECserver 500,
except those concerning the DESQA Ethernet controller. Refer to the DESQA section in Volume 6 for
DESQA maintenance aids. Refer to the DECserver 500 section in this volume for details on the DECserver
500 maintenance aids

DS550-32

Communications Options Minireference Manual
Volume 5 Ethernet Devices (Part 1)
EK-CMIV5-RM-005

READER'S COMMENTS
Your comments and suggestions will help us in our efforts to improve the quality of our publications.
1. How did you use this manual? (Circle your response.)
(a) Installation
(b) Operation/use
2.

Did the manual meet your needs? Yes 0

(e) Training
(f) Other (Please specify.) _ _ _ _ _ _ __
No 0

Why?

3. Please rate the manual on the following ca.egories. (Circle your response.)
Accuracy
Clarity
Completeness
Table of Contents, Index
Illustrations, examples
Overall ease of use

Excellent
5
5
5
5
5
5

Good
4
4
4
4
4
4

Fair
3
3
3
3
3
3

Poor
2
2
2
2
2
2

Unacceptable
1

4. What things did you like most about this manual?

What things did you like least about this manual? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Please list and describe any errors you found in the manual.
Page

Description/Location of Error

Name _ _ _ _~-----------Street __________________

Job Title ____________________
Company ________________________

City _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Department __________________________

State/Country __________________

Telephone Number __________________

Postal (ZI P) Code

Date

THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENTS AND SUGGESTIONS.
Please do not use this form to order manuals. Contact your representative at Digital Equipment Corporation
or (in the USA) call our DECdirectTl.. department at this toll-free number: 800-258-1710.
<Cl 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation.

MKO

FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE.

No Postage
Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

PERMIT NO. 33

MAYNARD, MA

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Educational Services/Quality Assurance
12 Crosby Drive BUO/E08
Bedford, MA 01730-1493
USA

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE.